[featured_image]
Download
Download is available until [expire_date]
  • Version 2020
  • Download 965
  • Tamanho do Arquivo 8.09 MB
  • File Count 1
  • Data de Criação 16 de novembro de 2020
  • Ultima Atualização 16 de novembro de 2020

Manual L100

LS ELECTRIC strives to maximize your profits in gratitude for choosing us as your partner. AC Variable Speed Drive 5.5-22kW [400V] LSLV-L100 series This operation manual is intended for users with general knowledge of electrical theory and installation. Ensure that the end user and the maintenance technician receive this user manual. * L100 is the official name for the L100 series of inverters. Before installing and using the L100 series inverter, carefully read this manual to understand the inverter’s features and to learn the essential information required to properly install and operate the inverter. User manuals for optional add-on modules The following is a list of user manuals that are supplied with the corresponding add-on boards. These optional add-on boards are compatible with the L100 series products. You can download the PDF versions of these user manuals by visiting www.lselectric.co.kr. (go to [SUPPORT & SERVICES]–[Download Center]) • L100 Incremental Pulse Encoder Add-on Module User Manual (English) • L100 SIN/COS Encoder Add-on Module User Manual (English) • L100 EnDat Encoder Add-on Module User Manual (English) • L100 ELIO Add-on Module User Manual (English) After reading this manual, store it in a location accessible to users at any time. Safety Information ii Safety Information Read and follow all safety instructions in this manual precisely to avoid unsafe operating conditions, property damage, personal injury, or death. Safety symbols in this manual Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in severe injury or death. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in injury or death. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor injury or property damage. Safety Information iii Safety information • Do not open the cover of the equipment while it is on or operating. Likewise, do not operate the inverter while the cover is open. Exposure of high voltage terminals or charging area to the external environment may result in an electric shock. Do not remove any covers or touch the internal circuit boards (PCBs) or electrical contacts on the product when the power is on or during operation. Doing so may result in serious injury, death, or serious property damage. • Do not open the cover of the equipment even when the power supply to the inverter has been turned off unless it is necessary for maintenance or regular inspection. Opening the cover may result in an electric shock even when the power supply is off. • The equipment may hold charge long after the power supply has been turned off. Use a multi-meter to make sure that there is no voltage before working on the inverter, motor or motor cable. • Supply earthing system: TT, TN, not suitable for corner-earthed systems. • Wait at least 10 minutes before opening the covers and exposing the terminal connections. Before starting work on the inverter, test the connections to ensure all DC voltage has been fully discharged. Personal injury or death by electric shock may result. • Do not install this equipment on or near combustible material. Doing so may cause a fire. • This equipment must be electrically grounded for safe and proper operation. • Do not use or supply power to a faulty inverter. If the inverter is faulty, disconnect the power supply and arrange for qualified technical support. • The inverter will become hot during normal operation. To avoid burns, do not iv Safety Information touch the inverter until it has cooled. • Do not allow foreign objects, such as screws, metal filings, debris, water, or oil to enter the inverter. Foreign objects inside the inverter may cause the inverter to malfunction or result in a fire. • Do not touch the inverter with wet hands. Doing so may result in electric shock. • Do not modify the inverter. Doing so will void the warranty. • The inverter is designed to operate 3-phase motors. Do not use the inverter to operate single phase motors. • Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Doing so may damage the cable and result in electric shock. Quick Reference Table v Quick Reference Table The following table contains situations frequently encountered by users while working with inverters. Refer to the typical and practical situations in the table to quickly and easily locate answers to your questions. Situation Reference I want to configure motor parameters. p. 148 p. 155 The inverter or the motor does not seem to be working properly. p. 334 What is auto-tuning? p. 155 What are the recommended cable lengths? p. 21 p. 31 The motor is making a loud noise. p. 151 p. 219 I want to review the recent history of fault trips and warnings. p. 338 I want to use a potentiometer to change the inverter’s operating frequency. p. 68 I want to operate the inverter using a multistep speed configuration. p. 217 The motor is running too hot. p. 351 p. 151 I want to change the items that are monitored on the keypad. p. 133 p. 135 Table of Contents vi Table of Contents 1 Preparing the Installation ............................................................................. 2 1.1 Product identification ............................................................................ 2 1.2 Part names ........................................................................................... 4 1.3 Installation considerations.................................................................... 5 1.4 Selecting and preparing a site for installation...................................... 6 1.5 Cable selection ..................................................................................... 8 2 Installing the Inverter .................................................................................. 10 2.1 Mounting the inverter.......................................................................... 12 2.2 Cable connections.............................................................................. 15 2.3 Post-installation checklist ................................................................... 48 2.4 Test run ............................................................................................... 50 3 Performing basic operations..................................................................... 52 3.1 About the keypad................................................................................ 53 3.1.1 Operation keys ........................................................................ 54 3.1.2 About the display..................................................................... 55 3.1.3 Control menu........................................................................... 58 3.2 Using the keypad................................................................................ 59 3.2.1 Group and code selection....................................................... 59 3.2.2 Navigating directly to different codes...................................... 60 3.2.3 Setting parameter values........................................................ 60 3.2.4 Setting parameter labels......................................................... 61 3.2.5 Configuring acceleration time on the keypad......................... 62 3.3 Confirming the encoder operation ..................................................... 63 3.3.1 Definition of forward and reverse operations ......................... 63 3.3.2 Confirming the forward and reverse operations .................... 63 Table of Contents vii 3.4 Operating the inverter with the keypad.............................................. 64 3.4.1 Setting parameter values for keypad operation..................... 64 3.4.2 Forward and reverse operations ............................................ 65 3.5 Operating the inverter using the control terminal block..................... 67 3.5.1 Setting parameter values for control terminal block operation .................................................................................................67 3.5.2 Cable connections for potentiometer speed control (V1 analog input)........................................................................................ 68 3.5.3 Adjusting the analog input bias and gain (V1 analog input).. 68 3.5.4 Operating in forward and reverse directions.......................... 70 4 Basic and advanced features .................................................................... 76 4.1 Introduction of basic features............................................................. 76 4.2 Introduction of advanced features ..................................................... 78 5 Table of functions........................................................................................ 80 5.1 Display (DIS) group............................................................................ 80 5.2 Parameter (PAR) group...................................................................... 83 5.3 Digital input and output (DIO) group.................................................. 89 5.4 Analog input and output (AIO) group................................................. 95 5.5 Function (FUN) group.......................................................................104 5.6 Control (CON) group ........................................................................ 112 5.7 Elevator (E/L) group ......................................................................... 119 5.8 Protection (PRT) group ....................................................................127 5.9 Communication (COM) group..........................................................131 5.10 User (USR) group.............................................................................132 6 Detailed operation by function groups ..................................................133 6.1 Display (DIS) group..........................................................................133 Table of Contents viii 6.1.1 DIS_00 (Motor operation monitoring)...................................133 6.1.2 User defined information (DIS_01, 02, 03) ..........................135 6.1.3 Display add-on module (option board, DIS_04) ..................140 6.1.4 Fault status display (DIS_05)................................................140 6.1.5 Software version display (DIS_06).......................................142 6.1.6 User group display options (DIS_10)...................................142 6.2 Parameter (PAR) group....................................................................143 6.2.1 Jump code (PAR_00)............................................................143 6.2.2 Parameter-related settings ...................................................144 6.2.3 Motor-related settings ...........................................................147 6.2.4 Auto-tuning ............................................................................155 6.3 Digital input and output (DIO) group................................................171 6.3.1 Jump code (DIO_00) ............................................................171 6.3.2 Multifunction digital input terminal.........................................172 6.3.3 Multifunction digital output terminal ......................................179 6.4 Analog input and output (AIO) group...............................................194 6.4.1 Jump code (AIO_00).............................................................194 6.4.2 Multifunction analog input .....................................................195 6.4.3 Analog output ........................................................................206 6.5 Function (FUN) group.......................................................................212 6.5.1 Jump code (FUN_00) ...........................................................212 6.5.2 Selecting the command source............................................213 6.5.3 DC-braking stop (FUN_06–FUN_09)...................................215 6.5.4 Start after DC-braking: Dc-Start (FUN_10–FUN_11)..........216 6.5.5 Setting the speed reference for multistep operations..........217 6.5.6 Frequency jump (Jump Freq)...............................................219 6.5.7 Setting acceleration and deceleration patterns and times ..220 6.5.8 Setting parameters for short floor operations (FUN_56, FUN_57)................................................................................230 6.5.9 Setting parameters for anti-hunting regulator ......................233 6.5.10 Setting the operation speed and input voltage for battery operation ...............................................................................234 Table of Contents ix 6.5.11 ALLS (Automatic light load search) (FUN_69–FUN_72)....237 6.5.12 Automatic load cell calculation..............................................241 6.5.13 Setting zero-speed deceleration time (FUN_94–FUN_97).245 6.6 Control (CON) group ........................................................................247 6.6.1 Code jumping - accessing certain codes directly (CON_00) ...............................................................................................247 6.6.2 Speed controller PI ratio........................................................248 6.6.3 Speed controller (Automatic Speed Regulator: ASR) .........248 6.6.4 Overshoot Prevention...........................................................252 6.6.5 Torque-related parameters ...................................................253 6.6.6 Torque boost..........................................................................257 6.6.7 V/F (Voltage/Frequency) control...........................................263 6.6.8 Motor output voltage control (CON_57)...............................266 6.6.9 Slip compensation.................................................................267 6.6.10 Anti Rollback Function ..........................................................270 6.6.11 Automatic current regulator (ACR))......................................272 6.6.12 Flux current level control.......................................................273 6.7 Elevator (E/L) group .........................................................................274 6.8 Protection (PRT) group ....................................................................275 6.8.1 Jump code (PRT_00)............................................................275 6.8.2 Motor thermal protection ( I T 2 )...........................................275 6.8.3 Restart delay time after stop command ...............................278 6.8.4 EnDat add-on module-related function setting ....................279 6.8.5 Encoder error detection ........................................................280 6.8.6 Software encoder error detection (PRT_11–12: Detection time of encoder error, encoder error based on the speed rate)..280 6.8.7 Speed deviation error settings..............................................283 6.8.8 Overspeed fault detection (Over Speed) .............................284 6.8.9 Input/output phase open detection.......................................284 6.8.10 Overload................................................................................285 6.8.11 Overload limit selection, level, time (PRT_22–24)...............287 6.8.12 Inv OH Warn..........................................................................287 6.8.13 Low Voltage2 (LV2) function.................................................288 Table of Contents x 6.8.14 A3 Safety...............................................................................288 6.8.15 Fan fault.................................................................................289 6.8.16 Safety Torque Off (STO).......................................................290 6.9 Communication (COM) group..........................................................292 6.9.1 Jump code (COM_00)..........................................................292 6.9.2 Setting Station ID for CAN communication (COM_01).......292 6.9.3 Setting CAN communication speed (COM_02)...................293 6.9.4 Setting CAN communication mode (COM_03)...................293 6.9.5 Setting Station ID for RS232 communication (COM_04)....293 6.9.6 Setting RS232 communication speed (COM_05)...............294 6.9.7 Setting RS232 communication mode (COM_06)................294 6.9.8 Setting response delay time (COM_07)...............................294 6.9.9 Setting protection against lost command (COM_08, COM_09) ...............................................................................................295 6.10 User (USR) group.............................................................................296 6.10.1 Jump code (USR_00)...........................................................297 6.10.2 Definition of macro ................................................................297 6.10.3 User code definition (USR_04–67) ......................................299 7 Communication features..........................................................................301 7.1 RS232 communication standards ...................................................301 7.2 RS232 communication system configuration..................................302 7.2.1 Communication cable connections ......................................302 7.2.2 Communication memory map..............................................303 7.3 Network protocols.............................................................................303 7.3.1 LS INV 485 protocol..............................................................303 7.3.2 Read protocol details ............................................................306 7.3.3 Write protocol details.............................................................307 7.3.4 Error codes............................................................................308 7.3.5 Common parameter compatibility ........................................309 7.3.6 iS7 expansion common parameters ....................................314 7.3.7 L100 (iV5L) common parameters ........................................322 Table of Contents xi 7.4 CAN Communication features.........................................................325 7.4.1 CAN communication standards............................................325 7.4.2 CAN communication system configuration..........................327 7.5 Cable configuration for DriveView application.................................332 8 Troubleshooting.........................................................................................334 8.1 Fault trips ..........................................................................................334 8.2 Confirming the fault status and fault history ....................................338 8.2.1 Confirming the fault status and storing the fault information338 8.2.2 Confirming the fault history ...................................................338 8.3 Resetting fault trips...........................................................................339 8.4 Troubleshooting when a fault trip occurs.........................................339 8.5 Troubleshooting after a test run .......................................................344 8.6 Troubleshooting other faults.............................................................351 9 Maintenance ...............................................................................................357 9.1 Regular inspections..........................................................................359 9.1.1 Daily inspection .....................................................................359 9.1.2 Annual inspection..................................................................361 9.1.3 Biannual inspection...............................................................364 9.2 Diode module and IGBT inspection.................................................365 9.3 Replacement cycle and maintenance of major components .........366 9.4 Storage and disposal........................................................................366 9.4.1 Storage ..................................................................................366 9.4.2 Disposal.................................................................................367 10 Technical specifications...........................................................................368 10.1 Input and output specifications ........................................................368 10.2 Product specification details.............................................................369 Table of Contents xii 10.3 External dimensions.........................................................................372 10.4 Peripheral devices............................................................................373 10.5 Fuse and reactor specifications .......................................................373 10.6 Terminal screw specifications ..........................................................374 10.7 Braking resistor specifications..........................................................375 10.8 Braking resistor connections............................................................376 Index....................................................................................................................385 1 Preparing the Installation Preparation About the L100 series inverter This instruction manual includes information required to perform installation, test run, and basic operation of the L100 inverter. The L100 inverter provides precision vector control of motor speed and torque while driving 3-phase induction and synchronous motors. Main features • IGBT type speed sensors (encoders) can be installed for vector control. • Open-loop speed control in V/F and slip compensation modes • Closed-loop speed control in Speed(IM)and Speed(PM)modes • Error detection for hardware or software encoder • Power system redundancy and emergency backup power • Auto-tuning features: Rotational and stand-still auto tuning operations are available. Application The L100 series inverter has been specifically designed elevator applications Preparing the Installation 2 1 Preparing the Installation This chapter provides details about product identification, part names, correct installation procedures, and cable specifications. To install the inverter correctly and safely, carefully read and follow these instructions. To safely transport the inverter for installation: • Do not stack product packages in excess of allowed weight or allowed number of layers. • Do not open the packaging during transportation. 1.1 Product identification The L100 inverter comes from a product range suitable for various drive capacities and power supplies. Each model in the range has its specifications detailed on the rating plate. Check the rating plate before installing the product to ensure that the product meets your requirements. For more detailed product specifications, refer to 10.1 Input and output specifications on page 368. Note Check the product name, open the packaging, and then confirm that the product is free from defects. Contact your supplier if you have any questions about your product. 3 Preparing the Installation Preparation Preparing the Installation 4 1.2 Part names The diagram below displays names for the inverter’s parts. Details may vary between inverter models. 5 Preparing the Installation Preparation 1.3 Installation considerations Inverters contain various precision, electronic components. The installation environment can significantly impact the lifespan and reliability of the product. The table below details the ideal operation and installation conditions for the inverter. Item Description Ambient humidity 95% relative humidity (no condensation) Storage temperature - 14–104 °F (-10–40℃) Environmental factors An environment free from corrosive or flammable gases, oil residue, and dust.Avoid exposure to direct sunlight. Altitude/vibration Less than 3,280 ft (1,000 m) above sea level / less than 1.0 G (9.8 m/sec2) Air pressure 70 –106 kPa Do not allow the ambient temperature to exceed the allowable range while operating the inverter. Preparing the Installation 6 1.4 Selecting and preparing a site for installation When selecting an installation location consider the following points: • The inverter must be installed on a wall that can support the inverter’s weight. • The location must be free from vibration. Vibration can adversely affect the operation of the inverter. • Do not install the inverter in a location exposed to direct sunlight, high temperature, or high humidity. • Do not install the inverter near oil residue, flammable gas, or dust. Install the inverter in a clean location or inside an equipment cabinet. The air flow must be clean and free of conductive dust. • The inverter can become very hot during operation. Install the inverter on a surface that is fire-resistant or flame-retardant and with sufficient clearance around the inverter to allow air to circulate. The illustrations below detail the minimum installation clearances. 7 Preparing the Installation Preparation Ensure sufficient air circulation is provided around the inverter when it is installed. If the inverter is to be installed inside a cabinet, enclosure, or equipment rack, allow for the position of the inverter’s cooling fan and the ventilation grilles. The cooling fan must be positioned to efficiently transfer the heat generated by the inverter’s operation. • Do not install multiple inverters side-by-side. • Do not expose the inverter to rain, snow, fog, or dust. • Do not block the inverter’s air vents. Doing so may cause the inverter to overheat. Preparing the Installation 8 1.5 Cable selection When you install power and control cables for the inverter, use cables that meet the required specifications for the safe and reliable operation of the product. Refer to the following information to assist you with cable selection. • Use mains power cables with sufficient cross-sectional area to prevent voltage drop exceeding 2%. • Use copper cables rated at 600 V, 75℃ for mains power wiring. • Use copper cables rated at 300 V, 75℃ for control circuit wiring. • The inverters in the range between 5.5 kW and 22 kW must be grounded with industrial connector according to IEC60309. • The minimum size of the protective earthing conductor shall comply with the local safety regulations for high protective earthing conductor current equipment. • Only one conductor per terminal should be simultaneously connected. • The accessible connections and parts listed below are of protective class 0. It means that the protection of these circuits relies only upon basic insulation and becomes hazardous in the event of a failure of the basic insulation. Therefore, devices connected to these circuits must provide electrical-shock protection as if the device was connected supply mains voltage. In addition, during installation these parts must be considered, in relation with electrical shock, as supply mains voltage circuits. • Class 0 circuits include those for: - RUN/STOP COMMAND: FX, RX, BX, RST, CM - MULTIFUNCTION INPUT: P1–P7, CM - ANALOG INPUT: V1, I1 - ANALOG OUTPUT: AO1, AO2 - ENCODER INPUT: PE, GE, A+, A-, B+, B-, PA, PB, Z+, Z- - ECONDER OUTPUT: RA, GE, RB, GE - CONTACT: A1, C1, A2, C2, A3, C3, A4, C4, 30A, 30B, 30C 9 Preparing the Installation Preparation Ground and power cable specifications Load (kW) Ground cable Power cables (input and output) mm2 mm2 AWG R/S/T U/V/W R/S/T U/V/W 3-Phase 400 V 5.5 4 4 4 10 10 7.5 4 4 10 10 11 10 6 6 8 8 15 10 10 6 6 18.5 16 16 16 4 4 22 16 16 4 4 Control cable specifications Use STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cables for control wiring. Cross-sectional area/diameter mm2 AWG 0.2-0.8 18–26 Installing the Inverter 10 2 Installing the Inverter This chapter describes the physical and electrical installation of the L100 inverter, including mounting and wiring the product. Refer to the flowchart and the basic configuration diagram provided below to understand the procedures and installation instructions to be followed to install the product correctly. Installation flowchart The following flowchart lists the installation sequence. The steps cover equipment installation and testing. More information about each step is referenced in the steps. Installing the Inverter 11 Installation Synchronous motors may not operate properly without a parameter tuning (pole position estimation, especially). Basic configuration diagram The reference diagram below shows the configuration for a typical system including the inverter and peripheral devices. Before installing the inverter, ensure that the product is suitable for the application (power rating, capacity, etc.). Ensure that all of the required peripherals and optional devices (resistor brakes, contactors, noise filters, etc.) are available. For more details on peripheral devices, refer to 10.4Peripheral devices on page 373. • Diagrams in the manual are sometimes drawn with covers or circuit breakers removed to show a more detailed view of the installation arrangements. Ensure that all covers and circuit breakers are installed before operating the inverter. • Do not use the magnetic contactor on the input side of the inverter to start or stop the inverter. Installing the Inverter 12 • Install an additional safety device, such as an emergency brake to prevent the inverter losing control if it is damaged. • Install a separate emergency stop switch. The STOP key on the keypad works only when the keypad is connected to the inverter. • When the inverter powers up, high levels of current are present that can affect the circuit. Ensure that correctly rated circuit breakers are installed to operate the circuit safely while the inverter powers up. • Reactors can be installed to improve power factor. If the input power exceeds 600 kVA, reactors can be installed within 32.8 ft (10 m) of the power supply. Refer to 10.5 Fuse and reactor specifications on page 373 and ensure that reactors meet the specifications. 2.1 Mounting the inverter Follow the procedures below when mounting the inverter on a wall or inside an equipment cabinet. Before installing the inverter, ensure that the space meets the clearance specifications and that there are no obstacles that will restrict air flow. Select a wall or equipment cabinet suitable to support the inverter. Refer to 10.3 External dimensions on page 372 and confirm the dimensions for the mounting holes. Identify the position where the inverter will be mounted and then use a pencil to mark the top of the inverter. Use a spirit level and draw a horizontal line on the mounting surface at the pencil mark. Mark the two top mounting points on the line. Measure down the mounting surface to the position of the lower mounting points. Use the spirit level again and draw another horizontal line on the mounting surface. Mark the two lower mounting points on the line. Drill holes for the two upper and two lower mounting points. If fixing is not available, insert wall anchors into the four holes. Insert and start to tighten the two top mounting bolts. Do not fully tighten the bolts at this time. Installing the Inverter 13 Installation Mount the inverter on the two top bolts and then fully tighten them. Use one hand to support the inverter against the mounting surface and insert and tighten one of the lower mounting bolts. Then, insert and tighten the other lower mounting bolt. Installing the Inverter 14 • Do not expose the inverter to rain, snow, fog, or dust. • Do not block the inverter’s air vents. Doing so may cause the inverter to overheat. • Do not use the covers or plastic fittings on the outside of the inverter to lift the inverter. If the cover or plastic fitting breaks, the inverter may drop and cause injury or damage. Always use appropriate lifting devices when moving the inverter. • Inverter equipment can be heavy and bulky. Use appropriately rated equipment to lift and transport the inverter. • Do not install the inverter on the floor or mount it sideways. The inverter must be installed vertically on a wall or inside a cabinet, with its rear side flat against the mounting surface. Mount the inverter upright on a wall and secure it using bolts to ensure that it does not move. Installing the Inverter 15 Installation 2.2 Cable connections Open the front cover and connect the ground cable. Connect appropriately rated cables to the power and control terminal blocks. Read the following information carefully before making cable connections. All warning instructions must be followed. • All cables must be installed by certified technicians. • Do not modify cable connections or install/uninstall optional add-on modules while the inverter is operating. • Mount the inverter before connecting cables. Before installation, ensure that the inverter is not connected to a power source. • Use cables of specified ratings or higher and run the cables according to the recommended cable length. Using inferior cables may result in fire or electric shock. • Ensure no metal debris, such as wire offcuts, remain inside the inverter. Metal debris in the inverter may cause inverter failure. • Tighten terminal screws to their specified torque. Loose terminal screws may result in cable disconnection, cause a short circuit, or inverter failure. For more details, refer to page 374. • Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Heavy objects may damage the cable and result in electric shock. • Install a reactor if the input voltage to the inverter produces imbalance between the phases. High frequency emission from the inverter’s power source may overheat and damage phase advance capacitors or alternators. • Use mains power cables with sufficient cross-sectional area to prevent voltage drop exceeding 2%. Installing the Inverter 16 • Use copper cables rated at 600 V, 167℉ (75℃) for mains power wiring. • Use copper cables rated at 300 V, 167℉ (75℃) for control circuit wiring. • If cable connections are worked on after the inverter is installed, ensure the inverter keypad display and the charge lamp under the terminal cover is turned off before commencing work. The inverter may store an electric charge after the power supply has been turned off. Note Do not disconnect the motor cable while the inverter output is alive. Improper cable disconnection may lead to product damage. Step 1 Front cover The front cover must be removed to access the cable connections. Refer to the following procedures to remove the front cover. The steps to remove the cover may vary depending on the inverter model. Loosen the front cover screw (A) and remove the front cover by pulling the bottom of it towards you (1) and lifting it (2). Installing the Inverter 17 Installation Follow the instructions that follow when connecting the grounding, mains power, and control cables to the terminal blocks. For cable specifications, refer to 1.5 Cable selection on page 8. Step 2 Ground connection Remove the front cover. Then, follow the instructions below to connect the inverter’s ground cable. Locate the ground terminal and connect an appropriately rated ground cable to the terminals. Refer to 1.5 Cable selection on page 8 to determine the correct grounding cable for your installation. Note • Connect the ground cables to the ground terminals. Do not connect the ground cables to the inverter’s case bolts. • Use cables with as large cross-sectional area as possible for grounding. Ground cables must meet or exceed the specifications listed in the 1.5 Cable selection on page 8. Keep the ground cable as short as possible and ground termination as close as possible to the inverter. Connect the other end of all ground cable to an earth (ground) terminal. Installing the Inverter 18 Note The product requires special Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be ≤ 10 Ω. • Install ground connections for the inverter and the motor in accordance with the local codes and specifications to ensure safe and accurate operation. Using the inverter and the motor without the specified grounding connections may result in electric shock. • This product can cause a DC current in the protective earthing conductor. If an RCD or monitoring (RCM) device is used for protection, only RCD or RCM of Type B is allowed on supply side of this product. • Large amount of leakage current is generated around the inverter due to high-speed switching operation. The inverter and the motor must be properly grounded to prevent electric shock. Step 3 Power terminal wiring The following diagram shows the terminal layout on the power terminal block. Refer to the detailed descriptions to understand the function and location of each terminal before making wiring connections. Ensure that the cables selected meet or exceed the specifications in 1.5 Cable selection on page 8 before installing them. • Tighten the terminal screws to the rated torque. Loose or over tightened terminal screws may cause short circuits and equipment malfunction. • Use copper stranded cables only. Power cables must be rated at 600 V, 167℉ (75℃) and control circuit cables rated at 300 V, 167℉ (75℃). • For the inverter control circuit, use STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cables. Do not route the control cables in the same conduit where the power cables are Installing the Inverter 19 Installation routed. Use a separate conduit for the control cables. • Incoming power cables must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting incoming power cables to other terminals will cause internal damage to the inverter. Motor cables must be connected to the U, V, and W terminals. The correct phase rotation is not necessary. • Do not install phase advance capacitors in the inverter output and uninstall them if they had been previously installed. Phase advance capacitors in the inverter output causes inverter overcurrent fault trip. • B1 and B2 terminals on the main terminals block are for connecting braking resistors only. Do not connect any other device to these terminals. Power terminal layout 5.5/7.5 kW 11/15 kW 18.5/22 kW Installing the Inverter 20 Power terminal descriptions Terminal Name Description R/S/T (L1/L2/L3) AC power input terminals 3-phase AC power connection. P1 (+) DC link P(+) terminal DC link wiring connections. (P1 and P2 terminals are jumped together when P2 (+ a DC reactor is not used) ) DC link P(+) terminal N (-) DC link N(-) connection Common terminal for DC link connection B Brake resistor terminal Brake resistor wiring connection. (Connect a brake resistor to P2 and B terminals) U/V/W Output terminals to motor 3-phase motor (induction motor, synchronous motor) wiring connections. Note • Both P1 (+) and P2 (+) terminals are for DCP (+) connections. Installing the Inverter 21 Installation • N (-) terminal is for DCN (-) connection. It is not a “neutral” contact. • P2(+) and B terminals are for connecting a brake resistor only. Do not connect any other device P2(+) and B terminals. • Use STP cables to connect remotely located motors to the inverter. Do not use 3 core cables. • Make sure that the total cable length does not exceed 328 ft (100 m). • Long cable runs can cause reduced motor torque in low frequency applications due to voltage drop. Long cable runs also increase a circuit’s susceptibility to stray capacitance and may trigger overcurrent protection devices or result in the malfunction of equipment connected to the inverter. • Voltage drop is calculated by using the following formula: • Voltage drop (V) = [√3 X cable resistance (mΩ/m) X cable length (m) X current (A)] / 1000 • Use cables with the largest possible cross-sectional area to ensure that voltage drop is minimized over long cable runs. Lowering the carrier frequency and installing a micro surge filter may also help to reduce voltage drop. • The permitted cable lengths for the combinations of motor type and switching frequency are listed in the table below. Motor switching frequency Maximum cable length 3 – 5 kHz < 330 ft (100 m) 3 – 8 kHz < 165 ft (50 m) Do not connect power to the inverter until the inverter is completely installed and the inverter is ready to operate. Doing so may result in electric shock. Installing the Inverter 22 • Power supply cables must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting power cables to other terminals will damage the inverter. • Use insulated ring lugs when connecting cables to the R/S/T and U/V/W terminals. • The inverter’s power terminal connections can cause harmonics that may interfere with other communication devices located near to the inverter. To reduce interference, the installation of noise filters or line filters may be required. • To avoid circuit interruption or damage to connected equipment, do not install phase-advanced condensers, surge protection, or electronic noise filters on the output side of the inverter. • To avoid circuit interruption or damage to connected equipment, do not install magnetic contactors on the output side of the inverter. Step 4 Control circuit connections The illustrations below show the detailed layout of the control circuit connections and the control board switches. Ensure that the control cables meet the required specifications and refer to the detailed information provided below and 1.5 Cable selection on page 8 before installing and connecting control circuits. Installing the Inverter 23 Installation Power terminal and control terminal wiring diagram Installing the Inverter 24 Install an isolation transformer (rated for > 100 VA) for the auxiliary control power source. Otherwise, the inverter may be damaged. Control board labels Function Label Name Description Control board CN1 Terminal output Connector for fault relay (30A, 30B, 30C), multifunction terminal output (A1/C1 –A4/C4), and safety circuit terminal input (SA, SB, SC) CN2 Terminal input Connector for digital terminal input: FX, RX, BX, RST, P1 –P7 CN3 Analog I/O Connector for analog terminal input ( V1, I1), analog terminals output (AO1, AO2), and CAN communication CN4 Add-on module connector Use this connector when using add-on module boards. CN5 Keypad connector Connects to keypad. CN6 Power board connector Connects to power board. CN8 ELIO add-on module connector Use this connector when using ELIO add-on module boards. SW1Note1) Digital input NPN/PNP selection switch NPN/PNP mode selection switch Up: PNP Down: NPN (default) SW2Note2) Communication terminating resistor switch Turns the terminating resistor (120 Ω) ON when the inverter is connected to the end of communication node. Left: Terminating resistor ON Right: Terminating resistor OFF (default) Note1) Refer to “Step 8 NPN/PNP mode selection for detailed information. Note2) Refer to “Step 9 Setting terminating resistor” for detailed information. Installing the Inverter 25 Installation Connector layout 5.5/7.5 kW 11/15 kW 18.5/22 kW Connector Layout CN1 A3 C3 A4 C4 SA SB SC 30A 30B 30C A1 C1 A2 C2 CN2 FX RX BX RST P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 CM CM CM CN3 CHN CNL VR V1 I1 GND CNS NC AO1 AO2 GND GND Installing the Inverter 26 Jumper switch settings (PNP/NPN selection and terminating resistor) Switch Mode Description SW11) PNP Operates with an external 24 V power supply. NPN Operates internally connected to CM. SW22) Terminating resistor On Enables termination of CAN network. Terminating resistor Off Disables termination of CAN network. Note1) Refer to “Step 8 NPN/PNP mode selection” for detailed information. Note2) Refer to “Step 9 Setting terminating resistor” for detailed information. Detailed input terminal labels and descriptions Function Label Name Description CN2 Terminal input FX Forward operation/stop command In NPN input mode, operates when connected to CM terminal. Stops when FX and RX are ON/OFF at the same time. RX Reverse operation/stop command BX Emergency stop In NPN input mode, triggered when connected to CM terminal and operates a free run stop or deceleration stop. It does not provide a fault signal. RST Fault clearance Fault status clears when the inverter is ON after the cause of the fault is removed. Installing the Inverter 27 Installation Function Label Name Description P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 Multifunction input terminals - Configurable for the following multifunction inputs: - Multi speed operation L/M/H - Acc/Dec time - Form B contact for external fault signal - Timer input - Cancel soft start - ASR gain switching - ASR P/PI switching - Flux command switching - Enable/disable max. torque - Enable/disable torque bias - A3 safety - Enable/disable battery operation - Disable low voltage trip detection CM Common Common terminal for analog terminal input and output. - In NPN mode, function is ON when each multifunction terminal and CM terminal are connected. - In PNP mode, function is ON when an external 24 V power source is connected to CM terminal. CN1 Safety input SA Terminal for Safety Form Acontact connection Terminal for Safety Form A connection. Terminals SA and SC must be connected for inverter operation (disconnection triggers a protection feature). SB Terminal for Safety Form B contact connection Terminal for Safety Form B connection. Terminals SB and SC must be connected for inverter operation (disconnection triggers a protection feature). SC Safety 24 V power 24 V power supply for safety A/B connections. CN3 Analog input VR Potentiometer for analog input Maximum output voltage: +12 V Potentiometer: 10 k Ω Installing the Inverter 28 Function Label Name Description configuration V1 Voltage input Used for voltage input applications: -10 – 10 V / 10 – -10 V, 0 – 10 V / 10 – 0 V I1 Current input Used for current input applications: 0 – 20 mA / 20 – 0 mA GND Common Common terminal for analog terminal input. Detailed output terminal labels and descriptions Function Label Name Description CN3 Analog output AO1 Analog output 1 Output voltage range: - -10 V–10 V - 10 V– -10 V - 0 V– 10 V - 10 V– 0 V. Select one of the following: - Analog input value - Command before and after acceleration/deceleration - Speed control input command - Motor speed - Speed deviation - Motor speed follow-up - Speed control output - Torque bias - Forward direction torque limit - Reverse direction torque limit - Torque limit during regeneration - Torque command - Torque current command - Torque current - Flux command AO2 Analog output 2 Installing the Inverter 29 Installation Function Label Name Description - Flux current command - Flux current - Q-axis current control output - D-axis current control output - D-axis voltage - Q-axis voltage - Output current - Output voltage - Output power - DC-link voltage - Inverter temperature. GND Common Common terminal for analog terminal outputs. CN1 Multifunction output A1 C1 Multifunction output contact 1 (Form A contact) Select one of the following: - Inverter operation available - Zero velocity detection - Speed detection - Speed detection (non-polar) - Speed arrival - Timer output - Low voltage alert - In operation - In regeneration - Inverter overheat alert - Speed agreement - Torque detection - Torque limit detection - Overload alert - Stopping - MC output - Fan fault - ALLS status - At constant speed - Brake output A2 C2 Multifunction output contact 2 (Form A contact) A3 C3 Multifunction output contact 3 (Form A contact) A4 C4 Multifunction output contact 4 (Form A contact) Installing the Inverter 30 Function Label Name Description 30A Fault signal (Form A contact) Output signal is generated when a fault occurs. Does not output when the emergency stop is activated. 30B Fault signal (Form B contact) 30C Common Common terminal for output contacts A and B. I/O terminals for CAN communication Function Label Name Description CN3 Analog I/O (CAN I/O) CNH CAN HIGH High, low, common signal terminals for CAN communication. CNL CAN LOW CNS CAN COMMON Installing the Inverter 31 Installation Note • Use shielded cable or plastic insulated cable for all control circuit connections. • Use twisted shield cable if the length of circuit is long. • Use 0.2 to 0.8 mm2 (18 to 26 AWG) cables. • When tightening bolts, do not allow the torque to exceed 5.2 lb-in. • The auxiliary relay terminal output 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be below AC 250 V/1 A and DC 30 V/1 A. • The trip output relay terminal must be below AC 250 V/1 A and DC 30 V/ 1A. • The open collector output 1 and encoder output must be below 24 V/100 mA. • While running control circuits, ensure that the total cable length does not exceed 165 ft (50 m). • Ensure that the length of any safety related circuits does not exceed 100 ft (30 m). • Do not run the control cable with the mains power cable inside the terminal block area. If the control cable crosses a mains power cable, they must cross each other at a right angle. Installing the Inverter 32 Step 5 Auxiliary power terminals The L100 inverter includes an auxiliary power terminal block. The auxiliary terminals enable the control board to operate without mains power (R/S/T) using auxiliary control power (220 V AC). The following diagram shows the terminals on the auxiliary power terminal block. Refer to the detailed descriptions to understand the functions and locations of the terminals before connecting cables. • Separate auxiliary power and mains power circuits, and connect auxiliary power circuits via an isolating transformer. • Use insulated cable lugs for all auxiliary power cable connections. • Use cables with a cross-sectional area greater than 0.5 mm2 (20 AWG). 5.5/7.5 kW 11/15 kW 18.5/22 kW Auxiliary power terminal labels and descriptions Label Name Description Voltage AC1 AC2 Auxiliary input voltage Used to connect to single phase AC input voltage. 220 V (-10-+10%), 50/60 Hz Installing the Inverter 33 Installation Step 6 Encoder add-on module settings Install an encoder on the motor’s rotor or on a spindle that rotates at the same speed as the motor’s rotor (E.g. Line side of a motor, or the other side of the motor axis from a traction machine). If there is a slip between the motor and encoder axis, the motor may generate severe vibration, or it may not operate at all. Refer to the User Manuals provided with the add-on modules for detailed information. L100 Incremental Pulse Encoder add-on module Connector layout Connector Layout CN2 5PE 12PE 15PE GE GE GE A+[PA] A- B+[PB] B- GE GE CN3 RA RG RB RG LED indications LED Status Indication Normal Flashes in 1 second intervals. Abnormal configuration Flashes in 0.5 second intervals. Installing the Inverter 34 Terminal block details Item Indication Name Description Encoder signal Input pulse (CN2) 5PE +5 V power +5 V line drive power for encoder 12PE +12 V power +12 V open collector power for encoder 15PE +15 V power +15V open collector power for encoder GE Ground Ground for encoder power A+ [PA] / AEncoder phase A signal For a line drive encoder, connect output signal cables for phases A+ and A-. Open collector (or complementary) encoders utilize A+[PA] signals and GE. B+ [PB] / BEncoder phase B signal For a line drive encoder, connect output signal cables for phases B+ and B-. Open collector (or complementary) encoders utilize B+[PB] signals and GE. Output pulse (CN3) RA Encoder phase A return signal Terminal for encoder phase A return signal RB Encoder phase B return signal Terminal for encoder phase B return signal RG Ground Ground for encoder return signals Note • Be careful about the encoder’s power specifications when connecting the cables. Faulty cable connections may damage the encoder. • The LED indicator will flash in 1 second intervals if the cable connections and parameter settings are correct. Installing the Inverter 35 Installation +5 V line drive settings: Switch (JP1) – LD (default) Set JP1 switch to up (LD, Line Drive) and connect the following encoder cables to CN2 terminal block after checking the encoder signals: 5PE (+5 V), GE, A+[PA], A-, B+[PB], BCorrectly connect the wires according to the encoder’s power specifications. Otherwise, the encoder may be damaged. +12 V open collector (or complementary) settings: Switch (JP1) – OC Set JP1 switch to down position (OC: Open Collector) and connect the following encoder cables to CN2 terminal block after checking the encoder signals: 12PE (+12 V), GE, A+[PA], B+[PB] Correctly connect the wires according to the encoder’s power specifications. Otherwise, the encoder may be damaged. Installing the Inverter 36 +15 V open collector (or complementary) settings: Switch (JP1) – OC Set JP1 switch to down position (OC: Open Collector) and connect the following encoder cables to CN2 terminal block after checking the encoder signals: 15PE (+15 V), GE, A+[PA], B+[PB] Correctly connect the wires according to the encoder’s power specifications. Otherwise, the encoder may be damaged. Ensure that the encoder type is properly set before operating the inverter. Do not change the encoder type settings while the inverter is operating. Doing so may adversely affect the system and the inverter operation may stop with a fault trip. Note • The motor may operate incorrectly or vibrate if the rotor and the encoder’s spindle are not connected correctly. • Use STP cables and connect the shielding to the PCB’s grounding screw. • Do not run encoder signal cables near inverter mains power cables. Electronic interference may affect encoder output signals. Installing the Inverter 37 Installation L100 EnDat Encoder add-on module Connector layout Connector Layout CN2 5PE 5PE GE GE SIN+ SINCOS+ COS- DATA+ DATA- CLK+ CLKCN3 RA RG RB RG LED indications LED Status Indication Normal Flashes in 1 second intervals. Abnormal configuration Flashes in 0.5 second intervals. EnDat Specifications Item Specification Encoder type ECN413, ECN1313: EnDat2.2 Encoder pulse numbers 2048 Installing the Inverter 38 Terminal block details Item Indication Name Description EnDat Encoder input (CN2) 5PE Encoder power +5 V encoder power GE 0 V SIN+ SIN- Encoder SIN signal Encoder’s SIN+/SIN- signal COS+ COSEncoder COS signal Encoder’s COS+/COS- signal EnDat Communication (CN2) DATA + DATA - Encoder data Data input and output signals for receiving pole position data from the EnDat encoder. Used in ECN413 and ECN1313 encoders. CLK+ CLK- Encoder clock Clock signal for receiving data from the EnDat encoder. Used in ECN413 and ECN1313 encoders. Encoder output (CN3) RA Encoder output phase A Encoder A/B phase output signal Open collector output RB Encoder output phase B RG Common output terminal Installing the Inverter 39 Installation L100 SIN/COS Encoder add-on module Connector layout Connector Layout CN2 5PE 5PE GE GE SIN+ SINCOS+ COS- SIN2+ SIN2- COS2+ COS2- CN3 RA RG RB RG LED indications LED Status Indication Normal Flashes in 1 second intervals. Abnormal configuration Flashes in 0.5 second intervals. SIN/COS specifications Item Specification Encoder type ERN487, ERN1387 Encoder pulse numbers 2048 Installing the Inverter 40 Terminal block details Item Indication Name Description SIN/COS Encoder input (CN2) 5PE Encoder power +5 V encoder power GE 0 V SIN+ SIN- Encoder SIN signal Encoder’s SIN+/SIN- signal COS+ COS- Encoder COS signal Encoder’s COS+/COS- signal SIN2+ SIN2- Encoder SIN2 signal Encoder’s SIN2+/SIN2- signal COS2+ COS2- Encoder COS2 signal Encoder’s COS2+/COS2- signal Encoder output (CN3) RA Encoder output phase A Encoder A/B phase output signal Open collector output RB Encoder output phase B RG Common output terminal Installing the Inverter 41 Installation Step 7 ELIO add-on module settings Refer to the User Manual provided with the ELIO add-on module for detailed information. Connector layout Connector Layout CN3 LD LU DLS ULS RV1 RV2 SD1 SU1 SD2 SD2 DAC RV3 CM CM CN4 EXG FS0 FS1 FS2 FS3 FS4 DER FID UND NC MCA MCC BKA BKC CN5 D1 D2 D3 D4 EG SW1 setting (PNP/NPN selection) Mode Description PNP Operates with an external 24 V power supply. NPN Operates internally connected to CM. (Default: NPN) Installing the Inverter 42 Terminal block details Item Indication Name Description Elevator terminal input I_D Downside inductor signal Downside inductor signal for detecting car position I_U Upside inductor signal Upside inductor signal for detecting car position DLS Down Limit Switch Car descent limit switch. Descending of a car is prohibited when the switch is turned on. ULS Up Limit Switch Car ascent limit switch. The car is prohibited from ascending when the switch is turned on. RV1 Reserved RV2 Reserved SD1 Downside Deceleration Switch 1 1st Deceleration Switch for forced deceleration while descending SU1 Upside Deceleration Switch 1 1st Deceleration Switch for forced deceleration while ascending SD2 Downside Deceleration Switch 2 2nd Deceleration Switch for forced deceleration while descending SU2 Upside Deceleration Switch 2 2nd Deceleration Switch for forced deceleration while ascending DAC Deceleration approval signal Deceleration approval signal for the controller RV3 Reserved CM COMMON Turned ON when each terminal input is connected to CM (24G). Elevator terminal output EXG COMMON Common ground for each terminal output. FS0 Requested floor for stop / current floor bit 0 Data format for requested floor for stop / current floor (Floors 1 – 32) Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 FS4 FS3 FS2 FS1 FS0 Floor 1: OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Floor 32: ON ON ON ON ON FS1 Requested floor for stop / current floor bit 1 FS2 Requested floor for stop / current floor bit 2 Installing the Inverter 43 Installation Item Indication Name Description FS3 Requested floor for stop / current floor bit 3 FS4 Requested floor for stop / current floor bit 4 DER Signal for requesting deceleration approval When this signal is input, the controller outputs the deceleration approval signal (DAC) if the requested floor for a stop matches the calling floor. FID Floor identification signal ON: Requested floor for a stop (previous floor), OFF: Current floor UND Deceleration signal Turns ON when the motor is decelerating. MCA/MCC Contactor operation relay Form A contact Operates the contactor for shutting down the inverter output. BKA/BKC Brake operation relay Form A contact Operates the traction machine brake. Fault output D1 Fault information BIT0 (LSB) Outputs 4-bit fault data when the inverter is malfunctioning. Elevator faults have priority in the output over inverter faults. Set one of the multifunction outputs AX1 –AX4 to “E/L Fault” to distinguish elevator faults from inverter faults. When a fault occurs, it is an elevator fault if the multifunction terminal set to “E/L Fault” is ON; it is an inverter fault if the multifunction terminal set to “E/L Fault” is OFF. Fault D4 D3 D2 D1 No Fault OFF OFF OFF OFF D2 Fault data BIT 1 Installing the Inverter 44 Item Indication Name Description D3 Fault data BIT 2 FHM RUN Fail OFF OFF OFF ON Flr Data Fail OFF OFF ON OFF ChkSum Err OFF OFF ON ON NotRdy (E/L) OFF ON OFF OFF Decel OFF ON OFF ON Acc/Dec OFF ON ON OFF SDS Error OFF ON ON ON IND Reverved ON OFF OFF OFF Indicator Fail ON OFF OFF ON CmdSrc ON OFF ON OFF NotRdy (FHM) ON OFF ON ON Fault D4 D3 D2 D1 No Fault OFF OFF OFF OFF Arm Short OFF OFF OFF ON FAN Error OFF OFF ON OFF Ground Fault OFF OFF ON ON Over Current OFF ON OFF OFF Over Voltage OFF ON OFF ON Encoder Err EnDat Error OFF ON ON OFF Low Voltage Low Voltage2 OFF ON ON ON Inv OverHeat ON OFF OFF OFF E-Thermal Over Load ON OFF OFF ON Input PO Output PO ON OFF ON OFF Ext.Trip-B ON OFF ON ON Inv. OLT ON ON OFF OFF D4 Fault data BIT 3 Installing the Inverter 45 Installation Item Indication Name Description Mag Det Err ON ON OFF ON InvThem OP ON ON ON OFF Over Speed Spd Dev Err ON ON ON ON EG COMMON Common ground for open collector outputs for faults. Step 8 PNP/NPN mode selection The L100 inverter supports PNP (Source) and NPN (Sink) modes to sequence input current at the terminal. Select an appropriate mode to suit the circuit by switching the PNP/NPN switch (SW1) on the control board. Refer to the following information for more details. (Default: NPN) PNP mode (Source) Select PNP mode at the PNP/NPN switch (SW1). The default setting is NPN mode. CM is the common ground terminal for all analog inputs at the terminal block and P24 is the internal DC 24 V supply. If you are using an external DC 24 V supply, build a circuit that connects the external power supply (-) and the CM terminal. The guaranteed input voltages in the PNP mode (when using an external DC 24 V supply) are DC 19 to 25.2 V when the inverter is ON and below DC 7 V when the inverter is OFF. Installing the Inverter 46 NPN mode (Sink) Select NPN mode at the PNP/NPN switch (SW1). The default setting is NPN mode. CM is the common ground terminal for all analog inputs at the terminal block and P24 is the DC 24 V internal power supply. Do not change the PNP/NPN input switch settings while the inverter is running. Doing so may change the inverter’s input value at the terminals. (Inside of the inverter) (Inside of the inverter) Installing the Inverter 47 Installation Step 9 Setting terminating resistor Application of terminating resistors allows for optimal impedance matching required for reliable network communication. When multiple devices are connected to a CAN bus, apply terminating resistors (120 Ω) at both ends of the bus, for the devices that are the farthest apart. Set SW2 on the control board to ON (left) to turn on the terminating resistor (default: OFF). Step 10 Replacing the front cover Replace the front cover immediately after work on the inverter is completed. Installing the Inverter 48 2.3 Post-installation checklist After completing the installation, check the items in the table below to make sure that the inverter has been safely and correctly installed. Item Description Page Result Installation location/I/O power rating verification Is the location for the inverter installation appropriate? p. 5 Does the operating environment meet the inverter’s specifications? p. 6 Does the main power supply meet the inverter’s rated input? p. 368 Is the inverter’s rated output sufficient to supply the equipment? (In certain circumstances, insufficient output will result in degraded performance.) p. 368 Electrical connections Is a circuit breaker installed on the input side of the inverter? p. 11 Is the circuit breaker correctly rated? p. 373 Are the incoming power cables correctly connected to the inverter’s R/S/T terminals? (Caution: connecting the incoming power supply to the U/V/W terminals may damage the inverter.) p. 18 Are the motor output cables connected in the correct phase rotation (U/V/W)? (Caution: motors will rotate in the reverse direction if the phase rotation is incorrect.) p. 18 Are the incoming power cables rated correctly? p. 8 Is the inverter grounded correctly? p. 17 Are the power terminal screws and the ground terminal screws tightened to the specified torque? p. 18 Is the inverter separated from the power source by a magnetic contactor (if a braking resistor is in use)? p. 11 Control circuit connections Are STP cables used for all control circuit wiring? - Is the shielding of all STP cables properly grounded? - Installing the Inverter 49 Installation Item Description Page Result Are the control cables properly connected? p. 22 Are the control terminal screws tightened to the specified torque? p. 374 Is the total cable length of all control cables < 165 ft (50 m)? p. 31 Is the total length of safety cables < 100 ft (30 m)? p. 31 Miscellaneous Are optional add-on modules connected correctly? - Is there any debris inside the inverter? - Check cable connections for short circuit risks, such as conductors contacting adjacent terminals? - Are the control circuit connections separated from the mains power connections? - Have the capacitors been in use for more than two years? If so, replace them. - Has a fuse been installed in the main power supply circuit? p. 373 Are the connections to the motor separated from other connections? - Note STP cables have a highly conductive, shielded screen around the twisted pairs. STP cables protect conductors from electromagnetic interference. Installing the Inverter 50 2.4 Test run After the post-installation checklist has been completed, perform a test-run of the inverter. Supply mains power to the inverter. Ensure that the keypad display light is on. Select the command source. Set a frequency reference and then check the following: • If Ai1 (V1) is selected as the frequency reference input, confirm that the frequency changes when the input voltage changes. • If Ai2 (I1) is selected as the frequency reference input, confirm that the frequency changes when the input current changes. Set the acceleration and deceleration times. Start the motor and check the following: • Ensure that the motor rotates in the correct direction (refer to the note below). Ensure that the motor accelerates and decelerates for the set time and that the motor speed reaches the frequency reference. To avoid electrocution, ensure that the MCCBs and MCs are turned off before connecting power to the inverter. Note • When the forward (FX) signal is ON, the motor should rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the load side of the motor. If the motor rotates in the reverse direction, switch the cables at the U and V terminals. • For a safe operation, install and use micro-surge filters for the products operating with 400 V class motors. Otherwise, ensure that all 400 V class motors operated with this product have reinforced insulation. Micro-surge voltage inside the motor may result in motor damage. Installing the Inverter 51 Installation Verifying motor rotation Set FUN_01 to ‘Keypad’. Set FUN_02 to ‘Keypad 1’. Set a frequency reference. Press [FWD] on the keypad to operate the inverter in the forward direction. Observe the motor’s rotation from the load side and ensure that the motor rotates counterclockwise. • Before operating the inverter for the first time, check the control cables to ensure that all cables are connected properly, and no damages to the cables or short circuit conditions exist. • Check the parameter settings before running the inverter. Parameter settings may need to be adjusted depending on the load. • To avoid damaging the inverter, do not supply the inverter with an input voltage that exceeds the rated voltage for the equipment. • Before running the motor at maximum speed, confirm the motor’s rated capacity. As inverters can be used to easily increase motor speed, use caution to ensure that motor speed does not inadvertently exceed the motor’s rated capacity. Forward operation Performing basic operations 52 3 Performing basic operations This chapter describes the keypad layout, keypad functions, and introduces the parameter groups and codes required to perform basic operations. The chapter also outlines the basic operation of the inverter before advancing to more complex operations. Examples are provided to demonstrate the inverter’s operation. Operation indicators Refer to the following table for the operating status of the inverter. Indicator Color Description POWER Green Turns on when power is supplied to the control board. RUN Blue Acc/Dec operation: Flashes in 0.5 second intervals. Constant speed operation: Turns on (solid). FAULT Red Flashes in 0.5 second intervals when the inverter operation is abnormal. 53 Performing basic operations Basic Operation Keypad connection Refer to the following figure to connect a keypad to the inverter. 3.1 About the keypad The keypad has two main components – the operation keys and the display. On the Keypad display, you can view the parameter setting values. It displays up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Performing basic operations 54 3.1.1 Operation keys Operation keys The table below lists the names and functions of the keypad’s operation keys. Key Name Description [MODE] Switches between groups. Moves to upper codes in a group. [PROG ] Changes parameter values. [ENT] Switches between modes. Saves parameter values. [UP] [DOWN] Switches between codes, or increases or decreases parameter values. [SHIFT/ESC] Moves to the default screen. In settings mode, moves the cursor to the next digit position. [REV] Starts reverse operation. Flashes during acc/dec operations and stays turned on during a constant speed operation. [STOP/RESET] Stops the current operation. (Valid when FUN_01 is set to "Keypad".) Clears fault status.Turns on when the operation is stopped and flashed during a fault. [FWD] Starts forward operation. Flashes during acc/dec operations and stays turned on during a constant speed operation. 55 Performing basic operations Basic Operation 3.1.2 About the display Speed(IM)and Speed(PM)mode display The following table lists the names and functions of the items displayed in this mode. Refer to the corresponding number in the illustration above. No. Name Description 1 Motor speed Displays motor speed in rpm. 2 Motor control mode Displays one of the following motor control modes: - IM: Induction motor speed control mode - PM: Synchronous motor (permanent magnet motor) speed control mode - BX: Emergency stop status - BAT: Battery operation mode 3 Torque Displays the generated torque when the motor operates at its full rated output (100%). 4 Inverter output current Displays the effective output current of the inverter. Performing basic operations 56 V/F and Slip Comp mode display The following table lists the names and functions of the items displayed in this mode. Refer to the corresponding number in the illustration above. No. Name Description 1 Parameter group Displays the parameter group. 2 Operation/speed commands Displays the operation and speed commands. - T: Terminal command - K: Keypad command - O: CAN communication command - K: Keypad command - A: Analog command - O: CAN communication command 3 Inverter output current Displays the effective output current of the inverter. 4 Code number Displays the code number. 5 Operating status Displays the current operating status: STP: Stop FWD: Forward operation REV: Reverse operation 6 Target frequency/operating frequency Displays the target frequency at stop condition and displays the output frequency during operation. 57 Performing basic operations Basic Operation Group display The following table lists the names and functions of the items displayed in this mode. Refer to the corresponding number in the illustration above. No. Name Description 1 Parameter group Displays one of following parameter groups: DIS, PAR, DIO, AIO, FUN, CON, E/LNote 1), PRT, COM, USR. 2 Code type Displays the code type to setup. 3 Code number Displays the code number to setup. 4 Code data and unit Displays the code data and unit to setup. Note 1) Displayed only when an ELIO add-on module has been installed and "PAR_08" is set to "Elevator." Performing basic operations 58 3.1.3 Control menu The SV-L100 inverter’s control menu has the following groups. Group Display Description Display DIS Configure display settings for motor speed, motor control mode, torque, inverter output, current, user selection display, and fault status display. Parameter PAR Configure parameter settings, including parameter initialization, parameter read/write/lock/password settings, motor constants, auto-tuning, switching frequency, and control mode. Digital input/output DIO Configure digital input/output settings, including digital input and output parameters. Analog input/output AIO Configure analog input/output settings, including analog input and output parameters. Function FUN Configure function settings, including operation frequency, operation method, stop method, and acceleration/deceleration time and pattern. Elevator operation E/L Note 1) Configure elevator operation function settings. The elevator operation group (E/L) appears on the keypad only when "PAR_08" is set to "Elevator" and an EL I/O card is installed. Control CON ASR PI Gain Protection PRT Configure parameters related to inverter faults. Communication COM Configure communication features for RS232 and CAN communication options. User USR Configure user macro settings. Note1) Displayed when an ELIO add-on module has been installed. Refer to the user manual supplied with the add-on module. The groups in bold in the Display column are default parameter groups. Refer to 6 Detailed operation by function groups on page 133 for details. 59 Performing basic operations Basic Operation 3.2 Using the keypad The keypad enables movement between groups and codes. It also enables users to select and configure functions. At code level, you can set parameter values, turn specific functions on or off, and decide how functions will be used. Refer to 5 Table of functions on page 80 to find the functions you need. 3.2.1 Group and code selection The example below shows how to switch between groups and codes. Press [MODE] to move to the group you require. Move up and down through the codes using [▲] or [▼] until you locate the code that you require. Performing basic operations 60 Note For some settings, pressing [▲] or [▼] will not increase or decrease to the next numerical code. Code numbers may be skipped or not be displayed as certain codes have been intentionally left blank or reserved for new functions to be added in the future. Also, some features are hidden because functions for a certain code have been disabled. 3.2.2 Navigating directly to different codes The following example shows how to navigate to code PAR_56 from the initial code in the group (PAR_00). This example applies to all groups. Step Instruction Keypad display 1 Go to the first code of the parameter group (PAR_00). 2 Press [PROG]. 3 Press [SHIFT/ESC], [▲], or [▼] until “56” is displayed. 4 Press [ENT]. PAR_56 screen is displayed. If you select an unavailable code, details for the next available code are displayed. Read-only parameters cannot be changed. The parameter values for those parameters with “read-only during operation” attribute cannot be changed during an inverter operation. 3.2.3 Setting parameter values Enable or disable features by setting or modifying parameter values for different codes. Directly enter values, such as frequency references, supply voltages, and motor speeds. The instructions below list the steps to set or modify parameter values. Select the group and code to configure or modify. Press [PROG]. The cursor will flash. 61 Performing basic operations Basic Operation Press [SHIFT/ESC], [▲], or [▼] to adjust the value. Press [ENT] to save the changes. Note Each code’s parameter values have default features and a specified range. Refer to 6 Detailed operation by function groups on page 133 for information about the features and ranges before configuring or modifying parameter values. 3.2.4 Setting parameter labels Set labels for the parameters in groups, such as DIS (Display), DIO (Multifunction input/output), and AIO (Analog input/output). The following is an example to label DIO_02 to "Speed-L." Step Keypad instructions Keypad display 1 Set PAR 07 to “V/F.” - 2 Select a group and code you want to set a label for. - 3 Select a label. 4 Press [ENT]. Note You cannot set labels for parameters with “#” next to the parameter number. For example, if you try to select “ASR GainSel” (not available in Slip Comp mode) for DIO_02 in Slip Comp mode, “#” will be displayed next to the selected code. If you press Enter to save the setting, the parameter will be set to “Not Used.” Performing basic operations 62 3.2.5 Configuring acceleration time on the keypad The following example demonstrates how to modify the ACC (acceleration time) value from 10 seconds to 15 seconds in the operation group. Step Keypad instructions Keypad display 1 Press [MODE] to move to FUN group. 2 Press [PROG], and then press [SHIFT/ESC], [▲], or [▼] until “41” is displayed. 3 Press [ENT]. The current acceleration time is displayed. 4 Press [PROG]. The cursor appears. 5 Press [SHIFT/ESC] to move the cursor. 6 Press [▲] or [▼] to change the value. 7 Press [ENT] to save the changes. The cursor disappears. 63 Performing basic operations Basic Operation 3.3 Confirming the encoder operation 3.3.1 Definition of forward and reverse operations When looking at the motor from the load side, the motor rotates counterclockwise in the forward operation. 3.3.2 Confirming the forward and reverse operations Forward operation Confirm that the speed display in the initial display group screen is positive (+) when the inverter is ON and rotating the motor’s spindle. Performing basic operations 64 Reverse operation Confirm that the speed display in the initial display group screen is negative (-) when the inverter is ON and rotating the motor’s spindle. Note • If “0.0 rpm” is displayed, or the (+) and (-) values are displayed reversely, confirm the encoder connections. • If you cannot manually rotate the motor, refer to 3.4 Operating the inverter with the keypad or 3.5 Operating the inverter using the control terminal block. 3.4 Operating the inverter with the keypad 3.4.1 Setting parameter values for keypad operation Step Keypad instructions Keypad display 1 Set FUN 01 to “Keypad.” 2 Set FUN 02 to “Keypad 1.” 3 Press [▲] to adjust the operation speed. 65 Performing basic operations Basic Operation 3.4.2 Forward and reverse operations Low speed operation Configure FUN12 to “100.0 rpm” and then follow the instructions in the table below. Direction Keypad instructions Keypad display Forward Press [FWD] on the keypad. “+100.0 rpm” is displayed as the motor speed. Reverse Press [REV] on the keypad. “-100.0 rpm” is displayed as the motor speed. When selecting low speed from the keypad, the operating status for various current encoder and motor connections are listed in the table below. Encoder/Motor connections Keypad command Direction of motor rotation Speed display on the keypad Torque display on the keypad Operation status Encoder and motor connections are normal. FWD Forward +100.0 rpm Lower than +10% Normal REV Reverse -100.0 rpm Lower than -10% Encoder connection has been changed. FWD Forward -10 - -40 rpm 150% (torque limit) Abnormal REV Reverse 10-40 rpm -150% (torque limit) Motor connection has been changed. FWD Reverse -10 - -40 rpm 150% (torque limit) Abnormal REV Forward 10-40 rpm -150% (torque limit) Encoder and motor connections have been changed. FWD Reverse +100.0 rpm Lower than +10% Abnormal REV Forward -100.0 rpm Lower than -10% Performing basic operations 66 If the encoder’s Phase A and B are reversed or the motor connection has been changed, reverse the positions of Phase A and B, or change the connections at the inverter’s output. The torque display on the keypad is based on no load operation. High speed operation Configure FUN12 to “1000.0 rpm” and then follow the instructions in the table below. Direction Keypad instructions Keypad Display Forward Press [FWD] on the keypad. “+1000.0 rpm” is displayed as the motor speed. Reverse Press [REV] on the keypad. “-1000.0 rpm” is displayed as the motor speed. 67 Performing basic operations Basic Operation 3.5 Operating the inverter using the control terminal block 3.5.1 Setting parameter values for control terminal block operation Step Keypad instructions Keypad display 1 Set FUN 01 to “Terminal 1”. 2 Set FUN 02 to “Analog”. 3 Set the maximum motor speed. 4 Define Ai1 (analog input at V1). 5 Select a range for the Ai1 input (V1) source: - -10–10 V / 10–-10 V - 0–10 V / 10–0 V Performing basic operations 68 3.5.2 Cable connections for potentiometer speed control (V1 analog input) The diagram below shows the cable connections to use when a potentiometer is connected to V1 analog input terminal. Connect the potentiometer to the VR, V1, GND terminals on the control terminal block. 3.5.3 Adjusting the analog input bias and gain (V1 analog input) Adjusting the Out Y1 (bias) for analog inputs Step Instruction Keypad display 1 Connect the voltage source (0 V) to the multifunction analog input terminals V1 (I1) – GND on the control terminal block. - 2 If a potentiometer is connected, adjust the resistance to the minimum value. - 3 From the initial screen, press [PROG]. The input/output proportion that the controller detects is displayed at the top right of the screen. The configured bias value is displayed at the bottom right of the screen. 69 Performing basic operations Basic Operation Step Instruction Keypad display 4 Press [▲] or [▼] to adjust the AI input value to “0.00%.” 5 Press [ENT] to save the value. The saved value is displayed. Adjusting the Out Y2 (gain) for analog inputs Step Instruction Keypad display 1 Connect the voltage source (10 V) to the multifunction analog input terminals V1 (Ai1) – GND on the on the control terminal block. - 2 If a potentiometer is connected, adjust the resistance to the maximum value. - 3 From the initial screen, press [PROG]. The input/output proportion that the controller detects is displayed at the top right of the screen. The configured bias value is displayed at the bottom right of the screen. 4 Press [▲] or [▼] to adjust the gain to “102.00%.” 5 Press [ENT] to save the value. The saved value is displayed. Performing basic operations 70 3.5.4 Operating in forward and reverse directions FX operation from the control terminal block Connect an input voltage (0 V) across the V1 and GND terminals. • If a potentiometer is connected, adjust the resistance to the minimum value. Close the motor circuit by connecting the FX and CM terminals together at the control terminal block, and then confirm that “+0.0 rpm” is displayed as the motor speed. • In V/F and Slip Comp operation modes, the inverter will not operate at below the minimum speed set at PAR_12. Gradually increase the voltage at V1 and then confirm that the motor speed increases (at DIS_01 PreRamp Ref). • If a potentiometer is connected, gradually increase the resistance value. Break the connection between the FX and CM terminals to open the motor circuit. RX operation from the control terminal block Connect an input voltage (0 V) across the V1 and GND terminals. • If a potentiometer is connected, adjust the resistance to the minimum value. Close the motor circuit by connecting the RX and CM terminals together at the control terminal block, and then confirm that “-0.0 rpm” is displayed as the motor speed. • In V/F and Slip Comp operation modes, the inverter will not operate at below the minimum speed set at PAR_12. Gradually increase the voltage at V1 and then confirm that the motor speed increases (at DIS_01 PreRamp Ref). • If a potentiometer is connected, gradually increase the resistance value. 71 Performing basic operations Basic Operation Break the connection between the RX and CM terminals to open the motor circuit. Operation status according to the encoder when operating at low speed via the control terminal block Encoder/Motor connections Keypad command Direction of motor rotation Speed display on the keypad Torque display on the keypad Operation status Encoder and motor connections are normal. FWD Forward +100.0 rpm Lower than +10% Normal REV Reverse -100.0 rpm Lower than -10% Encoder connection has been changed. FWD Forward -10 - -40 rpm 150% (torque limit) Abnormal REV Reverse 10-40 rpm -150% (torque limit) Motor connection has been changed. FWD Reverse -10 - -40 rpm 150% (torque limit) Abnormal REV Forward 10-40 rpm -150% (torque limit) Encoder and motor connections have been changed. FWD Reverse +100.0 rpm Lower than +10% Abnormal REV Forward -100.0 rpm Lower than -10% • If Phase A and B of the encoder are reversed or the motor connections have been changed, reverse the Phase A and B connections, or change the inverter output connection. • The torque display on the keypad is based on no load operation. Performing basic operations 72 Example of an operation (1) Speed reference from the keypad + run signal at the terminal block Operation conditions • Control mode: Speed control (PAR_07: Speed(IM)) • Speed reference: Set the speed to 1,500 rpm from the keypad • Acceleration/deceleration time: 10 sec. / 20 sec. • Run command: RUN/STOP command at the terminal block Wiring diagram 73 Performing basic operations Basic Operation Parameter setting Step Procedure Func. code Description 1 Set the RUN/STOP command source FUN_01 Set Run/Stop Src to “Terminal 1.” 2 Set the speed reference source FUN_02 Set Speed Ref Sel to “Keypad 1.” 3 Set speed reference FUN_12 Set Speed 0 to “1500.0 (rpm)” 4 Set acc/dec times FUN_41 FUN_41 Set the acceleration time (FUN_41) to “10.00 (Sec),” and the deceleration time (FUN_42) to “20.00 (Sec).” 5 Run FX operation at the terminal block - • When the FX terminal input is ON, the inverter accelerates the motor for 10 seconds, and then runs it at 1,500 rpm, in the forward direction. • When the input is OFF, the inverter decelerates the motor for 20 seconds, and then stops. • Set SW1 to NPN mode. 6 Run RX operation at the terminal block - • When the RX terminal input is ON, the inverter accelerates the motor for 10 seconds, and then runs it at 1,500 rpm, in the reverse direction. • When the input is OFF, the inverter decelerates the motor for 20 seconds, and then stops. • Set SW1 to NPN mode. 7 Add-on module DIS_04 Displays “A/B Pulse.” (Line drive connection) 8 Number of encoder pulses PAR_24 Set to “1024.” 9 Encoder direction PAR_25 Set to “B Phase Lead.” Performing basic operations 74 Example of an operation (2) Speed reference from the potentiometer (V1) + run signal at the terminal block Operation conditions • Control mode: (PAR_07: Speed(IM)) • Speed reference: Set the speed to 1,500 rpm using the potentiometer (connected to V1). • Acceleration/deceleration time: 10 sec. / 20 sec. • Run command: RUN/STOP command at the terminal block Wiring diagram 75 Performing basic operations Basic Operation Parameter setting Step Procedure Function code Description 1 Set the RUN/STOP command source FUN_01 Set Run/Stop Src to “Terminal 1.” 2 Set the speed reference source FUN_02 Set Speed Ref Sel to “Analog.” 3 Define analog input AIO_01 Set Ai1 Define to “Speed Ref.” 4 Define analog input type AIO_02 Set Ai1 Source to “0 -> 10 V.” 5 Set the speed reference DIS_01 Adjust the potentiometer to set PreRamp Ref (DIS_01) to “1500.0 (rpm)” 6 Set acc/dec times FUN_41 FUN_42 Set the acceleration time (FUN_41) to “10.00 (Sec),” and the deceleration time (FUN_42) to “20.00 (Sec).” 7 Run FX operation at the terminal block - - When the FX terminal input is ON, the inverter accelerates the motor for 10 seconds, and then runs it at 1,500 rpm, in the forward direction. - When the input is OFF, the inverter decelerates the motor for 20 seconds, and then stops it. - Set SW1 to NPN mode. 8 Run RX operation at the terminal block - - When the RX terminal input is ON, the inverter accelerates the motor for 10 seconds, and then runs it at 1,500 rpm, in the reverse direction. - When the input is OFF, the inverter decelerates the motor for 20 seconds, and then stops it. - Set SW1 to NPN mode. 9 Add-on module DIS_04 Displays “A/B Pulse.” (Line drive connection) 10 Number of encoder pulses PAR_24 Set to “1024.” 11 Encoder direction PAR_25 Set to “B Phase Lead.” Basic and advanced features 76 4 Basic and advanced features 4.1 Introduction of basic features Feature Description Page Speed reference source configuration at the keypad Setup or modify a speed reference using the keypad. p. 63 p. 213 p. 214 Speed reference source configuration at the terminal block (input voltage) Enable, setup, or modify speed reference input voltage at terminal V1. p. 63 p. 213 p. 214 Speed reference source configuration at the terminal block (input current) Enable, setup, or modify speed reference input current at terminals I1. Speed reference source configuration for CAN communication Enable, setup, or modify speed reference communication signals from upper level controllers, such as PLCs or PCs. p. 213 p. 214 Multistep speed configuration Configures multistep speed operations by defining the terminal input. p. 217 Command source configuration for terminal block inputs Configures the inverter to accept inputs at the FX/RX terminals. p. 67 p. 70 Command source configuration for CAN communication Configures the inverter to accept communication signals from upper level controllers, such as PLCs and PCs. p. 213 p. 214 p. 292 Acc/Dec time configuration based on maximum speed Configures the acceleration and deceleration times for a motor based on a defined maximum speed. p. 220 Acc/Dec time configuration based on speed reference Configures acceleration and deceleration times for a motor based on a defined speed reference. p. 220 p. 224 Multistage Acc/Dec time Configures multistage acceleration and deceleration 77 Basic and advanced features Advanced Operation Feature Description Page configuration at the multifunction terminals times for a motor based on defined parameters at the multifunction terminals. Acc/Dec pattern configuration Enables modification of the acceleration and deceleration gradient patterns. Basic patterns include linear and S-curve. p. 221 Encoder error detection configuration Configures the inverter to detect hardware encoder errors. p. 280 Encoder software error detection configuration Configures the inverter to detect acceleration errors during the operation due to connection changes between the encoder and motor. p. 280 Output voltage adjustment Adjusts the output voltage to the motor when the power supply to the inverter differs from the motor’s rated input voltage. p. 266 Accelerating start Accelerating start is the standard motor starting method. Typically, motors accelerate to a target frequency in response to a run command. Other start or acceleration conditions may also be defined. - Deceleration stop Deceleration stop is the standard stopping method for motors. After receiving a stop command, the motor decelerates to 0 Hz and stops. Other stop or deceleration conditions may also be defined. p. 214 Free-run stop Configures a stop command that stops the inverter output to the motor. The motor will free-run, slow down, and then stop. p. 214 p. 178 Reverse the multifunction terminal input Reverses the input terminal position from Form A contact to Form B contact. Multifunction input terminal time Configures the input terminal time constant to improve tolerance to electronic interference. - Reversing the multifunction terminal output Reverses the output terminal from Form A contact to Form B contact. p. 179 Basic and advanced features 78 4.2 Introduction of advanced features Task Description Page Auto-tuning Automatically adjusts motor control parameters to optimize the performance of the inverter’s control mode. p. 155 Timer Turn on or off a multifunction output, including connected relays, after a specific time. p. 172 Speed controller gain switch Select between two PI controller combinations. p. 248 Pre-excitation Improve response characteristics during motor acceleration. p. 176 Using torque bias Apply a torque bias. p. 254 p. 256 Using the battery operation mode Operate the motor using the battery power supply when the main power supply is unavailable, e.g. during a power failure. p. 178 ALLS (Automatic Light Load Search) Detects light load conditions when the battery power supply is operating and directs the elevator to the nearest floor. p. 237 Brake control Enable or disable the braking system. p. 187 Short floor operation Improve elevator floor position when operating an elevator up and down short distances. p. 230 Low voltage 2 Detects low voltage trips when an instantaneous interruption occurs during operation. p. 130 p. 140 MC ON/OFF control Enable or disable the magnetic contactor installed as safety device in the inverter’s output circuit. p. 179 Auto load cell configuration Simplify the load cell’s configuration for initial elevator commissioning. p. 244 Anti rollback control Compensates for load in the initial load when the load cell is not used. p. 270 Preventing speed overshoot Prevents speed overshoot during elevator operation. p. 252 79 Basic and advanced features Advanced Operation Task Description Page Short floor operation Improves the landing distance when the car is operated for a short distance in an elevator application. p. 230 Initial pole position estimation Detects the initial pole position of a synchronous motor p. 164 Anti-hunting Prevents mechanical resonance while motors are operating. p. 233 Table of functions 80 5 Table of functions 5.1 Display (DIS) group • IM: Speed(IM), V/F: Speed ( V/F), Slip: Slip Compensation, PM: Speed (PM), ELIM: EL+IM, ELPM: EL+PM • O: Displayed, X: Not displayed, #: Not available • On the Keypad, “#” indicates not available and “*” indicates a duplicate setting. Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPM Page DIS_00 - Speed reference, output current, operation status, output frequency DIS▶T/K 0.0A 00 STP 0.00Hz DIS▶T/ K 0.0A 00 STP 0.00Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 133 DIS_01 - User define 1 Ai1 Value % Out Volt rms ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 135 Ai2 Value % ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ PreRamp Ref rpm/Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ PostRamp Ref rpm/Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ASR Inp Ref rpm/Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Output Freq rpm/Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Motor Speed rpm ○ x x ○ ○ ○ Speed Dev rpm ○ x x ○ ○ ○ SpdDev Max rpm ○ x x ○ ○ ○ SpdDev Time Sec ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ASR Out % ○ x x ○ ○ ○ Torque Bias % ○ x x ○ ○ ○ PosTrq Limit % ○ x x ○ ○ ○ NegTrq Limit - % ○ x x ○ ○ ○ RegTrq Limit % ○ x x ○ ○ ○ Table of functions 81 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPM Page Torque Ref % ○ x x ○ ○ ○ IqeRef A ○ x x ○ ○ ○ Iqe A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Flux Cur Ref A ○ x x ○ ○ ○ Ide Ref A ○ x x ○ ○ ○ Ide A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ACR_D Out V ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ACR_Q Out V ○ x x ○ ○ ○ VdeRef V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ VqeRef V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Out Amps RMS A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Out Volt RMS V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Power kW ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ DC Bus Volt V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Inv Temp deg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Control Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Run Time Sec ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Terminal In Bit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Terminal Opt Bit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Terminal Out Bit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Run Status ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ PhInOpenLvl % ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Iu Offset A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Iv Offset A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Iw Offset A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Iup/IumNote2) A x x x ○ x ○ Ivp/IvmNote2) A x x x ○ x ○ Iwp/IwmNote2) A x x x ○ x ○ Sc/EnDat Pos Note2) Pulse x x x ○ x ○ Theta Offset Note2) Deg x x x ○ x ○ DIS_02 - User define 2 Refer to DIS_01. Inv Temp Note3) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 135 DIS_03 - User define 3 Refer to DIS_01. DC Bus ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 135 Table of functions 82 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPM Page Volt DIS_04 7104 Display add-on board Opt. Board None A/B Pulse EnDat Sin/Cos None ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 140 DIS_05 7105 Fault status Note 1) Faults ------- ------- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 140 DIS_06 7106 Software version SW Version L100 VX.XX ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 142 DIS_10 710A User group display User Grp Disp 0 (Not Used) 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 142 1 (Dis+UserGrp) 2 (Display All) Note 1) When accessing DIS-05 via the communication, fault status is not displayed and only deleting communication history is available. Note 2) Displayed only when PAR_07 (Control Mode) is set to “Speed(PM).” Note 3) The default value varies depending on the control mode. V/F & Slip Comp: Inv Temp Speed(IM): Flux Cur Ref Speed(PM): Sc/EnDat Pos Table of functions 83 Function Table 5.2 Parameter (PAR) group Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage PAR_00 - Jump to codes Jump Code 1–60 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 143 PAR_01 7201 Reset to default setting Para. Init 0 (No) 0 (No) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 144 1 (All Groups) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2 (DIS) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3 (PAR) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4 (DIO) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5 (AIO) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6 (FUN) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7 (CON) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8 (E/L) # # # # ○ ○ 9 (PRT) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10 (COM) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13 (USR) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ PAR_02 - Read all codes Para. Read 0 (No) / 1 (Yes) 0 (No) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 145 PAR_03 - Write all codes Para. Write 0 (No) / 1 (Yes) 0 (No) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 145 PAR_04 7204 Lock codes Para. Lock 0–255 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 146 PAR_05 - Password Password 0–9999 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 146 PAR_07 7207 Control mode options Control Mode 2 (Speed(IM)) 2(Speed (IM)) ○ x x x ○ x 147 4 (V/F) x ○ x x x x 5 (Slip Comp) x x ○ x x x 6 (Speed(PM)) Note 1) x x x ○ x ○ PAR_08 7208 Application Application 0 (General Use) 0 (General Use) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 148 (Elevator) Note 2) ○ x x ○ ○ ○ PAR_09 7209 Motor capacity Note 3) Motor Select 0 (2.2) Varies by inverter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 (3.7) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 148 2 (5.5) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Table of functions 84 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage 3 (7.5) capacity ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4 (11.0) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5 (15.0) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6 (18.5) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7 (22.0) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8 (User Define) Note 4) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ PAR_10 720A User defined motor capacity UserMotor Sel 5.5–22.0 kW 7.5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 148 PAR_11 720B Maximum speed Max. Speed 30.00– 120.00 / 10.0– 3600.00 Note 5) Hz/ rpm 60.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 149 PAR_12 720C Minimum speed Min. Speed 0.01– 10.00 Note6) Hz 0.5 x ○ ○ x x x 149 PAR_13 720D Base frequency Base Freq 30.00– 120.00 Note6) Hz 60.00 x ○ ○ x x x 150 PAR_14 720E Sync. speed Sync Speed 10.0– 3600.0 Note7) rpm IM:1800.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 150 PM:100.0 PAR_15 720F Rated voltage Rated Volt 300–528 V 380 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 150 PAR_16 7210 Motor pole number Pole Number 2–128 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 150 PAR_17 7211 Motor efficiency Efficiency 70.0– 100.0 % Varies by inverter capacity ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 150 PAR_18 7212 Motor rated slip Rated-Slip 0.10–25.00/ 1.0–250.0 Hz/ rpm ○ ○ ○ x ○ x 150 PAR_19 7213 Motor rated current RatedCurr 1.0– 1000.0 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 151 PAR_20 7214 Input voltage AC In Volt 320–480 V 380 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 151 PAR_21 7215 Switching frequency PWM Freq 3 – 8.0 kHz 8.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 151 Table of functions 85 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage PAR_22 7216 Motor cooling options Cooling Mtd 0 (Selfcool) 1 (Forced - cool) 1 (Forced - cool) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 152 PAR_23 7217 Encoder type Enc Type 0 (A/B Pulse) 1 (EnDat) 2 (Sin/Cos_All) 3 (Sin/Cos_13 87) 0 (A/B Pulse) x x x ○ x ○ 154 PAR_24 7218 Encoder pulse number Enc Pulse 360 – 32768 1024 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 152 PAR_25 7219 Encoder directions Enc Dir Set 0 (A Phase Lead) 1 (B Phase Lead) 1 (B Phase Lead) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 152 PAR_27 721B Encoder scale Enc Scale 0 (x1) 0 (x1) ○ ○ ○ x ○ x PAR_28 721C Encoder tuning Note 8 ) Sce Tuning 0 ( No) 1 (Yes) 0 x x x ○ x ○ 154 PAR_31 721F Auto - tuning options Note 9 ) AutoTune Type 0 (Rotationa l) 1 (Standstill) 1(Stand still) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 157 PAR_32 7220 If tuning error protection P gain Kp for If 0.00 1 – 1 .000 0.020 ○ x x x ○ x 157 PAR_33 7221 If tuning error protection I gain Ki for If 0.001 – 1.000 0.040 ○ x x x ○ x 157 PAR_34 7222 Motor inertia tuning options Inertia Tune 0 (No) / 1 (Yes) 0 (No) ○ x x x ○ x 157 PAR_35 7223 Acc/dec J Spd 0.500 – sec 0.500 ○ x x x ○ x 157 Table of functions 86 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage time inertia tuning Note 10) Time 10.000 PAR_36 7224 Inertia LPF Inertia LPF 0.010– 50.000 ms 0.100 ○ x x x ○ x 157 PAR_41 - Induction motor autotuning options IM AutoTune PAR_31= 0 0 (None) ○ ○ ○ x ○ x P. 157 0 (None) 1 (ALL1) 2 (ALL2) 3 (Encoder Test) 4 (Rs Tuning) 5 (Lsigma) 6 (Flux Curr) 7 (Ls Tuning) 8 (Tr Tuning) PAR_31= 1 0 (None) 1 (ALL 1) 4 (Rs Tuning) 5 (Lsigma) 8 (if/Tr/Ls Tune) PAR_43 722B Average number of detected initial pole positions DetAve Num 1–30 5 x x x ○ x ○ 164 PAR_44 722C Voltage at detected pole positions MagDet Volt 5–200 V 80 x x x ○ x ○ 164 Table of functions 87 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage PAR_45 722D Pole position detection current MagDet Curr 10–150 % 70 x x x ○ x ○ 164 PAR_51 Synchrono us motor autotuning options PM AutoTune 0 (None) 1 (All) 2 (Rs Tuning) 3 (Ld/Lq Tuning) 4 (Mag Pole Det) 0 (None) x x x ○ x ○ 165 PAR_52 7234 Motor flux current Flux-Curr 0.0–70% of [PAR_19] A Varies by motor capacity ○ ○ ○ x ○ x 168 PAR_53 7235 Rotor time constant Tr 30–3000 ms ○ ○ ○ x ○ x 168 PAR_54 7236 Motor stator inductance Ls 0.00– 500.00 mH ○ ○ ○ x ○ x 168 PAR_55 7237 Leakage factor Lsigma 0.00– 300.00 mH ○ ○ ○ x ○ x 168 PAR_56 7238 Motor stator resistance Rs 0.000– 15.000 ohm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 168 PAR_57 7239 Motor inertia constant Inertia J 0.001– 60.000 kg· m2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 168 PAR_58 723A Motor Daxis inductance Ld 0.00– 500.00 mH x x x ○ x ○ P. 168 PAR_59 723B Motor Qaxis inductance Lq 0.00– 500.00 mH x x x ○ x ○ P. 168 PAR_60 723C Initial pole position Init Theta 0–360 deg 0 x x x ○ x ○ 168 Note 1) Select this option when a synchronous motor is used. Note 2) The Elevator option in PAR_08 is available when the ELIO add-on module has been installed to the inverter. Note 3) A motor capacity that exceeds the inverter capacity cannot be selected. Note 4) PAR_10 (UserMotorSel) is displayed when PAR_09 (Motor select) is set to “User Table of functions 88 Define.” Note 5) Max Speed is 10.0–3600.0 rpm in “Speed(IM)” mode, 30.00–120.00 Hz in “Slip Comp” mode, and 10.0–680.0 rpm in “Speed(PM)” mode. Note 6) PAR_12 (Min_Speed) and PAR_13 (Base Freq) are displayed only in “V/F” and “Slip Comp” modes. Note 7) PAR_14 (Sync Speed) is 10.0–3600.0 rpm in “Speed(IM)” mode, and 10.0–680.0 rpm in “Speed(PM)” mode. Note 8) Displayed only when PAR-23 is set to "Endat, Sin/Cos_All, or Sin/Cos_1387." Note 9) “Auto tuning” is not available during battery operations. Note 10) Par_35 (Acc/dec time inertia tuning) is displayed when PAR_34 (Motor inertia tuning options) is set to “1 (Yes).” Table of functions 89 Function Table 5.3 Digital input and output (DIO) group Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage DIO_00 - Jump to codes Jump Code 1–36 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 171 DIO_01 7301 Define multifunction input terminal P1 P1 Define 0 (Not Used) 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 172 1 (Speed-L) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2 (Speed-M) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3 (Speed-H) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10 (Xcel-L) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 11 (Xcel-H) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13 (EXT TripB) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 17 ( Timer Input) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 19 ( ASR Gain Sel) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 22 (PreExcite) ○ # # # ○ # 25 (Use Trq Bias) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 26 (A3 Safety ) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 28 (Battery Run) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 29 (HighSpeed Run) x x x x ○ ○ 30 (manual Spd-L)Note4) x x x x ○ ○ 31 (manual Spd-H)Note4) x x x x ○ ○ 32 (FHM Run)Note4) x x x x ○ ○ 33 (BaseFloor Run)Note4) x x x x ○ ○ 34 (NearFloor Run)Note4) x x x x ○ ○ 35 (Mot M/C State)Note4) x x x x ○ ○ 36 (CarBrake State)Note4) x x x x ○ ○ 37 (MagDet Run)Note4) x x x x ○ ○ Table of functions 90 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage 38 (2ndAutoRun) Note4) x x x x ○ ○ DIO_02 7302 Define multifunction input terminal P2 P2 Define Refer to DIO_01 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 172 DIO_03 7303 Define multifunction input terminal P3 P3 Define Refer to DIO_01 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 172 DIO_04 7304 Define multifunction input terminal P4 P4 Define Refer to DIO_01 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 172 DIO_05 7305 Define multifunction input terminal P5 P5 Define Refer to DIO_01 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 172 DIO_06 7306 Define multifunction input terminal P6 P6 Define Refer to DIO_01 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 172 DIO_07 7307 Define multifunction input terminal P7 P7 Define Refer to DIO_01 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 172 DIO_08 7308 Reverse operation for multiNeg Func. In 00000000000 –11111111111 bit 00000 00000 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 178 Table of functions 91 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage function terminal input DIO_09 7309 Low-pass filter time constant for multifunction terminal input Terminal LPF 0–2000 ms 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 178 DIO_10 730A Reverse operation for multifunction output Neg Func. Out 0000–1111 bit 0000 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 179 DIO_11 730B Define multifunction aux output AX1 AX1 Define 0 (Not Used) 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 179 1 (INV Ready) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2 (Zero Spd Det) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 3 (Spd Det.) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4 (Spd Det(ABS)) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5 (Spd Arrival) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6 (Timer Out) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7 (LV Warn) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8 (Run) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 9 (Regenerating) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 11 (Inv OH Warn) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 12 (Spd Agree) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 13 (Trq Det.) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 14 (Trq Lmt Det.) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 15 (OverLoad) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 16 (Stop) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 17 (MC on/off) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 18 (FAN ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Table of functions 92 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage Status) 19 (ALLS Status) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 20 (Steady) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 21 (Brake Output) ○ ○ ○ ○ # # 22 (BFR/NFR Mode)Note4) x x x x ○ ○ 23 (BFR/NFR End)Note4) x x x x ○ ○ 24 (E/L Fault)Note4) x x x x ○ ○ DIO_12 730C Define multifunction aux output AX2 AX2 Define Same as DIO_11 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 179 DIO_13 730D Define multifunction aux output AX3 AX3 Define Same as DIO_11 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 179 DIO_14 730E Define multifunction aux output AX4 AX4 Define Same as DIO_11 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 179 DIO_16 7310 Fault relay terminal (A, B, C) Relay Mode 00-11 bit 11 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 193 DIO_17 7311 Zerospeed detection level ZSD Level 0.0–480.0 rpm 10.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 181 DIO_18 7312 Zerospeed detection band ZSD Band 0.1–10.0 % 0.5 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ Table of functions 93 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage DIO_19 7313 Speed detection level SD Level - PAR_11 – PAR_11 Hz/ rpm 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 181 DIO_20 7314 Speed detection band SD Band 0.1 –10.0 % 0.5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ DIO_21 7315 Speed arrival detection band SA Band 0.1 –10.0 % 0.5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 182 DIO_22 7316 Equal speed detection band SEQ Band 0.1 –10.0 % 0.5 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 182 DIO_23 7317 Torque detection level TD Level 0.0 –250.0 % 0.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 185 DIO_24 7318 Torque detection band TD Band 0.1 –10.0 % 0.5 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ DIO_25 7319 Timer On delay TimerOn Dly 0.1 –3600.0 sec 0.1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 183 DIO_26 731A Timer Off delay TimerOff Dly 0.1 –3600.0 sec 0.1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ DIO_28 731C MC On delay Note 1) MC On Time 100 – 50000 ms 1000 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 185 DIO_29 731D MC Off delay Note 1) MC Off Time 100 – 50000 ms 1000 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ DIO_30 731E Brake open delay Note 3) BK On Delay 0.0 – (FUN_11 - 0.1) ms 0.0 x ○ ○ x x x DIO_31 731F 187 Brake open time Note 2) BKOpen Time 0.01 –30.00 sec 0.0 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ DIO_32 7320 Brake open speed Note 2) BKOpen Spd PAR_12 – 50.00/ 0.0 –500.0 Hz/ rpm 0. 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Table of functions 94 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage DIO_33 7321 Brake open current Note 2) Release Curr 0.0–150.0 % 20.0 ○ ○ ○ x ○ x DIO_34 7322 Brake off delay Note3) BK Off Delay 0.0–(FUN_09 - 0.1) sec 0 x ○ ○ x x x DIO_36 7324 Brake close speed Note 2) BKClose Spd PAR_12– 50.00/ 0.0–500.0 Hz/ rpm 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Note 1) Displayed when AX1 –AX4 is set to “MC on/off”. Note 2) Displayed when AX1 –AX4 is set to “Brake output”. Note 3) Displayed when AX1 –AX4 is set to “Brake output” and FUN_03 (Stop mode) is set to “DC-Brake.” - DIO_30 is displayed when the Fun_11 value has been defined. - “DC-Brake” option is available only in “V/F” and “Slip Comp” control modes. Note4) Displayed only when Elio add-on module has been installed. Table of functions 95 Function Table 5.4 Analog input and output (AIO) group Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage AIO_00 - Jump to codes Jump Code 1–53 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 194 AIO_01 7401 Define multifunction analog input Ai1 Ai1 Define 0 (Not Used) 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 (Speed Ref) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 6 (Torque Bias) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ AIO_02 7402 Define multifunction analog input Ai1 input source Ai1 Source 0 (0 – 10 V) 1 (10 – 0 V) 2 (-10 – 10 V) 3 (10 – -10 V) 2 (-10 – 10V) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 AIO_03 7403 Define multifunction analog input Ai1 minimum voltage Ai1 In X1 AIO_07– AIO_05 % 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 AIO_04 7404 Define multifunction analog input Ai1 min. voltage bias Ai1 Out Y1 AIO_08– AIO_06 % 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 200 Table of functions 96 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage AIO_05 7405 Define multifunction analog input Ai1 maximum voltage Ai1 In X2 0.00–100.00 % 100.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 AIO_06 7406 Define multifunction analog input Ai1 maximum voltage gain Ai1 Out Y2 0.00–250.00 % 100.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 AIO_07 7407 Define multifunction analog input Ai1 minimum negative voltage Ai1 -In X1 AIO_09– AIO_03 % 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 AIO_08 7408 Define multifuncti on analog input Ai1 min. negative voltage bias Ai1 -Out Y1 AIO_10– AIO_04 % 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 AIO_09 4709 Define multiAi1 -In X2 -100.00–0.00 % -100.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 Table of functions 97 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage function analog input Ai1 maximum negative voltage AIO_10 740A Define multifunction analog input Ai1 max. negative voltage gain Ai1 -Out Y2 -250.00–0.00 % -100.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 AIO_11 740B Ai1 input LPF time constant Ai1 LPF 0–2000 ms 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 203 AIO_12 740C Define multifunction analog input Ai1 lost command conditions Ai1 Wbroken 0 (None) 1 (Half of x1) 2 (Below x1) 0 (None) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 AIO_13 740D Define multifunction analog input Ai2 Ai2 Define 0 (Not Used) 1 (Speed Ref) 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 AIO_14 740E Multifunction analog Ai2 Source 0 (0 – 20 mA) 1 (20 – 0 mA) 0 (0 – 20 mA) Table of functions 98 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage input Ai2 input source AIO_15 740F Multifunction analog input Ai2 minimum voltage Ai2 In X1 -100.00 – AIO_17 % 0.00 AIO_16 7410 Multifunction analog input Ai2 minimum voltage bias Ai2 Out Y1 -100.00 – AIO_18 % 0.00 AIO_17 7411 Multifunction analog input Ai2 maximum voltage Ai2 In X2 0.00 – 100.00 % 100.00 AIO_18 7412 Multifunction analog input Ai2 maximum voltage gain Ai2 Out Y2 0.00 – 250.00 % 100.00 Table of functions 99 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage AIO_23 7417 Ai2 input LPF time constant Ai2 LPF 0 – 2000 ms 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 AIO_24 7418 Multifunction analog input Ai2 lost command conditions Ai2 Wbroken 0 (None) 1 (Half of x1) 2 (Below x1) 0 (None) AIO_37 7425 Multifunction analog input lost command time Time out 0.1–120.0 sec 1.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 204 AIO_38 7426 Analog input lost command options Ai Lost Comm 0 (None) 0 (None) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 204 1 (Free Run) 2 (Decel) AIO_40 7428 Define multifunction analog output AO1 AO1 Define 0 (Not Used) 0 (Not Used) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 1 (Ai1 Value) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2 (AI2 Value) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4 ( PreRamp Ref) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5 (PostRamp Ref) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6 (ASR Inp Ref) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7 (Output Freq) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8 (Motor Speed) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ Table of functions 100 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage 10 (Speed Dev) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 11 (ASR Out) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 12 (Torque Bias) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 13 (PosTrq Limit) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 14 (NegTrq Limit) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 15 (RegTrq Limit) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 17 (IqeRef) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 18 (Iqe) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 19 (Flux Ref) ○ # # # ○ # 20 (IdeRef) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 21 (Ide) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 22 (ACR_D Out) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 23 (ACR_Q Out) ○ # # ○ ○ ○ 24 (VdeRef) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 25 (VqeRef) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 26 (Out Amps RMS) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 27 (Out Volt RMS) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 28 (Power) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 29 (DC Bus Volt) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 34 (Inv Temp) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Table of functions 101 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage AIO_41 7429 Define multifunction analog output AO1 output source AO1 Source 0 (0 – 10 V) 1 (10 – 0 V) 2 (-10 – 10 V) 3 (10 – -10 V) 0 (-10 – 10 V) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 AIO_42 742A Define multifunction analog output AO1 bias AO1 Bias 0.0–AIO_43 % 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 AIO_43 742B Define multifunction analog output AO1 gain AO1 Gain 0.0–500.0 % 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 AIO_44 742C Define multifunction analog output AO1 - bias AO1 - Bias AIO_45–0.0 % 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 AIO_45 742D Define multifunction analog output AO1 - gain AO1 - Gain 0.0 – -500.0 % -100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 Table of functions 102 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage AIO_46 742E Define multifunction analog output AO1 absolute value AO1 ABS 0 (No) / 1 (Yes) 0 (No) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 AIO_47 742F Define multifunction analog output AO2 AO2 Define Refer to AIO_40 0 (Not Used) AIO_48 7430 Define multifunction analog output AO2 output source) AO2 Source 0 (0 – 10 V) 1 (10 – 0 V) 2 (-10 – 10 V) 3 (10 – -10 V) 2 (-10 – 10 V) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 AIO_49 7431 Define multifunction analog output AO2 bias AO2 Bias 0.0–AIO_50 % 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 AIO_50 7432 Define multifunction analog output AO2 gain AO2 Gain 0.0–500.0 % 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 Table of functions 103 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage AIO_51 7433 Define multifunction analog output AO2 - bias AO2 - Bias AIO_52–0.0 % 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 AIO_52 7434 Define multifunction analog output AO2 - gain AO2 - Gain 0.0 – -500.0 % -100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 AIO_53 7435 Define multifunction analog output AO2 absolute value AO2 ABS 0 (No) / 1 (Yes) 0 (No) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 • AIO_02 –AIO_12 are available when AIO_01 is not set to “Not Used.” • AIO_07 –AIO_10 are available when AIO_02 is set to “-10 – 10V” or “10 – -10V.” • AIO_14 –AIO_18, AIO_23, and AIO_24 are available when AIO_013 is not set to “Not Used.” • AIO_41 –AIO_46 are available when AIO_40 is not set to “Not Used.” • AIO_48 –AIO_53 are available when AIO_47 is not set to “Not Used.” Table of functions 104 5.5 Function (FUN) group Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage FUN_00 - Jump to codes Jump code 1–97 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 212 FUN_01 7501 RUN /STOP command source Run/Stop Src 0 (Terminal 1) 1 (Terminal 2) 2 (Keypad) 4 (CAN) 0 (Termin al 1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 213 FUN_02 7502 Speed reference source Spd Ref Sel 0 (Analog) 1 (Keypad1) 2 (Keypad2) 4 (CAN) 1 (Keypa d1) ○ ○ ○ ○ x x 214 FUN_03 7503 Stop options Stop mode 0 (Decel) 0 (Decel) ○ ○ ○ ○ x x 1 (Free-run) ○ ○ ○ ○ x x 214 2 (DC-Brake) # ○ ○ # x x FUN_06 7506 DCbraking frequency Note 1) DcBr Freq PAR_12 – PAR_11 Hz 5.00 x ○ ○ x x x 215 FUN_07 7507 Block time before DCbraking Note 1) DcBlk Time 0.00–60.00 sec 0.00 x ○ ○ x x x 215 FUN_08 7508 DCbraking amount Note 1) DcBr Value 0–200 % 10 x ○ ○ x x x 215 Table of functions 105 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage FUN_09 7509 DCbraking time Note 1) DcBr Time 0.0–60.0 sec 1.0 x ○ ○ x x x 215 FUN_10 750A DC-start value Note 1) DcSt Value 0–200 % 10 x ○ ○ x x x 216 FUN_11 750B DC-start time Note 1) DcSt Time 0.0–60.0 sec 0 x ○ ○ x x x 216 FUN_12 750C Multistep speed 0 Note 2) Speed 0 0.0–PAR_11 rpm/ Hz 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 217 FUN_13 750D Multistep speed 1 Note 2) Speed 1 0.0–PAR_11 rpm/ Hz 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 217 FUN_14 750E Multistep speed 2 Note 2) Speed 2 0.0–PAR_11 rpm/ Hz 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 217 FUN_15 750F Multistep speed 3 Note 2) Speed 3 0.0–PAR_11 rpm/ Hz 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 217 FUN_16 7510 Multistep speed 4 Note 2) Speed 4 0.0–PAR_11 rpm/ Hz 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 217 FUN_17 7511 Multistep speed 5 Note 2) Speed 5 0.0–PAR_11 rpm/ Hz 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 217 FUN_18 7512 Multistep speed 6 Note 2) Speed 6 0.0–PAR_11 rpm/ Hz 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 217 FUN_19 7513 Multistep speed 7 Speed 7 0.0–PAR_11 rpm/ Hz 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 217 Table of functions 106 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage Note 2) FUN_26 751A Frequenc y jump Jump Speed 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) x ○ ○ x x x 219 FUN_27 751B Jump frequency low limit1 Note3) Jump Lo 1 0.00– FUN_28 Hz 10.00 x ○ ○ x x x 219 FUN_28 751C Jump frequency high limit1 Note3) Jump Hi 1 FUN_27– FUN_29 Hz 15.00 x ○ ○ x x x 219 FUN_29 751D Jump frequency low limit2 Note3) Jump Lo 2 FUN_28– FUN_30 Hz 20.00 x ○ ○ x x x 219 FUN_30 751E Jump frequency high limit2 Note3) Jump Hi 2 FUN_29– FUN_31 Hz 25.00 x ○ ○ x x x 219 FUN_31 751F Jump frequency low limit3 Note3) Jump Lo 3 FUN_30– FUN_32 Hz 30.00 x ○ ○ x x x 219 FUN_32 7520 Jump frequency high limit3 Note3) Jump Hi 3 FUN_31– PAR_11 Hz 35.00 x ○ ○ x x x 219 FUN_33 7521 Acc/dec reference speed Acc/Dec Ref 0 (Max Speed) 1 (Ref Speed) 0 (Max Speed) ○ ○ ○ ○ x x 220 Table of functions 107 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage FUN_36 7524 S-curve gradient at accelerati on 1 Acc S Start 0.0–50.0 % 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 221 FUN_37 7525 S-curve gradient at accelerati on 2 Acc S End 0.0–50.0 % 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 221 FUN_38 7526 S-curve gradient at decelerati on 1 Dec S Start 0.0–50.0 % 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 221 FUN_39 7527 S-curve gradient at decelerati on 2 Dec S End 0.0–50.0 % 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 221 FUN_40 7528 Acc/dec time scale Time scale 0 (0.01 sec) 1 (0.1 sec) 0 (0.01 sec) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 221 FUN_41 7529 Accelerati on time 1 Acc Time-1 0.00–600.0 sec 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 224 FUN_42 752A Decelerati on time 1 Dec Time-1 0.00–600.0 sec 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 224 FUN_43 752B Accelerati on time 2 Acc Time-2 0.00–600.0 sec 3.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 224 FUN_44 752C Decelerati on time 2 Dec Time-2 0.00–600.0 sec 3.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 224 Table of functions 108 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage FUN_45 752D Accelerati on time 3 Acc Time-3 0.00–600.0 sec 4.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 224 FUN_46 752E Decelerati on time 3 Dec Time-3 0.00–600.0 sec 4.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 224 FUN_47 752F Accelerati on time 4 Acc Time-4 0.00–600.0 sec 5.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 224 FUN_48 7530 Decelerati on time 4 Dec Time-4 0.00–600.0 sec 5.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 224 FUN_51 7533 Emergen cy stop decelerati on time BX Time 0.0–6000.0 sec 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ x x 226 FUN_52 7534 Emergen cy stop terminal filter time BX Termi LPF 0.0–2000 ms 5.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 226 FUN_53 7535 Motor preexcitation time PreExct Time 0–10000 ms 0 ○ x x x x x 228 FUN_54 7536 Hold time at zerospeed Hold Time 10–10000 ms 1000 ○ x x ○ x x 228 FUN_56 7538 Short floor operation speed ShortFlr Spd 0.0–PAR_11 rpm/ Hz 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ x x 230 FUN_57 7539 Short floor operation ShortFlr Time 0.00–100.00 sec 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ x x 230 Table of functions 109 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage time FUN_58 753A Antihunting regulator options New AHR Sel 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 1 (Yes) x ○ ○ x x x 233 FUN_59 753B Antihunting regulator P gain New AHR PGain 0.00–100.00 3.00 x ○ ○ x x x 233 FUN_60 753C AHR start frequency AHR Low Freq 0–AHR end freq Hz 3.00 x ○ ○ x x x 233 FUN_61 753D AHR end frequency AHR Hi Freq AHR start freq–100 Hz 60.00 x ○ ○ x x x 233 FUN_67 7543 Battery operation speed Note4) Batt. Speed PAR_12 – 6.66/ 0.0 – 200.0 Hz/ rpm 50.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 234 FUN_68 7544 Battery input voltage Note4) Batt. Volt 12–PAR_15 V 48 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 234 FUN_69 7545 Automatic Light Load Search options Note4) ALLS Enable 0 (No) 1 (Yes) No ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 237 Table of functions 110 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage FUN_70 7546 Hold time at FX/RX direction switching Note 6) ALLS DirChgT 1.0–10.0 sec 5.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 237 FUN_71 7547 Light load search time Note5) ALLS Time FUN_72– 10.00 sec 5.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 237 FUN_72 7548 Light load detection time Note5) ALLS LoadCk T 1.0–FUN_71 sec 2.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 237 FUN_73 7549 Load cell options Use LoadCell 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 241 FUN_74 754A Full-load climb torque FullLoad Trq -250.0–250.0 % 100.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 241 FUN_75 754B Full-load climb AI FullLoad AI -100.0–100.0 % 100.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 241 FUN_76 754C No-load descent torque Noload Trq -250.0–250.0 % -100.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 241 FUN_77 754D No-load descent AI Noload AI -100.0–100.0 % 0.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 241 FUN_78 754E Torque current ramp time TrqRam p Time 1 – 1000 ms 1 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 241 FUN_94 755E Use zero speed decelerati Use 0 Dec T 0 (No) 1 (Yes) - 0 (No) ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 241 Table of functions 111 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage on time FUN_95 755F Zero speed decelerati on time 1 0 Dec Time 1 0.00 – 600.00 sec 1.00 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 241 FUN_96 7560 Zero speed decelerati on time 2 0 Dec Time 2 0.00 – 600.00 sec 3.00 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 241 FUN_97 7561 Zero speed decelerati on target speed 0 Dec TarSpd 0.00 – PAR_11 rpm/ Hz 0.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 241 Note 1) Displayed when FUN_03 (Stop mode) is set to “DC-Brake”. Note 2) When control mode is set to “V/F” or “Slip Compensation”, the range is 0.50–120.00 Hz. Note 3) Displayed when FUN_26 (Jump Speed) is set to “Yes”. Note 4) Displayed when one of the multifunction inputs is set for battery operation (Battery Run). Note 5) Displayed when FUN_69 (ALLS Enable) is set to “Yes”. • FUN_74 – FUN_78 are displayed when FUN_73 (Use LoadCell) is set to “Yes”. • FUN_95 – FUN_97 are displayed when FUN_94 (Use 0 Dec T) is set to “Yes”. Table of functions 112 5.6 Control (CON) group Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage CON_00 - Jump to codes Jump Code 1–92 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 247 CON_02 7602 Speed controller gain ratio ASR PI Ratio 1.0–500.0 % 20.0 x x x ○ x ○ 248 CON_03 7603 Speed controller proportion al gain 1 ASR P Gain1 0.1–999.9 % IM: 50.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 248 PM: 100.0 CON_04 7604 Speed controller integral time 1 ASR I Gain1 0–50000 ms IM: 300 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 248 PM: 50 CON_05 7605 Speed controller input LPF time constant 1 ASR LPF1 0–20000 ms 0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 248 CON_06 7606 Speed controller proportion al gain 2 ASR P Gain2 0.1–500.0 % IM: 50.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 248 PM: 100.0 CON_07 7607 Speed controller integral time 2 ASR I Gain2 0–50000 ms IM: 300 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 248 PM: 50 Table of functions 113 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage CON_08 7608 Speed controller input LPF time constant 2 ASR LPF2 0–20000 ms 0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 248 CON_09 7609 Overshoot prevention gain ASR FF Gain 0–1000 % 0 x x x ○ x ○ 252 CON_10 760A Ramp time at speed controller gain switching ASR Ramp 10–10000 ms 1000 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 248 CON_11 760B Speed controller gain switching speed ASR TarSpd 0.0–3600.0 rpm 0.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 248 CON_33 7621 Torque limit source options Trq Lmt Src 0 (Kpd Kpd Kpd) 2 (CAN CAN CAN) 0 (Kpd Kpd Kpd) ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 253 CON_34 7622 FX torque limit Pos Trq Lmt 0.0–250.0 % 150.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 253 ELIO:200.0 CON_35 7623 RX torque limit Neg Trq Lmt 0.0–250.0 % 150.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 253 ELIO:200.0 CON_36 7624 Regenerati on torque limit Reg Trq Lmt 0.0–250.0 % 150.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 253 ELIO:200.0 Table of functions 114 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage CON_37 7625 Torque bias options Trq Bias Src 0 (None) 1 (Analog) 2 (Keypad) 4 (CAN) 0 (None) ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 254 CON_38 7626 Torque bias amount Trq Bias -150.0– 150.0 % 0.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 254 CON_39 7627 Torque bias compensat ion for friction loss Trq Bias FF -150.0– 150.0 % 0.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 256 CON_40 7628 Torque balance amount Trq Balance 0.0–100.0 % 50.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 256 CON_41 7629 Torque boost options Note 1) Torque Boost 0 (Manual) 1 ( Auto) Varies by control mode Note 2) x ○ ○ x x x 257 CON_42 762A Forward torque boost Note 1) Fwd Boost 0.0–20.0 % 2.0 x ○ ○ x x x 257 CON_43 762B Reverse torque boost Note 1) Rev Boost 0.0–20.0 % 2.0 x ○ ○ x x x 257 CON_45 762D Auto torque boost filter Note 1) ATB FilterGain 1–10000 ms 200 x ○ ○ x x x 259 CON_46 762E Auto torque voltGainA tbM 0–300.0 % 15.0 x ○ ○ x x x 259 Table of functions 115 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage boost motor voltage gain Note 1) CON_47 762F Auto torque boost generating voltage gain Note 1) voltGainA tbG 0–300.0 % 10.0 x ○ ○ x x x 259 CON_48 7630 V/F pattern Note 1) V/F pattern 0 (Linear) 2 ( User V/F) 0 (Linear) x ○ ○ x x x 263 CON_49 7631 User frequency 1 Note 3) User Freq 1 0.00– CON_51 Hz 15.00 x ○ ○ x x x 264 CON_50 7632 User voltage 1 Note 3) User Volt 1 0–100 % 25 x ○ ○ x x x 264 CON_51 7633 User frequency 2 Note 3) User Freq 2 CON_49 – CON_53 Hz 30.00 x ○ ○ x x x 264 CON_52 7634 User voltage 2 Note 3) User Volt 2 0–100 % 50 x ○ ○ x x x 264 CON_53 7635 User frequency 3 Note 3) User Freq 3 CON_51 – CON_55 Hz 45.00 x ○ ○ x x x 264 CON_54 7636 User voltage 3 Note 3) User Volt 3 0–100 % 75 x ○ ○ x x x 264 CON_55 7637 User User Freq CON_53 Hz 60.00 x ○ ○ x x x 264 Table of functions 116 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage frequency 4 Note 3) 4 – PAR_11 CON_56 7638 User voltage 4 Note 3) User Volt 4 0–100 % 100 x ○ ○ x x x 264 CON_57 7639 Output voltage adjustment Volt Control 40–150 % 100 x ○ ○ x x x 266 CON_63 763F Slip compensat ion frequency SlipComp ChgF 0–120.00 Hz 5.00 x x ○ x x x 267 CON_64 7640 Slip compensat ion motoring gain H SlipGain_ MH 0–1000 % 100 x x ○ x x x 267 CON_65 7641 Slip compensat ion generating gain H SlipGain_ ML 0–1000 % 100 x x ○ x x x 267 CON_67 7643 Slip compensat ion motoring gain L SlipGain_ GH 0–1000 % 10 x x ○ x x x 267 CON_68 7644 Slip compensat ion generating gain L SlipGain_ GL 0–1000 % 10 x x ○ x x x 267 Table of functions 117 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage CON_69 7645 Slip compensat ion filter time constant Slip Filter 10–10000 ms 500 x x ○ x x x 267 CON_71 7647 Anti rollback time ARF Time 0–10000 ms 0 x x x ○ x ○ 270 CON_72 7648 Anti rollback speed Pgain ARF ASR P 1–3000 % 100 x x x ○ x ○ 270 CON_73 7649 Anti rollback speed I gain ARF ASR I 1–50000 ms 5 x x x ○ x ○ 270 CON_74 764A Anti rollback position gain ARF APR P 1–9999 % 200 x x x ○ x ○ 270 CON_88 7658 q axis current controller P gain ACR P Gain 10 – 2000 % 100 ○ x x ○ x ○ 270 CON_89 7659 q axis current controller I gain ACR I Gain 10 – 2000 % 100 ○ x x ○ x ○ 270 CON_90 765A d axis current controller P gain ACRd P Gain 10 – 2000 % 100 ○ x x ○ x ○ 270 Table of functions 118 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage CON_91 765B d axis current controller I gain ACRd I Gain 10 – 2000 % 100 ○ x x ○ x ○ 270 CON_92 765C Flux current level FluxCurr Lvl 0.0 – 100.0 % 80.0 ○ ○ x ○ x ○ 270 Note 1) Displayed when Par_07 (control mode) is set to “V/F” or “Slip Comp”. Note 2) The default setting when the control mode is “V/F” is “0 (Manual”). The default setting when the control mode is “Slip Comp” is “1 (Auto Torque Boost)”. Note 3) Displayed when CON_48 (V/F pattern) is set to “User V/F”. Table of functions 119 Function Table 5.7 Elevator (E/L) group Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPM Page E/L_00 - Jump to function code Jump Code 1 –72 1 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_01 7A01 Speed reference pattern type Spd Ref Type 0 (DecelReqD/B) 1 (DecelReqT/B) 0 (DecelR eq-D/B) x x x x ○ ○ E/L_02 7A02 Number of floors Floor Number 1 – 32 FLO OR 32 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_03 7A03 Rated car speed Car Speed 10 – 420 m/m 60 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_04 7A04 Motor speed at rated car speed Motor Speed 20.0 – 3600.0 rpm 1500.0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_05 7A05 Direction of motor operation UP Direction 0 (FX-CCW) 1 (FX-CW) 0 (FXCCW) x x x x ○ ○ E/L_06 7A06 Rated acceleration speed Rated Accel 0.10 – 1.00 m/sec2 0.50 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_07 7A07 Rated deceleration speed Rated Decel 0.10 – 1.00 m/sec2 0.50 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_08 7A08 Acceleration start time Acc Start T 0.50 – 2.50 sec 1.00 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_09 7A09 Acceleration end time Acc End T 0.50 – 2.50 sec 1.00 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_10 7A0A Deceleration start time Dec Start T 0.50 – 2.50 sec 1.00 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_11 7A0B Deceleration end time Dec End T 0.50 – 2.50 sec 1.00 x x x x ○ ○ Table of functions 120 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPM Page E/L_12 7A0C Distance for compensati on of communicat ion delay CommDly Dist 100 – 1000 mm 400 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_13 7A0D Adjustment for deceleration start distance DecStart Adj -10 – 100 mm 0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_14 7A0E Motor excitation time PreExct Time 100 – 10000 ms 300 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_15 7A0F Brake release time Brake Time 0 – 10000 ms 300 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_16 7A10 Hold time at zero speed Hold Time 0 – 10000 ms 300 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_17 7A11 Hold time for a restart Restart Time 1.00 – 100.00 sec 1.00 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_18 7A12 Sensing plate length Plate Length E/L_19 – 1000.0 mm 200.0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_19 7A13 Distance between position sensor and sensing plate at floor level Inductor Edge 0.0 – E/L_18 mm 20.0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_20 7A14 Car speed for floor height measuring FHM/BF R Speed 0.0 – 60.0 m/m 15.0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_21 7A15 Floor height measuring FHM DATA 0 – 321 0 x x x x ○ ○ Table of functions 121 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPM Page result E/L_22 7A16 Car speed 1 for manual operation Manual Spd1 0 .0– 60.0 m/m 15.0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_23 7A17 Car speed 2 for manual operation Manual Spd2 0.0 – 60.0 m/m 10.0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_24 7A18 Car speed 3 for manual operation Manual Spd3 0.0 – 60.0 m/m 3.0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_25 7A19 Acceleration for manual operation MAN Accel. 0.01 – 5.00 m/sec2 0.25 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_26 7A1A Deceleration for manual operation MAN Decel. 0.01 – 5.00 m/sec2 0.25 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_27 7A1B Acceleration start time for manual operation ManAcc StartT 0.01 – 2.00 sec 0.50 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_28 7A1C Acceleration end time for manual operation Man AccEnd T 0.01 – 2.00 sec 0.50 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_29 7A1D Deceleration start time for manual operation ManDec StartT 0.01 – 2.00 sec 0.50 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_30 7A1E Deceleration end time for manual operation Man DecEnd T 0.01 – 2.00 sec 0.50 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_31 7A1F Deceleration time for ManZero Dec T 0.00 – 600.00 sec 2.00 x x x x ○ ○ Table of functions 122 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPM Page manual operation E/L_32 7A20 Minimum distance compensati on DistCom p.Min 0.0 – 2×E/L_19 mm 0.0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_33 7A21 Maximum distance compensati on DistCom p.Max 0.0 – 100.0 mm 0.0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_34 7A22 Distance compensati on at floor level Note 1) DistCom p.Lev -E/L_19 – E/L_19 mm 0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_35 7A23 Car speed for creep operation Note 2) Creep Speed 1.0 – 60.0 m/m 3.0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_36 7A24 Creep speed distance Note 2) Creep Dist. 0 – 500 mm 50 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_37 7A25 Distance for ending position control and starting zero speed deceleration Note 1) D/B End Dist 0 – E/L_19 mm 0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_38 7A26 Zero speed deceleration time after position control SpdZero Time 0.01 – 10.00 sec 2.00 x x x x ○ ○ Table of functions 123 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPM Page endsNote1) E/L_39 7A27 Reversed operation for ELIO input signal ELIO In Neg 000000000000 –111111111111 - 000000000 000 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_40 7A28 Inductor input filter time IND Filter 0 – 50 ms 5 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_41 7A29 SDS input filter time SDS Filter 50 – 500 ms 250 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_42 7A2A Forced deceleration start speed for SDS-1 input ForcedD ecSpd 0.0 – 420.0 m/m 0.0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_43 7A2B Deceleration for SDS-1 forced deceleration Note 3) ForcedD ecel 0.01 – 1.50 m/sec2 1.50 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_44 7A2C Creep speed for forced deceleration Note 3) ForcedC rpSpd 0.0 – 60.0 m/m 3.0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_45 7A2D Zero speed wait time for forced deceleration Note 3) Frcd.Dec Wait 0 – 10000 ms 300 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_46 7A2E Use SDS-2 Use FrcdDcl2 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) x x x x ○ ○ E/L_47 7A2F Forced deceleration Frcd.Dec Spd2 0.0 – 420.0 m/m 0.0 x x x x ○ ○ Table of functions 124 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPM Page start speed for SDS-2 input Note 4) E/L_50 7A32 Start condition for high-speed automatic operation HighSpd Start 0 (Inductor ON) 1 (Always) - 0 (Inductor ON) x x x x ○ ○ E/L_51 7A33 Acceleration start type AccStart Type 0 (Linear) 1 (U-Curve) - 0 (Linear) x x x x ○ ○ E/L_52 7A34 Startup acceleration compensati on StartupA ccel 0.00 – 1.00 m/sec2 0.00 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_53 7A35 Startup acceleration compensati on time StartupA ccT 0.01 – 5.00 sec 0.50 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_54 7A36 Startup compensati on wait time Startup Wait 0.00 – 5.00 sec 0.50 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_55 7A37 Wait time before stopping for base floor / nearest floor operation BFR/NF R Wait 0.00 – 5.00 sec 0.30 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_56 7A38 Source for calling the car CallFlr Src 0 (External) 1 (Keypad) - 0 (External ) x x x x ○ ○ E/L_58 7A3A Select information to display on Display Sel. 0 (Car Spd (m/m)) 1 (Car Spd (M/S)) 0 (Car Spd (m/m)) x x x x ○ ○ Table of functions 125 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPM Page keypad 2 (Car Spd (RPM)) 3 (Car Position) 4 (Trq Output) 5 (Lmt.S/W State) 6 (Tuning Dist) E/L_59 7A3B Reset car position Clear Posi. 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) x x x x ○ ○ E/L_60 7A3C Show floor position Show FlrPosi 1 – E/L_02 FLOOR 1 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_61 7A3D Set start condition for floor height measuring FHM Start 0 (IDOFF/IU-ON) 1 (DLSON/SD1-ON) - 0 (IDOFF/IUON) x x x x ○ ○ E/L_62 7A3E Floor height measuring mode setting by keypad KeyPad FHM 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) x x x x ○ ○ E/L_63 7A3F Upside direction distance compensati on by floor UpDir Level -E/L_19 – E/L_19 mm 0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_64 7A40 Downside direction distance compensati on by floor DnDir Level -E/L_19 – E/L_19 mm 0 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_67 7A43 Secondary speed 2ndAuto Spd 30 – 60 m/m 30 x x x x ○ ○ Table of functions 126 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPM Page reference for automatic operation E/L_68 7A44 Secondary acceleration for automatic operation 2nd Rated Acc 0.10 – 1.00 m/s2 0.50 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_69 7A45 Secondary deceleration for automatic operation 2nd Rated Dec 0.10 – 1.00 m/s2 0.50 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_70 7A46 Free run speed Free Run Spd 1 – 20 m/m 2 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_71 7A47 MC On delay time ELMC On Time 100 – 50000 ms 1000 x x x x ○ ○ E/L_72 7A48 MC Off delay time ELMC OffTime 100 – 50000 ms 1000 x x x x ○ ○ Note 1) Displayed only when E/L_01 is set to “DecelReq-D/B.” Note 2) Displayed only when E/L_01 is set to “DecelReq-T/B.” Note 3) Displayed only when E/L_42 or E/L_47 is set to a value other than “0.” Note 4) Displayed only when E/L_46 is set to “Yes.” Table of functions 127 Function Table 5.8 Protection (PRT) group Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage PRT_00 - Jump to codes Jump code 1–34 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 275 PRT_01 7801 Ethermal options ETH Select 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 275 PRT_02 7802 Ethermal 1 min level Note1) ETH 1 min PRT_03 –200 % 150 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 275 PRT_03 7803 Ethermal continuo us operation level Note1) ETH Cont 50– PRT_02 (150% max) % 100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 275 PRT_07 7807 Hold time after stop Note2) Restart Time 0.00– 10.00 sec 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 278 PRT_08 7808 Sincos13 87/EnDat fault & pole position detection settings Sc/EnDat Fct 111–000 bit 011 x x x ○ x ○ 279 PRT_09 7809 Encoder error check options Enc Err Chk 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 1 (Yes) ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 280 PRT_10 780A Encoder LPF time constant Enc LPF 0–100 ms 1 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 280 Table of functions 128 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage PRT_11 780B Encoder error detection time EncFaultTime 0.00– 10.00 sec 0.00 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 280 ELPM: 4.00 PRT_12 780C Encoder error reference speed EncFaultPerc 0.0–50.0 % 25.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 280 ELPM: 10.0 PRT_13 780D Speed deviation detection level SpdErrLevel 0–100 rpm IM: 100 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 283 PM: 20 PRT_14 780E Speed deviation detection time SpdErrTime 0–1000 ms 500 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 283 PRT_15 780F Overspe ed error detection level OverSpdLevel 100.0– 130.0 % 110.0 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 284 PRT_16 7810 Overspe ed error detection time OverSpd Time 0.00– 2.00 sec 1.00 ○ x x ○ ○ ○ 284 PRT_17 7811 Missing input phase detection PhInOpenChk 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 284 PRT_18 7812 Missing input phase detection voltage level Note3) PhInOpenLvl 2–100 V 3.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 284 PRT_19 7813 Missing output PhOutOpenChk 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Table of functions 129 Function Table Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage phase detection PRT_20 7814 Overload warning level OL Level 30–250 % 150 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 285 PRT_21 7815 Overload warning time OL Time 0–30 sec 10 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 285 PRT_22 7816 Overload fault trip options OLT Select 0 (No) / 1 (Yes) 1 (Yes) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 287 PRT_23 7817 Overload fault trip level Note4) OLT Level 30–250 % 180 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 287 PRT_24 7818 Overload fault trip time Note4) OLT Time 0–60 sec 30 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 287 PRT_25 7819 Inverter overheat detection temperat ureNote5) IH Warn Temp 50 – 110 deg 95 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 287 PRT_26 781A Inverter overheat detection band IH Warn Band 0–10 deg 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 287 PRT_27 781B Motor overheat detection temperat ure MH Warn Temp 75–130 deg 120 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 287 PRT_28 781C Motor overheat detection temperat MH Warn Band 0–10 deg 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 287 Table of functions 130 Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage ure band PRT_29 781D Low Voltage 2 options LV2 Enable 0 (No) / 1 (Yes) 0 (No) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 288 PRT_30 781E A3 start time Note5) A3 StartTime 0–6000 ms 1500 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 288 PRT_31 781F A3 stop time Note5) A3 StopTime 0–6000 ms 1500 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 288 PRT_32 7820 Cooling fan control Fan Control 0 (During Run) 1 (Always On) 2 (Temp Control) 0 (During Run) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 289 PRT_33 7821 Cooling fan fault trip options Fan Trip Mode 0 (Trip) 1 (Warning) 1 (Warning) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 289 PRT_34 7822 Safety options Safety Type 0 ( Latch) 1 ( Level) 0 ( Latch) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 290 Note 1) Displayed when PRT_02 is set to “Yes”. Note 2) Displayed when FUN_03 is set to “Free-Run”. Note 3) Displayed when PRT-17 is set to “Yes”. Note 4) Displayed when PRT-22 is set to “Yes”. Note 5) Displayed when a multifunction input terminal is set to “A3 Safety”. Table of functions 131 Function Table 5.9 Communication (COM) group Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage COM_00 - Jump to codes Jump Code 1–9 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - COM_01 7901 CAN station ID CAN St ID 0x0800 – 0x0f00 0x0800 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ COM_02 7902 CAN comm. Speed CAN Baud 0 (125 kbps) 1 (250 kbps) 2 (500 kbps) 3 (1 Mbps) bps 2 (500 kbps) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ COM_03 7903 CAN comm. Mode CAN Mode 0 (CAN2.0B) 0 (CAN2. 0B) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ COM_04 7904 RS232 station ID RS232 St ID 1 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ COM_05 7905 RS232 comm. Speed RS232 Baud 0 (9600 bps) 0 (9600 bps) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ COM_06 7906 RS232 comm. Mode RS232 Mode 0 (8None/1St op) 0 (8None/ 1Stop) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ COM_07 7907 Delay time for comm. Response COM Delay 2 – 1000 ms 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ COM_08 7908 Operation mode for lost command COM LostC 0 (None) 1 (FreeRun) 2 (Decel) 0 (None) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ COM_09 7909 Lost command decision time COM LostT 1.0 - 30.0 sec 1.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Table of functions 132 5.10 User (USR) group Code Comm addr. Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting IM VF Slip PM ELIM ELPMPage USR_00 - Jump to codes Jump Code 1–67Note 1) 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 297 USR_01 - Reset parameter settings to application specific default values Macro Init 0 (User Define) 1 (E/L) 0 (User Define) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 297 USR_02 - Save user data User Save 0 (No) 1 ( Yes) 0 (No) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 297 USR_03 - Load user data User Recall 0 (No) 1 ( Yes) 0 (No) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 297 USR_04 - User group data User Grp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 299 Note1) Only previously defined codes between USR_04–USR_67 can use the Jump Code feature. Detailed operation by function groups 133 Operation Details 6 Detailed operation by function groups 6.1 Display (DIS) group 6.1.1 DIS_00 (Motor operation monitoring) Motor operation monitoring is the default code displayed when the inverter is turned on. On the keypad, the motor speed, motor control mode, motor torque, and the output current from the inverter are displayed. 6.1.1.1 Display information for Speed(IM)and Speed(PM)mode operations Code Name Unit Description DIS_00 Motor speed rpm Actual motor speed Motor control mode IM/PM Speed control mode (for induction/sync. motors) BX Emergency stop state BAT Operation on battery Motor torque % Motor torque as a percentage of the rated output Inverter output current A Actual output current from the inverter Detailed operation by function groups 134 6.1.1.2 Display information for V/F and Slip Comp mode operation Code Name Description DIS_00 Command source Operation command T Operation command by terminal input K Operation command by keypad O Operation command by CAN or RS232 communication Frequency command A Frequency command by analog input K Frequency command by keypad O Frequency command by CAN or RS232 communication Current Actual output current from the inverter State STP Inverter stopped FWD Inverter operating in forward direction REV Inverter is operating in reverse direction Frequency Output frequency (when the inverter is operating) / frequency reference (when the inverter is stopped) Detailed operation by function groups 135 6.1.2 User defined information (DIS_01, 02, 03) Operation Details You can configure codes DIS_01, 02, and 03 to choose to display on the keypad one of the following information listed in the following table. By default, DIS_01 is set to “Out Volt rms,” DIS_02 to “Flux Cur Red,” and DIS_03 to “DC Bus Volt.” Code Keypad display Name Unit Description DIS_01 - DIS_03 Ai1 Value – Ai2 Value Multi-function analog % Multifunction analog input value is displayed in a percentage (10 V/100%, 20 mA /100%) PreRamp Ref Speed reference before acceleration or deceleration Hz/rpm Displays motor rpm reference before an acceleration/deceleration routine. PostRamp Ref Speed reference after acceleration or deceleration Hz/rpm Displays motor rpm reference after an acceleration/deceleration routine. ASR Inp Ref Speed controller input reference Hz/rpm Displays the actual reference that is given to the speed controller. Output Freq Output frequency Hz/rpm Displays the inverter output frequency. Motor Speed Motor Rotation speed rpm Displays the actual motor rotation speed. Speed Dev Speed deviation rpm Displays the difference between the speed reference and the actual motor rotation. ASR Out Speed controller output % Displays the speed controller output in a percentage to the rated torque. Torque Bias Torque bias % Displays the torque bias in a percentage to the rated torque. PosTrq Limit Forward torque limit % Displays the forward torque limit in a percentage to the rated torque. Detailed operation by function groups 136 Code Keypad display Name Unit Description NegTrq Limit Reverse torque limit - % Displays the reverse torque limit in a percentage to the rated torque. RegTrq Limit Torque limit at regeneration % Displays the torque limit at regeneration in a percentage to the rated torque. IqeRef Torque current (Q-axis current) Reference A Displays the torque current reference in a percentage to the rated torque. Iqe Torque current (Q-axis current) A Displays the actual torque current in a percentage to the rated torque. Flux Cur Ref Flux reference % Displays the flux current reference in a percentage to the rated flux. Set an appropriate flux current at Par_52. Flux level changes according to the flux control result at high speed operation and is reflected to the flux current reference accordingly. IdeRef Direct axis (Daxis) current reference A Displays the direct axis (D-axis) current reference for the rated direct axis current. Ide Direct axis (Daxis) current A Displays the actual direct axis (D-axis) current for the rated direct axis current. ACR_Q Out Q-axis current controller output V Displays the Q-axis current controller output. ACR_D Out D-axis current controller output V Displays the D-axis current controller output. VdeRef D-axis voltage reference V Displays the D-axis voltage reference. VqeRef Q-axis voltage reference V Displays the Q-axis voltage reference. Detailed operation by function groups 137 Operation Details Code Keypad display Name Unit Description Out Amps RMS Output current A Displays the effective inverter output current (root-mean-square). Out Volt RMS Output voltage V Displays the effective inverter output voltage (root-mean-square). Power Output power kW Displays the motor output power. DC Bus Volt DC link voltage V Displays the inverter DC link voltage. Inv Temp Inverter temperature deg Displays the inverter heat sink temperature. Control Mode Control mode Displays the control mode in use (Speed(IM), V/F, Slip Comp, Speed(PM)). Run Time Operation time Displays the duration of inverter’s operation since the power-on. Terminal In Input terminal status bit Displays the ON (1)/OFF (0) status of the input terminal. Input terminal FX RX BX RST P1 0 (OFF) 1 ( ON) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Terminal Out Output terminal status bit Displays the ON (1)/OFF (0) status of the relay terminal output and fault relay. Output terminal AX1 Ax2 AX3 Ax4 30A (30B) 0 (OFF) 1 ( ON) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Detailed operation by function groups 138 Code Keypad display Name Unit Description Terminal Opt Command via network communication status bit Displays the network command communication status. Input terminal Stop FX RX RST BX 0 (OFF) 1 ( ON) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Run Status Operation status Displays the inverter operation status. PhInOpenLvl Input phase open detection level A Displays the input phase open detection level value for the input phase open detection function that can be turned on at PRT_18 PhInOpenLvl. Iu Offset U phase output current offset A Displays hardware offset for U phase current feedback while the power is supplied. Iv Offset V phase output current offset A Displays hardware offset for V phase current feedback while the power is supplied. Iw Offset W phase output current offset A Displays hardware offset for W phase current feedback while the power is supplied. IuP IuM Synchronous motor phase current average A This parameter is used for initial pole position estimation. It is displayed only when Speed(PM)mode is in use, to show the motor phase current. • IuP: U phase + value • IuM: U phase – value Detailed operation by function groups 139 Operation Details Code Keypad display Name Unit Description IvP IvM Synchronous motor phase current average A This parameter is used for initial pole position estimation. It is displayed only when Speed(PM)mode is in use, to show the motor phase current. • IvP: V phase + value • IvM: V phase – value IwP IwM Synchronous motor phase current average A This parameter is used for initial pole position estimation. It is displayed only when Speed(PM)mode is in use, to show the motor phase current. • IwP: W phase + value • IwM: W phase – value Sc/EnDat Pos SinCos/Endat encoder position Pulse Displays SinCos/Endat encoder position when Speed(PM)mode is in use. Theta Offset Thetha offset Deg Displays theta offset position when Speed(PM)mode is in use. Detailed operation by function groups 140 6.1.3 Display add-on module (option board, DIS_04) This code displays the type of add-on module that is installed to the inverter. Code Keypad display Name Description DIS_04 Opt. Board Display add-on module (option board) information None No add-on board A/B Pulse Incremental encoder add-on module EnDat EnDat Encoder add-on module Sin/Cos SIN/COS Encoder add-on module 6.1.4 Fault status display (DIS_05) This code may be configured to display the current fault status, trip history (2 most recent faults) and the number of previous faults (it may also be used to clear the number of faults). At DIS_05, press [SHIFT/ESC] to change the setting values. Code Keypad display Name Description DIS_05 Faults Current fault condition Displays the inverter trip information. When the inverter is operating without fault, “―――――” is displayed. Last Fault1 Previous fault condition1 For more information, refer to 8.1 Fault trips on page 334. Last Fault2 Previous fault condition2 (the fault before Last Fault1) Fault Count Total number of faults Displays the total number of fault since the last initialization. Fault Clear Initialize fault count Initializes the total fault count to “0.” Press [PROG] and [▲] / [▼] before pressing [RESET] to see the following conditions at the time of the fault: Speed reference, speed feedback, output frequency, output current and voltage, Q-axis current reference and the actual value, DC-link voltage, input terminal status, output terminal status, operation Detailed operation by function groups 141 status, and duration. Operation Details Press [ENT] to return to the main screen. The current fault is saved as “Last Fault1” when you press [RESET]. For more information, refer to 8 Troubleshooting on page 334. Fault status display types No Fault trips Keypad display No Fault trips Keypad display 1 Short circuit at the IGBT Arm Short 15 Inverter overload Inv. OLT 2 Ground fault protection Ground Fault 16 Input phase open Input PO 3 Overcurrent trip Over Current 17 Inverter thermal sensor fault InvThem OP 4 Overvoltage trip Over Voltage 18 Motor Overspeed Over Speed 5 FAN error FAN Error 19 Floor data-related fault Flr/FHM Data 6 Battery operation fault BatRun Fault 20 Slow down switch fault SDS Error 7 Encoder fault Encoder Err 21 A3 safety fault A3 Safety 8 Low voltage trip Low Voltage 22 LV2 (Low voltage 2) fault Low Voltage 2 9 Inverter overheat InvOver Heat 23 Safety fault SAFETY A/B 10 E-thermal protection trip E-Thermal 24 Speed deviation fault Spd Dev Err 11 Overload trip Over Load 25 ADC fault ADC Error 12 H/W fault trip HW-Diag 26 EnDat add-on module data clock configuration fault ENDAT Error 13 External trip- External-B 27 PM pole detection Mag Det Error Detailed operation by function groups 142 No Fault trips Keypad display No Fault trips Keypad display terminal B fault 14 Output phase open Output PO 28 Data save fault EEP Error Note If multiple fault trips occur at the same time, fault trips with higher priority are displayed first (fault trips with smaller numbers have higher priority). Check the fault trip history to view the rest of the fault trips. 6.1.5 Software version display (DIS_06) This code is used to display the current version and date of the inverter software. 6.1.6 User group display options (DIS_10) You may select frequently accessed codes to create a user group. When configuring the user group display, there are three options available depending on the parameter setting at DIS_10: Do not display User group / Show Display group and User Group only / Show all code groups including User group. Code Keypad display Name Description DIS_10 Usr Grp Disp User group display options Not Used Do not display User group. Dis+Usr Grp Show Display group and User Group only. When this option is selected, you can access other codes by manually switching to the codes in the User group, or by changing the parameter setting to allow display of other code groups. Display ALL Show all code groups including User group. Detailed operation by function groups 143 6.2 Parameter (PAR) group Operation Details 6.2.1 Jump code (PAR_00) PAR_00 code is used to directly access a certain code. The following is an example of jumping directly to PAR_56 from PAR_00 code. Press [PROG]. Use [SHIFT/ESC], [▲], or [▼] to change the code number to “56”. Press [ENT] to access PAR_56 code. If an invalid code number is entered, the next available code number is automatically selected. Note After jumping directly to a code, you can move to other codes by pressing [▲] or [▼]. Detailed operation by function groups 144 6.2.2 Parameter-related settings 6.2.2.1 Parameter initialization (PAR_01) Parameter initialization resets all inverter parameter settings to the default settings. Parameter initialization is available for selected groups or for all the groups. After an initialization, make sure to configure the parameters to values that are appropriate for the operating condition of the site. Also, the motor capacity must be re-configured at PAR_09 (Motor Select). Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_01 Para. init Initialize to default setting 0 (No) 1 (All Groups) 2 (DIS) 3 (PAR) 4 (DIO) 5 (AIO) 6 (FUN) 7 (CON) 8 (E/L) 9 (PRT) 10 (COM) 13 (USR) 0 (No) Note Configure the parameter settings again after performing a parameter initialization. All parameter settings revert to the factory default after an initialization. Detailed operation by function groups 145 6.2.2.2 Duplicating parameter settings (PAR_02, 03) Operation Details Using the keypad, you can copy (read) the parameter settings of a certain inverter and paste (write) them into multiple inverters. On the inverter that has the parameter settings to duplicate (A), set PAR_02 (Read all codes) to “Yes”. • All the parameter settings are copied into the keypad for duplication. Remove the keypad from the inverter and install it on another inverter to which the parameter settings will be written to (B), and then set PAR_03 (Write all codes) to “Yes”. • All the parameter settings stored in the keypad are copied into the other inverter. Note To duplicate the parameter settings between the inverters, the source and target inverters must have the same software version. Otherwise, a software version error message (“VER. Err”) will be displayed, and the process will not be completed. Detailed operation by function groups 146 Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_02 Para. Read Read all codes 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) PAR_03 Para. Write Write all codes 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) Note After parameter setting duplication, re-configure each code in DIS and USR groups. All the parameter settings for the codes in DIS and USR groups will revert to the default settings after duplication. Parameter duplication affects the motor parameters. After parameter duplication, ensure that the motor-related parameters are set correctly. 6.2.2.3 Prohibiting modification of codes (PAR_04) Set PAR_04 to “12” to lock all codes to prohibit modification. To unlock the codes and allow modification, set PAR_04 to “12” once again. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_04 Para. lock Lock all codes 0–255 0 6.2.2.4 Setting the password (PAR_05) Set and use a password to prevent unauthorized access to codes. Set PAR_05 to any 4-digit number other than “0000” and restart the inverter to allow the change to take effect. When a password is set, only the codes in Display group are displayed on the keypad. In display group, you can press the [Mode] key to jump directly to PAR_05. Detailed operation by function groups 147 • To gain access to other groups, press [Mode] to display password input Operation Details screen (PAR_05). Once a correct password is entered, all the other codes become accessible again. • Set PAR_05 to “0” to disable the password option. The master password for the inverter is “5052”. Use the master password to disable the password option and gain access to the codes in case you cannot remember the password. Upon entering the master code, PAR_05 is set to “0” and automatically disables the password option. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_05 Password Password 0–255 0 6.2.3 Motor-related settings 6.2.3.1 Control mode options (PAR_07) The L100 inverter provides speed control modes such as “Speed(IM)” and “Speed (PM)” beside the open-loop control modes such as “V/F” and “Slip Comp.” To operate the inverter in speed control mode (Speed(IM) or Speed(PM)), a speed feedback device (encoder) must be installed. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_07 Control Mode Control mode options 2 (Speed(IM)) 4 (V/F) 4 (V/F) 5 (Slip Comp) 6 (Speed(PM)) Detailed operation by function groups 148 6.2.3.2 Application mode options (PAR_08) Set the inverter application mode to suit your needs. The L100 inverters may be configured for general vector (General Use) mode, as well as for elevator application (Elevator) mode. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_08 Application Application mode options General Use Elevator Note1) General Use Note 1) Displayed when ELIO add-on module (elevator I/O board) has been installed. 6.2.3.3 Motor capacity settings (PAR_09) / Motor capacity user define (PAR_10) Select correct motor capacity before operating the inverter. The default motor capacity value is set at the factory as one that is equivalent to the inverter capacity. Once a motor capacity is selected, appropriate motor parameter values for the motor is automatically configured (based on the Higen vector motor specifications). To use capacity settings for a motor other than those provided by the inverter, set PAR_09 to “User Define,” and set PAR_10 to define your own. After user-defining the motor capacity, set PAR_52–PAR_59 codes to the values provided on your motor’s rating plate and run auto-tuning. You must use the parameter values obtained from the auto-tuning when setting the user defined motor capacity. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_09 Motor select Motor capacity settings 2.2–22.0 User Define kW A capacity equivalent to the inverter capacity Detailed operation by function groups 149 Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting Operation Details PAR_10 UserMotorSel User-defined motor capacity 2.2–22.0 kW 7.5 6.2.3.4 Setting the maximum motor speed (PAR_11) Set PAR_11 to define the maximum motor speed. The maximum motor speed is the maximum output for the maximum speed reference. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_11 Max. Speed Maximum motor speed V/F, Slip : 30.00-120.00 IM : 10.0-3600.0 PM : 10.0-680.0 Hz rpm rpm V/F, Slip : 60.00 IM : 1800.0 PM : 100.0 6.2.3.5 Setting the minimum motor speed (PAR_12) This code is displayed when PAR_07 is set to “V/F” or “Slip Comp” mode. Once the minimum motor speed is set, the inverter only operates when it receives a speed reference that is equal to, or greater than this minimum motor speed. If a speed reference smaller than the minimum motor speed is received during operation, the inverter recognizes it as a stop command, and performs a decelerating stop. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_12 Min. Speed Minimum motor speed 0.5–10.00 Hz 0.5 Detailed operation by function groups 150 6.2.3.6 Setting the motor base frequency (PAR_13) A base frequency is the inverter’s output frequency (in Hz) at its rated voltage. Refer to the motor’s rating plate to set this parameter value. This parameter is required for V/F and slip compensation control mode operations. 6.2.3.7 Setting the motor synchronization speed (PAR_14) This parameter is required for speed control mode (Speed(IM) or Speed(PM)) operations. A synchronization speed is the motor speed (in rpm) at the inverter’s rated voltage. For a 4-poled 60 Hz induction motor, the synchronization speed is 1800 rpm (= 120 x 60 [frequency] / 4 [pole number]). For a PM motor, refer to the motor’s rating plate to set this parameter value (in rpm). 6.2.3.8 Setting the rated motor voltage (PAR_15) Refer to the motor’s rating plate to set this parameter value. 6.2.3.9 Setting the motor pole number (PAR_16) Refer to the motor’s rating plate to set this parameter value. The pole number affects the motor speed (rpm). 6.2.3.10Setting the motor efficiency (PAR_17) Refer to the motor’s rating plate to set this parameter value. Use the default setting if the value is not specified on the motor’s rating plate. 6.2.3.11Setting the motor rated slip (PAR_18) For an induction motor, refer to the motor’s rating plate to set this parameter value. The rated slip value provides information on the deviation between the Detailed operation by function groups 151 motor speed set at PAR_14 and the actual operating speed. Operation Details For example, if a 4-poled motor operates at 1750 rpm with 60 Hz inverter output, the rated slip is 50 (1800 [= 120 x 60 / 4] - 1750). 6.2.3.12Setting the motor rated current (PAR_19) Refer to the motor’s rating plate to set this parameter value. 6.2.3.13Setting the input voltage (PAR_20) Use this code to set the inverter input voltage. The value set at PAR_20 is used to decide wether to enable or diable low voltage protection. During inverter operation, the width of ripple grows as the inverter output increases while a phase is missing. A low voltage trip may occur if the input voltage is low when the ripple reaches its lower end. To prevent such a problem, you can set this code to the inverter’s input voltage and activate a phase missing protection instead of a low voltage trip. 6.2.3.14Setting the switching frequency (PAR_21) Set PAR_21 to a value between 3–8.0 (kHz) to define the inverter’s switching frequency. Adjust the switching frequency to reduce the operation noise, or to avoid overheating problems. A lower switching frequency increases the operation noise but lowers the inverter temperature and decreases the inverter noise and leakage current. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_21 PWM Freq Switching frequency setting 3 – 8 kHz 8.0 Detailed operation by function groups 152 6.2.3.15Setting the motor cooling options (PAR_22) Set PAR_22 to select the cooling options for a motor. Motor cooling options are used to determine the motor overload (PRT_01, ETH). Set it to “Self-cool” for a self-cooling motor, and “Forced-cool” for a forced cooling motor. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_22 Cooling Mtd Motor cooling options 0 (Self-cool) 1 (Forced-cool) 1 (Forced-cool) 6.2.3.16Setting the encoder-related parameters: Input pulse number and direction ( PAR_24–25) / Error detection and LPF (PR_09–10) Set PAR_24 (Encoder pulse number) to define the number of input pulse for the encoder that is installed at the motor. PAR_25 (Encoder directions) enables you to choose to advance phase A or phase B while the motor is rotating in the forward direction. It provides an easy solution to rearrange the phase order (encoder phases A/B, or motor phases U/V/W) without physically re-doing the cable wiring when the phase connections are not made correctly. Code Name Settings Description Encoder pulse (FX operation) PAR_25 Encoder directions A Phase Lead • Phase A is advanced during FX operation. • Phase B is advanced during RX operation. B Phase Lead • Phase B is advanced during FX operation. • Phase A is advanced during RX operation. Detailed operation by function groups 153 Operation Details Note • If PRT_09 (Encoder error detection) is set to “Yes,” encoder fault trips occur when open circuits or wiring errors are detected. The detection function does not work with open collector encoders. Set PRT_09 to “No,” if an open collector type encoder is installed. • Adjust PRT_10 (Encoder LPF time) to reduce the interference if the encoder receives noisy pulse input. • Incorrect encoder-related parameter setting may lead to abnormal speed control and frequent overcurrent and overvoltage fault trips. For detailed information, refer to 8 Troubleshooting on page 334. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default PAR_24 Enc Pulse Encoder pulse number 360–32767 1024 PAR_25 Enc Dir Set Encoder direction 0 (A Phase Lead) 1 (B Phase Lead) B Phase Lead PRT_09 Enc Err Chk Encoder error detection 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 1 (Yes) PRT_10 Enc LPF Encoder LPF time 0–100 ms 1 Detailed operation by function groups 154 6.2.3.17Setting the encoder types (PAR_23), encoder scale (PAR_27), and encoder tuning options (PAR_28) Set PAR_23 to define the encoder types in Speed(PM) control mode. PAR_28 is displayed only when the encoder type is set to “EnDat” or “Sin/Cos”. PAR_27 is displayed only when Speed(IM) control mode is in use. For details, refer to the instruction manuals that are provided with the Sin/Cos and EnDat encoder add-on modules. Keypad display Description This setting is used for A/B pulse encoders in Speed(PM)control mode. This setting is used for HEIDENHAIN ECN413 and ECN1313 encoders. Use this option if an EnDat add-on module has been installed (Check the installed add-on module at DIS_04). This setting is used for HEIDENHAIN ECN413, ECN1313, ERN487, and ERN1387 encoders. Use this option if a SIN/COS add-on module (without Sin2/Cos2 signal) or EnDat add-on module (without Data/Clock signal) has been installed (Check the installed add-on module at DIS_04). This setting is used for HEIDENHAIN ERN487 and ERN1387 encoders. Use this option if a SIN/COS add-on module has been installed (Check the installed add-on module at DIS_04). Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Settings PAR_23 Enc Type Encoder type 0 (A/B Pulse) 1 (EnDat) 2 (Sin/Cos_All) 3 (Sin/Cos_1387) 0 (A/B Pulse) PAR_27 Enc Scale Encoder scale 0 (x1) 0 (x1) PAR_28 Sce Tuning Encoder tuning options 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) Detailed operation by function groups 155 6.2.4 Auto-tuning Operation Details Auto-tuning is used to estimate an induction motor’s stator resistance (Rs), stator inductance (Ls), leakage factor (Lsigma), flux current (Flux-Curr), and rotor time constant (Tr). For a synchronous motor, auto-tuning is used to estimate the stator resistance (Rs), d/q-axis inductance (Ld, Lq), and the pole position. There are two types of auto-tuning procedures. Rotating tuning requires motor operation, while static tuning does not. For an induction motor, both types may be used if it is set for speed control mode, and in other control modes, only static auto-tuning can be used. For synchronous motors, static auto-tuning must be used regardless of the control modes. 6.2.4.1 Setting the motor/encoder parameter for auto-tuning Motor parameters required for vector control can only be obtained when correct motor information is provided. Such information includes the motor’s capacity, sync speed, rated voltage, pole number, efficiency, rated slip, rated current, and the encoder pulse number. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_09 Motor Select Motor capacity 2.2–22.0 kW 7.5 PAR_10 UserMotorSel User-define motor capacity 2.2–22.0 kW 7.5 PAR_14 Sync Speed Motor synchronization speed 100.0–3600.0 rpm 1800.0 PAR_15 Rated Volt Motor rated voltage 120–560 V 380 PAR_16 Pole Number Motor pole number 2–12 4 PAR_17 Efficiency Motor efficiency 0.0–100.0 % 87.5 PAR_18 Rated-Slip Motor rated slip 10.0–250.0/ 1.0–25.0 rpm/ Hz Varies by motor capacity PAR_19 Rated-Curr Motor rated Current 1.0–1000.0 A PAR_24 Enc Pulse Encoder pulse number 360–32768 1024 Detailed operation by function groups 156 Use PAR_09 to select a motor capacity. To use a motor whose capacity is not given for selection, set it to “User Define,” which brings up PAR_10 (User-define motor capacity) options, where the motor capacity can be manually entered. PAR_14 (Motor sync Speed) is used to set the motor speed at which the inverter outputs its rated voltage. The rated speed must be set within the range of the motor’s maximum speed. • Set the motor sync speed and rated voltage as they read on the motor’s rating plate. When operating a 4-pole standard motor, the sync speed is 60 Hz (1,800 rpm). rpm = 120 x Base_Frequency , 1,800 rpm = 120 x 60 Hz Pole_number 4 • Motor rated slip (PAR_18) is the difference between the motor sync speed and motor rated speed (PAR_14) (motor rated speed = sync speed [PAR_14] – rated slip [PAR-18]). • By default, PAR_15 (Motor rated voltage) is set as 380 (V) at the factory. Refer to the motor’s rating plate for the rated input voltage. The rated voltage must be set correctly. The setting value is provided to the voltage controller to prevent voltage saturation. Also, it affects the measurement of flux current during an auto-tuning. • Set PAR_17 (Motor efficiency) only if the motor efficiency information is given on the rating plate (do not modify it if it is not specified on the rating plate). • For PAR_18 (Motor rated slip), subtract “motor rated speed” from ”motor sync speed” on the rating plate, and enter the resulting value. - For example, if the motor sync speed is 1,800 (rpm) and the rated speed is 1,740 (rpm), the rated slip is 60 (rpm). Detailed operation by function groups 157 6.2.4.2 Running a rotating auto-tuning for induction motors Operation Details Preparation Before running a rotating auto-tuning, disconnect and remove the machinery that is connected to the motor axis, and leave the motor unloaded. Unintended operation of the machinery during tuning may lead to personal injury and/or mechanical damage. A braking resistor must be connected to the inverter when running an auto-tuning. Abrupt accelerations and decelerations are required to find an optimal rotor time constant. Setting the parameters for auto-tuning Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Setting PAR_31 AutoTuneType Auto-tuning options 0 (Rotational) 1 (StandStill) - 0 (Rotational) PAR_32 Kp for If If tuning error protection p gain 0.001–1.000 - 0.020 PAR_33 Ki for If If tuning error protection I gain 0.001–1.000 - 0.040 PAR_34 Inertia Tune Motor inertia tuning options 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) PAR_35 J Spd Time Inertia tuning acc/ dec time 0.500–10.000 sec 0.500 PAR_36 Inertia LPF Inertia low pass filter 0.010–50.000 ms 0.100 PAR_41 IM AutoTune Induction motor autotuning option 0 (None) 1 (ALL1) 2 (ALL2) 3 (Encoder Test) 4 (Rs Tuning) 5 (Lsigma) 6 (Flux Curr) - 0 (None) Detailed operation by function groups 158 Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Setting 7 (Ls Tuning) 8 (Tr Tuning) 9 (InertiaTuning) • The L100 inverter provides 9 different types of rotating auto-tuning. • “ALL2” type auto-tuning detects stator resistance (Rs), leakage factor (Lsigma), flux current, rotor time constant (Tr), stator inductance (Ls) and inertia values. • If you perform the “ALL1” type auto-tuning, “ALL2” tuning is performed after the encoder test. Note • “Inertia Tuning” options are available only when PAR_34 is set to “Yes”. • Rotor time constant (Tr) can be correctly estimated only after stator resistance (Rs), leakage factor (Lsigma), and stator inductance (Ls) values are obtained through an auto-tuning. • Adjust PAR_32 (If tuning Error protection P gain) and PAR_33 (If tuning error protection I gain) parameter values if errors occur during an excitation current tuning. Increase the PAR_35 (Inertia tuning acc/dec time) parameter value if a high inertial load is connected to the motor. Increase the PAR_36 (Inertia LPF) parameter value if a large amount of fluctuation is observed with high inertia loads. • The FWD and REV operation indicators on the keypad flash simultaneously during an auto-tuning. • Auto-tuning is based on a motor sync speed of 1,800 rpm. Auto-tuning types Description None Do not perform auto-tuning. ALL1 Perform auto-tuning in the order of Rs, Lsigma, flux current, Ls, and Tr tuning after completing an encoder test. ALL2 Perform auto-tuning in the order of Rs, Lsigma, flux current, Ls, and Tr tuning without an encoder test. Detailed operation by function groups 159 Operation Details Encoder Test Tests the encoder wiring connections by rotating the motor at 1,500 rpm in the forward direction. Rs Tuning Determines motor stator resistance without rotating the motor. Lsigma Determines motor leakage factor (Lsigma) without rotating the motor. Flux Curr Determines flux current by rotating the motor at 1,500 rpm. Ls Tuning Determines stator inductance by rotating the motor at 1,500 rpm. Tr Tuning Determines rotor time constant after accelerating and decelerating the motor multiple times. Elapsed time may vary each time it is performed. Rotor time constant tuning must be performed after stator resistance (Rs), leakage factor (Lsigma), stator inductance (Ls) values are obtained. Inertia Tuning Determines the inertia value by rotating the motor at 1/3 of its sync speed (600 rpm), to forward and reverse directions. Keypad operation for a rotating auto-tuning Keypad display Description Tuning time At PAR_31, set the auto-tuning option to “Rotational”. - At PAR_41, set auto-tuning mode to “ALL1”. • Auto-tuning begins immediately, and a test is performed to check the encoder wiring connections by rotating the motor at 1,500 rpm in the forward direction. 30–35 sec Determines motor stator resistance without rotating the motor. 10–20 sec Determines motor leakage factor without rotating the motor. 5–20 sec Detailed operation by function groups 160 Keypad display Description Tuning time Determines flux current by rotating the motor at 1,500 rpm. 30–60 sec Determines stator inductance by rotating the motor at 1,500 rpm. 50–60 sec Determines rotor time constant after accelerating and decelerating the motor multiple times. Elapsed time may vary each time it is performed. Abrupt accelerations and decelerations are required to find an optimal rotor time constant. Therefore, a braking resistor must be connected to the inverter when running an auto-tuning. Otherwise, overvoltage trip faults may occur during the tuning process. 20–60 sec After obtaining the values required, PAR_41 is automatically changed to “None” to stop autotuning. Error message will be displayed if correct values cannot be obtained. If this happens, ensure that all the motor and encoder parameters were entered correctly, and then repeat the autotuning procedure. If an error message persists, stop the autotuning procedure and contact LS ELECTRIC technical service: www.lselectric.co.kr Total time elapsed: 3–5 min Detailed operation by function groups 161 6.2.4.3 Running static auto-tuning for induction motors Operation Details Preparation Before running a static auto-tuning, fix the motor axis so that it won’t move during the auto-tuning. Accurate values can be obtained only when the motor axis is in a static condition. Setting the parameters for auto-tuning Code Keypad display Name Range Setting PAR_31 AutoTuneType Auto-tuning options 0 (Rotational) 1 (StandStill) 1 (StandStill) PAR_41 IM AutoTune Induction motor auto-tuning option 0 (None) 1 (ALL1) 4 (Rs Tuning) 5 (Lsigma) 8 (If/Tr/Ls Tune) 0 (None) The L100 inverter provides 4 different types of static auto-tuning. The “ALL1” type auto-tuning detects stator resistance (Rs), leakage factor (Lsigma), If, stator inductance (Ls), rotor time constant (Tr) - it does not perform a test on the encoder or an inertia tuning. Detailed operation by function groups 162 At PAR_41, each option (Rs Tuning, Lsigma, If/Tr/Ls Tune, Inertia Tuning) may be used to identify the individual value of the relevant parameter. Auto-tuning type Description None Do not perform auto-tuning. ALL1 Performs auto-tuning in the order of Rs, Lsigma, and If/Tr/Ls tuning (test on the encoder is not performed). Rs Tuning Determines motor stator resistance without rotating the motor. Lsigma Determines motor leakage factor (Lsigma) without rotating the motor. If/Tr/Ls Tune Determines motor flux current, rotor time constant, and stator inductance at the same time by applying direct current to the motor, without rotating the motor axis. Note The FWD and REV operation indicators on the keypad flash simultaneously during auto-tuning. Detailed operation by function groups 163 Keypad operation for a static auto-tuning Operation Details Keypad display Description Tuning time At PAR_31, set the induction motor auto-tuning option to “StandStill”. - At PAR_41, set auto-tuning mode to “ALL1”. Auto-tuning begins immediately. - Determines motor stator resistance without rotating the motor. 20–30 sec Determines motor leakage factor without rotating the motor. 5–10 sec Determines motor flux current, rotor time constant, and stator inductance at the same time by applying direct current to the motor, without rotating the motor axis. 15–60 sec After obtaining the values required, PAR_41 is automatically changed to “None” to stop autotuning. If correct values cannot be obtained, and error message will be displayed. If this is the case, ensure that all the motor and encoder parameters were entered correctly, and then repeat the auto-tuning procedure. If an error message persists, stop the auto-tuning procedure and contact LS ELECTRIC technical service: www.lselectric.co.kr Total time elapsed: 1–2 min Detailed operation by function groups 164 6.2.4.4 Detecting the initial pole position of a synchronous motor The following table explains the parameter setting for initial pole position detection which is required for operating a synchronous motor. The result can be viewed at DIS_08. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Setting PAR_43 DetAve Num Number of detections for average 1–30 5 PAR_44 MagDet Volt Pole position detection voltage 5–200 V 80 PAR_45 MagDet Curr Pole position detection current 10–150 % 70 Preparation If this is the first pole position detection, and if PAR_23 (Enc Type) is set to “A/B Pulse,” follow the steps listed below. Note If PAR_23 (Enc Type) is set to “EnDat,” “Sin/Cos_All,” or “Sin/Cos_1387,” refer to the instruction manual that is supplied with the Sin/Cos EnDat encoder addon module. Set the speed reference to “0 (rpm)”. Keep the brake in the held position during operation. Check the initial angle detected on the keypad (DIS_08), and then stop the operation. Repeat step 3 for 5 times. Initial pole position detection is successful if the difference of the angles displayed at DIS_08 is less than 5 degrees. If the difference is more than 5 degrees, repeat the steps 1 through 5 after adjusting PAR_44 (Pole detection voltage) and PAR_45 (Pole detection current). Detailed operation by function groups 165 Number of detections for average (PAR_43) Operation Details PAR_43 is used to set the number of detections for calculating the average. It is recommended to use the default setting for PAR_43. Using lower setting values shortens the elapsed time for pole detection, but it may result in lower credibility. Note Some motors require higher setting values than the default setting for accurate pole position detection. Pole position detection voltage (PAR_44) and current (PAR_45) PAR_44 and PAR_45 are used to configure the voltage and current for pole position detection. When detecting the pole position, lower voltage decreases the noise. The current level for PAR_45 is set as a percentage of the motor’s rated current (PAR_19). 6.2.4.5 Running static auto-tuning for synchronous motors Preparation Before running a static auto-tuning, fix the motor axis so that it won’t move during auto-tuning. Accurate values can be obtained only when the motor axis is in a static condition. Setting the parameters for auto-tuning Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Setting PAR_31 AutoTuneType Auto-tuning options 0 (Rotational) 1 (StandStill) - 1 (StandStill) PAR_43 DetAve Num Number of detections for average 1–30 5 PAR_44 MagDet Volt Pole position detection voltage 5–200 V 80 PAR_45 MagDet Curr Pole position detection current 10–150 % 70 Detailed operation by function groups 166 Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Setting PAR_51 PM AutoTune Auto-tuning options for synchronous motors 0 (None) 1 (All) 2 (RsTuning) 3 (Ld/Lq Tuning) 4 (Mag Pole Det) 0 (Non e) Static auto-tuning is used for synchronous motors to obtain the motor’s stator resistance (Rs), d/q-axis inductance (Ld, Lq), and the initial pole position. Auto-tuning type Description None Do not perform auto-tuning. ALL Determines motor stator resistance and d/q-axis inductance (Ld, Lq) without rotating the motor. Rs Tuning Determines motor stator resistance without rotating the motor. Ld/Lq Tuning Determines motor d/q-axis inductance (Ld, Lq) without rotating the motor. Mag Pole Det Estimates initial pole position of the synchronous motor. Note The FWD and REV operation indicators on the keypad flash simultaneously during auto-tuning. Keypad operation for a static auto-tuning for a synchronous motor Keypad display Description Tuning time When auto-tuning synchronous motors, only “Standstill” option is available. - Detailed operation by function groups 167 Keypad display Description Tuning time Operation Details Determines motor stator resistance and d/qaxis inductance (Ld, Lq) without rotating the motor. Approximately 90 sec Determines motor stator resistance without rotating the motor. Approximately 30 sec Determines motor d/q-axis inductance (Ld, Lq) without rotating the motor. Approximately 60 sec Estimates initial pole position of the synchronous motor by applying DC current, without rotating the motor. Approximately 5 sec After obtaining the values required, PAR_51 automatically changes to “None” to stop autotuning. Error message will be displayed if correct values cannot be obtained. If this happens, ensure that all the motor and encoder parameters were entered correctly, and then repeat the auto- tuning procedure. If an error message persists, stop the autotuning procedure and contact LS ELECTRIC technical service: www.lselectric.co.kr Total time elapsed: 1–2 min Make sure to perform an auto-tuning before operating a synchronous motor with an inverter. Parameter values related to a synchronous motor and its initial pole position may affect the inverter’s control ability. Detailed operation by function groups 168 6.2.4.6 Motor constant Auto-tuning ensures that correct motor parameters are used for operation. The following table lists motor parameters required for proper operation. For induction motors, the default parameter values are set based on Higen vector motors. For synchronous motors, there are no preset default values. If a synchronous motor is connected to the inverter, use the values provided by the manufacturer, or use the parameter values obtained from an auto-tuning. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_52 Flux-Curr Motor flux current 0.0–70% of motor rated current A Varies by motor capacity (Induction motor) PAR_53 Tr Rotor time constant 30–3000 ms PAR_54 Ls Motor inductance 0.00–500.00 mH PAR_55 Lsigma Motor leakage factor (Lsigma) 0.00–300.00 mH PAR_56 Rs Motor stator resistance 0.000–15.000 ohm Varies by motor capacity (Induction/synch ronous motor) PAR_57 Inertia J Motor inertia factor 0.001–60.000 kg·m2 Varies by motor capacity (Induction motor) PAR_58 Ld Motor d-axis inductance 0.01–500.00 mH Varies by motor capacity (Synchronous motor) PAR_59 Lq Motor q-axis inductance 0.01–500.00 mH PAR_60 Init Theta Initial pole position 0–360 deg Detailed operation by function groups 169 Note Operation Details • Press [STOP] anytime during auto-tuning to interrupt the process. • If the encoder test fails during rotating auto-tuning of an induction motor, stator resistance (Rs) tuning is not performed and an error (“Encoder Err”) is displayed. If this happens, press [Reset] and run the encoder test again. Check the encoder for wiring errors and other faults if the encoder error persists. • Rotor time constant (Tr) tuning may fail multiple times before it is performed successfully. Repeat the tuning process 2, 3 times if failure occurs. 6.2.4.7 Auto-tuning error messages Keypad display Description and solution Occurs when the difference between the speed reference and the encoder feedback speed exceeds motor’s rated slip, or when the encoder phase A or B is open. Check the encoder power terminals (PE and GE) for proper connection to the A and B phases. Occurs when the encoder’s phases A and phase B, or the motor’s phases U, V, W are connected in a wrong order. Check the wiring for correct wiring orders, or change the encoder direction to “B Phase Lead” at PAR_25. Occurs when the detected motor stator resistance is out of the normal range of 0.002 –10Ω. Check the wiring between the inverter and the motor, or check if the motor has not been burnt. This error may occur when the motor capacity is too small for the inverter. Occurs when the detected motor leakage factor exceeds 100 mH. Check the wiring between the inverter and the motor, or check if the motor has not been burnt. Occurs when the motor speed exceeds 1,650 rpm (on an 1,800 rpm motor) during flux current tuning, or when the inverter fails to detect the flux current for a long time. Check the motor pole number and the wiring condition between the inverter and the motor. Detailed operation by function groups 170 Keypad display Description and solution Occurs when the motor speed exceeds 1,650 rpm (on an 1,800 rpm motor) during stator inductance tuning, or when the inverter fails to detect the stator inductance for a long time. Check the motor pole number and the wiring condition between the inverter and the motor. Occurs if the motor time constant is set too long at PAR_52 during a rotor time constant tuning. Decrease the value at PAR_53 by 30% and try again. Occurs if the motor time constant is set too short at PAR_53 during a rotor time constant tuning. Increase the value at PAR_53 by 30% and try again. Occurs when the detected synchronous motor stator resistance is out of the normal range of 0.002 –10Ω. Check the wiring between the inverter and the motor, or check if the motor has not been burnt. This error may occur when the motor capacity is too small for the inverter. This error may occur when the motor capacity is too small for the inverter. Detailed operation by function groups 171 6.3 Digital input and output (DIO) group Operation Details 6.3.1 Jump code (DIO_00) DIO_00 is used to move directly to a code. The following is an example of Jumping directly to DIO_05. Press [PROG]. Press [SHIFT/ESC], [▲], or [▼] to change the code to DIO_05. Press [ENT] to move directly to DIO_05. Note • If the code you entered is not available, then the closest code to it will be accessed. • After the jump, you can press [▲] or [▼] to move to other codes. Detailed operation by function groups 172 6.3.2 Multifunction digital input terminal 6.3.2.1 Defining the multifunction digital input terminal P1–P7 (DIO_01–DIO_07) Codes DIO_01 to DIO_07 are used to define the multifunction digital input terminals P1to P7. The following table lists the functions available for these multifunction digital input terminals. Only one function may be assigned to one terminal at a time, and the setting cannot be changed during operation. If you try to assign a function to more than one terminal, the setting will not be saved on the second terminal, and its original function will be retained. Multifunction terminal settings may not be changed during an operation, and their utilization may be restricted depending on the control mode set at PAR_07 No Fault trips Keypad display PAR_07 Control Mode Speed(IM) V/F Slip Comp Speed (PM) 1 Speed-L Multistep speed-L O O O O 2 Speed-M Multistep speed-M O O O O 3 Speed-H Multistep speed-H O O O O 10 Xcel-L Multistep acc/dec-L O O O O 11 Xcel-H Multistep acc/dec-H O O O O 13 Ext Trip-B External trip B terminal O O O O 17 Timer Input Timer input O O O O 19 ASR Gain Sel ASR gain switching O X X O 22 PreExcite Pre-excitation O X X X 25 Use Trq Bias Use torque bias O X X O 26 A3 Safety Use auxiliary reference O O O O Detailed operation by function groups 173 Operation Details No Fault trips Keypad display PAR_07 Control Mode Speed(IM) V/F Slip Comp Speed (PM) 29 Battery Run Enable battery operation O O O O Performing multistep speed (H, M, L) operations When you set multifunction input terminals P1–P7 to “Speed-L”, “Speed-M”, or “Speed-H,” the combination of the terminal inputs is used as the speed reference to run the commands (multispeed 0–7) that are defined at codes FUN_12 through FUN_19. When multifunction input terminal P1, P2, and P3 are set to Speed-L, Speed-M, and Speed-H respectively, the following operation becomes available. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Parameter setting DIO _01 P1 define Define multifunction Input terminal P1 input - - Speed-L DIO _02 P2 define Define multifunction input terminal P2 input - - Speed-M DIO _03 P3 define Define multifunction input terminal P3 input - - Speed-H The following table lists the multistep speed by the combination of terminals P1, P2, and P3. If multispeed 0 is selected (terminals P1, P2, P3 are OFF), one of the three sources is used as the speed reference: Digital input set by the keypad (FUN_12: Speed 0), analog input at the terminal block, or network communication signal. P1 P2 P3 Speed OFF OFF OFF Speed reference source set at FUN_02 ON OFF OFF FUN_13 (Speed 1) OFF ON OFF FUN_14 (Speed 2) ON ON OFF FUN_15 (Speed 3) Detailed operation by function groups 174 P1 P2 P3 Speed OFF OFF ON FUN_16 (Speed 4) ON OFF ON FUN_17 (Speed 5) OFF ON ON FUN_18 (Speed 6) ON ON ON FUN_19 (Speed 7) XCEL-L / XCEL-H For details, refer to FUN_41–48 (Acceleration/Deceleration time 1–4). Code Keypad display Description Unit Default setting 2.2–37 kW FUN_41 Acc Time-1 Acceleration time 1 sec 2.00 FUN_42 Dec Time-1 Deceleration time 1 sec 2.00 FUN_43 Acc Time-2 Acceleration time 2 sec 3.00 FUN_44 Dec Time-2 Deceleration time 2 sec 3.00 FUN_45 Acc Time-3 Acceleration time 3 sec 4.00 FUN_46 Dec Time-3 Deceleration time 3 sec 4.00 FUN_47 Acc Time-4 Acceleration time 4 sec 5.00 FUN_48 Dec Time-4 Deceleration time 4 sec 5.00 External fault trip signal terminal B (Ext Trip-B) When this function is set, if the signal is turned off during an operation, the inverter turns off its output and performs a free-run stop. Inverter External fault trip signal at terminal B (Ext Trip-B) is displayed on the keypad, and the [STOP] indicator flashes. This function may be set to receive a latch-type external fault trip signal. Detailed operation by function groups 175 Timer input Operation Details When multifunction input terminals P1–P7 are set to receive timer input signal, “Timer ON delay time (DIO_25)” and “Timer OFF delay time (DIO_26)” may be defined and applied to the inverter output. The following is an example when DIO_05 (multifunction input terminal P5) is set for timer input, and DIO_11 (AX1, multifunction aux output terminal) is set for timer output. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Parameter setting DIO_05 P5 Define Define multifunction input terminal P5 - - Timer Input DIO_11 AX1 Define Define multifunction auxiliary output terminal AX1 - - Timer Out DIO_25 TimerOn Dly Timer ON delay time 0.1–3600.0 sec - DIO_26 TimerOff Dly Timer OFF delay time 0.1–3600.0 sec - Detailed operation by function groups 176 ASR gain switching (ASR Gain Sel) The speed PI controller uses one of the two P/I gain combinations depending on the ASR gain switching option (“ASR Gain Sel”) that are set at the multifunction input terminals. The following is an example where multifunction input terminal P5 is set for the ASR gain switching. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Parameter setting DIO_05 P5 Define Define multifunction input terminal P5 ASR Gain Sel CON_03 ASR P Gain1 Speed controller proportional gain 1 0.1–500.0 % CON_04 ASR I Gain1 P5: OFF Speed controller integral time 1 0–50000 ms CON_05 ASR LPF1 Speed controller input LPF time constant 1 0–20000 ms CON_06 ASR P Gain2 Speed controller proportional gain 2 0.1–500.0 % CON_07 ASR I Gain2 P5: ON Speed controller integral time 2 0–50000 ms CON_08 ASR LPF2 Speed controller input LPF time constant 2 0–20000 ms Pre-excitation (PreExcite) In pre-excitation, a voltage is supplied to the motor stator and generates a magnetic field inside the motor before it operates. The addition of flux to the motor’s stator prepares the motor and enhances its acceleration response. Set a multifunction input terminal to “PreExcite” to enable pre-excitation. While a pre-excitation signal is input, no-load current is provided to the motor to create a flux. Detailed operation by function groups 177 Torque bias options (Use Trq Bias) Operation Details When a multifunction input (P1–P7) is set to “Use Trq Bias”, torque bias is applied to the operation whenever the relevant input terminal is turned ON. To disable torque bias (“0”), turn OFF the signal to the terminal. Set CON_37 (Trq Bias Src) to define the input source (terminal or location). Code Keypad display Name Range Setting value CON_37 Toq Bias Src Input source for torque bias None Disable use of torque bias. Analog AIO_01 (Ai1 Define): “Torque Bias” AIO_02 (Ai1 Source): “0–10V” (voltage input at V1 terminal) AIO_06 (Ai1 Out Y2): “200%” CON_40 (Trq Bias): “100%” Keypad Use the setting at CON_38 (Trq Bias) CAN Use the setting for CAN option The setting at CON_37 alone can enable the torque bias without additional input if multifunction terminals are not configured as the input source (Use Trq Bias). A3 safety terminal You can set one of the multifunction input terminals to receive “A3 Safety” signal. Signal to the input enables or disables the PWM output of the inverter. For more details, refer to 6.8 Protection (PRT) group on page 275. Detailed operation by function groups 178 Operation by battery power (Battery Run) When the inverter is used to operate elevators, battery power may be used as the emergency power source if power failure occurs during elevator operation. For more details, refer to 6.5.10 Setting the operation speed and input voltage for battery operation on page 234. 6.3.2.2 Reversing the multifunction terminal input (DIO_08) Multifunction input terminals are “Form A” contacts by default. The DIO_08 parameter is used to change the contact type to “Form B” by setting the binary code for each terminal to “1.” When the contact type for a terminal is changed, the setting is maintained until it is modified again by the user. Note that setting the external trip B terminal to a “Form B” contact makes it work as the external trip A terminal. On the keypad display, the binary digits as they appear from left to right represent the contact type for the FX, RX, BX, RST, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, and P7 terminals. 6.3.2.3 Setting the LPF (Low pass filter) time constant for terminal input (DIO_09) The low pass filter is used to reduce the level of electronic signal interference. The setting at DIO_09 configures the responsiveness of the input terminals (FX, RX, BX, RST, and P1–P7). Increasing the time constant decreases the responsiveness of the input terminal and decreasing it increases the responsiveness. The approximate response time of a terminal can be calculated by: Setting value × 2.5 ms Detailed operation by function groups 179 6.3.3 Multifunction digital output terminal Operation Details 6.3.3.1 Reversing the multifunction auxiliary output terminals (DIO_10) Multifunction auxiliary output terminals are “Form A” contacts by default. The DIO_10 parameter is used to change the contact type to “Form B” by setting the binary code that corresponds to the terminal to “1.” When the contact type for a terminal is changed, the setting is maintained until it is modified again by the user. On the keypad display, the binary digits as they appear from left to right represent the contact type for the AX1, AX2, AX3, and AX4 terminals. 6.3.3.2 Setting the multifunction auxiliary output terminals (DIO_11–14) Codes DIO_11 to DIO_14 are used to assign functions to the multifunction auxiliary output terminals. Once the conditions are met for the functions, outputs are made at the corresponding terminals. No. Parameter setting Description No. Parameter setting Description 1 INV Ready Inverter ready 13 Trq Lmt Det. Note 1) Torque limit detection 2 Zero Spd DetNote 1) Zero-speed detection 14 OverLoad Overload warning 3 Spd Det. Speed detection 15 Stop Stop operation in progress 4 Spd Det(ABS) Speed detection (non-polar) 16 MC on/off MC signal output 5 Spd Arrival Reference speed 17 FAN Status Fan failure status Detailed operation by function groups 180 No. Parameter setting Description No. Parameter setting Description reached 6 Timer Out Timer output 18 ALLS Status ALLS operation status 7 LV Warn Low voltage warning 19 Steady Steady operation 8 Run In operation 20 Brake Output Brake output 9 Regenerating Regeneration in progress 21 BFR/NFR Mode Note2) Refer to the User Manual provided with ELIO add-on module. 10 INV OH Warn Inverter overheat warning 22 BFR/NFR End Note2) 11 Speed Agree Note 1) Speed agreement 23 E/L Fault Note 2) 12 Trq Det. Note 1) Torque detection Note 1) Available in “Speed(IM)” or “Speed (PM)” control modes only. Note2) Displayed only when ELIO add-on module had been installed and PAR_08 is set to “Elevator.” Not Used This setting is used to disable the multifunction digital output. INV Ready This setting allows the multifunction terminal to output a signal to inform the user that the inverter is ready for operation. The output circuit opens when a fault trip occurs. The “INV Ready” signal is output during a run on battery power as well. When the inverter is running on battery, the inverter is still operable although the DC_Link voltage is low. Detailed operation by function groups 181 Zero Spd Det Operation Details This setting is used to detect the motor’s zero-speed. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting DIO_17 ZSD Level Zero-speed detection level 0.0–480.0 rpm 10 DIO_18 ZSD Band Zero-speed detection band 0.1–10.0 % 0.5 The setting value for DIO_18 (ZSD Band) is expresses in a percentage of the motor’s maximum speed (PAR_11). Spd Det. / Spd Det. (ABS) This setting is used to detect a certain motor speed. Depending on the setting, the detection speed may either be non-polar or polar sensitive. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting DIO_19 SD Level Speed detection level -PAR_11- PAR_11 Hz /rpm 0 DIO_20 SD Band Speed detection band 0.1–10.0 % 0.5 The setting value for DIO_20 (SD Band) is expresses in a percentage of the motor’s maximum speed (PAR_11). Detailed operation by function groups 182 Reference speed acquisition (Spd Arrival) This setting is used to detect if the motor speed has reached its speed reference. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting DIO_21 SA Band Reference speed reached detection band 0.1–10.0 % 0.5 Reference speed agreement (Spd Agree) This setting is used to detect if the motor speed deviates from the reference during acceleration or deceleration. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting DIO_22 SEQ Band Speed agreement band 0.1–10.0 % 0.5 Detailed operation by function groups 183 Operation Details Timer output This setting is used to assign a timer output function to one of the multifunction output terminals. DIO _25 (timer ON delay time) and DIO _26 (timer OFF delay time) are used to set the delay time for this output signal. The following table lists an example of multifunction input and output terminal settings when DIO_07 is set as the timer input and DIO_08 is set as the timer output, and the diagram below explains the inverter operation. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Parameter setting DIO_07 P7 Define Define multifunction input terminal P7 Timer Input DIO_11 AX1 Define Define multifunction auxiliary output terminal AX1 (A1, C1) Timer Out DIO_25 TimerOn Dly Timer ON delay time 0.1–3600.0 sec 0.1 DIO_26 TimerOff Dly Timer OFF delay time 0.1–3600.0 sec 0.1 Detailed operation by function groups 184 LV Warn This setting is used to output a signal when the inverter’s DC link voltage drops below the low voltage limit. Run This setting is used to output a signal during inverter operation. Regenerating This setting is used to output a signal when regeneration is in progress. This setting is not available when the control mode is set to “V/F,” or “Slip Comp”. Inv OH Warn This setting is used to output a signal when the inverter is overheated. Refer to 6.8.12 Inv OH Warn on page 287 for more information. Detailed operation by function groups 185 Trq Det. Operation Details This setting is used to detect a certain torque. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting DIO_23 TD Level Torque detection level 0.0–250.0 % 0.0 DIO_24 TD Band Torque detection band 0.1–10.0 % 0.5 Trq Lmt Det This setting is used to detect the torque limit output by the speed controller. Stop This setting is used to output a signal when the inverter is in a stop state. Controlling magnetic contactors (MC On/Off) The DIO group controls settings for the magnetic contactor (MC) when an MC is installed and utilized on the inverter output. The MC settings ensure that the MC is engaged (ON) before the inverter starts the operation and disengaged (OFF) after the inverter completes the operation. The FWD and REV indicators flash when the “MC On Time,” and “MC Off Time” commands are being used. The following table lists the time setting values available for the MC on/off control. When this function is not used, the delay times are automatically set to “0” (MC On Time=0, MC Off Time=0). Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting DIO_28 MC On Time MC on delay time 100–50000 ms 1000 DIO_29 MC Off Time MC off delay time 100–50000 ms 1000 Detailed operation by function groups 186 Do not operate magnetic contactors (On or Off) while the inverter is operating. Inverter protection features may be operated, resulting in interruption of inverter and elevator operation. FAN Status This setting is used to output a signal when a fan warning is turned on, or a fan failure occurs. Refer to 6.8.15 Fan fault on page 289 for more information. Detailed operation by function groups 187 ALLS Status Operation Details This setting is used to output a signal when the inverter is running an ALLS operation. Steady This setting is used to output a signal when the inverter is operating at a fixed speed. Brake Output This setting is used to output brake on (engaged) or brake off (released) signals. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN-03 Stop mode Stop options 0 ( Decel) 1( Free-run) 2 (Dc-brake) 0 (Decel) FUN-06 DcBr Freq DC braking frequency PAR_12– PAR_11 Hz 5.00 FUN-07 DcBlk Time PWM output block time before DC braking 0–6000 ms 0 FUN-08 DcBr Value DC braking value 0–200 % 10 FUN-09 DcBr Time DC braking time 0.1–60.0 sec 1.0 FUN_10 Dcst Value DC amount at start-up 0–200 % 10 FUN_11 Dcst Time DC braking time at start-up 0.0–60.0 sec 60.0 DIO-30 BK On Delay Brake output on delay time 0.0 – (FUN_11 - 0.1) sec 0.0 DIO-34 BK Off Delay Brake output off delay time 0.0 – (FUN_09 - 0.1) sec 0.0 DIO_11– DIO_13 AX1/Ax2/AX3/ AX4 Define Define multifunction output terminal 0–21 (Brake Output) 0 (Not Used) DIO-31 BKOpen Time Brake open time 0.01–30.00 ms 0.01 DIO-32 BKOpen Spd Brake open speed PAR_12- 50.00/ 0.0-500.0 Hz /rpm 0.50/0.0 Detailed operation by function groups 188 Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting DIO-33 Release Curr Brake release current 0.0–150.00 % 20.0 DIO-36 BKClose Spd Braking closing speed PAR_12- 50.00/ 0.0-500.0 Hz /rpm 0.50/0.0 FUN-53 PreExct Time Motor pre-excitation time 0–10000 ms 0 FUN-54 Hold Time Hold time 10–10000 ms 1000 Note DIO_33 (brake release current) value is expressed in a percentage to the motor’s rated current. Braking operation in “V/F” and “slip compensation” modes When a forward operation command is given at T1 on the timeline, if the output frequency is greater than the brake open speed set at DIO-32, and if the output Detailed operation by function groups 189 current is greater than the value set at DIO-33, the brake open signal is output Operation Details (T2 on the timeline). From there on, the frequency is maintained for the time set at DIO-31, and then the acceleration continues to the frequency reference. • The mechanical brake is disengaged slightly later at T3 on the timeline. Mechanical brakes in general have slight delays when they operate. • During deceleration, if the output frequency reaches the brake close (engage) level set at DIO-36, and if the output current is greater than the 90% of value set at DIO-33, the break open signal is turned off (T4). • The mechanical brake is engaged at T5 due to the mechanical delay. Braking operation in “V/F,” or “slip compensation+ DC start” and “DC braking” modes If DIO_30 (BK On Delay) is not set, a brake open signal is sent as soon as an operation command is sent (T1 on the graph above). DIO_30 (BK On Delay) can be set to delay the brake open time from T1 to T2 Detailed operation by function groups 190 when the output current is greater than the value set at DIO_33. This can be used to enable the brake to open at the end of the DC start phase. Or, at any stage after the elevator is in a position that it will not descend from if the brake is disengaged. • When an operation command is received, the inverter provides the amount of DC current set at FUN_10 (DcSt Value) for the time set at FUN_11. Then, the inverter accelerates until it reaches the speed set at DIO_32 (BK Open Speed), maintains the speed for the time set at DIO_31, and accelerates again until the frequency reference is reached. • When the operation command is turned off, the inverter decelerates (T4). If the output frequency reaches the brake close speed set at DIO_36 (BKClose Spd)and if the current exceeds 90% of the brake release current set at DIO_33, the brake open signal stops (T5 on the graph). DIO_34 (BK Off Delay) can be used to adjust the brake opening time. The brake open signal OFF time can be adjusted from T5 to T6 on the graph. • When the inverter output frequency reaches the frequency set at FUN_06, the inverter output is blocked for the time set at FUN_07. Then, the amount of DC current set at FUN_08 is applied for the time set at FUN_09. • If the DC braking frequency exceeds the frequency during brake closing, the DC braking value set at DIO_36 (BK Close Spd) is applied when the brakes are closed. If the brake closing frequency exceeds the DC brake frequency, a brake close signal is sent when the frequency set at DIO_36 (BK Close Spd) is reached, and DC braking is applied at the frequency set at FUN_06 (Dcbr Freq). Detailed operation by function groups 191 Braking operation in “Speed(IM)” mode Operation Details When an operation command is received at T1, the inverter supplies flux current to the motor for the time set at FUN_53. A brake open signal is received when the output current is greater than the amount set at DIO_33 at T2, and after a mechanical delay, the brakes are released at T3 as illustrated in the graph above. • When the inverter’s output frequency reaches the frequency set at DIO_32, the frequency is maintained for the time set at DIO_31. Then, the motor accelerates until it reaches the frequency reference. Once the frequency reference is reached, the inverter maintains the speed and continues to operate. • When the operation command is turned off, the inverter decelerates at T4 as illustrated in the graph above. If the output frequency reaches the brake closing frequency set at DIO_36 (BKClose Spd) and the current exceeds 90% of the brake release current set at DIO_33, the brake signal is turned off at T5 in the graph above. The brakes are applied until T6 because of mechanical delay. Detailed operation by function groups 192 • When the inverter output frequency is “0,” the inverter is operated at zerospeed for the time set at FUN_54 (Hold Time) and fully stops at T7 as illustrated in the graph above. Braking operation in “Speed(PM)” mode The basic braking operation in “Speed(PM)” mode is identical to that used in “Speed(IM)” mode, with one exception. Pre-excitation is not required because synchronous motors do not require the injection of flux current. In the control mode other than “Speed(PM)”, brake open signal is forced to become Off if the output current becomes less than 90% of the set brake open current value even when the brake open signal is On and operating normally. Detailed operation by function groups 193 Fault output relay options (DIO_16) Operation Details Relays 30A, 30B, and 30 C receive fault output signals when the inverter has a fault. The individual bits can be set for low voltage and other inverter fault trip conditions. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting DIO_16 Relay Mode Fault relay mode (A, B, C terminals) 00–11 11 Code Bit 1 (Inverter fault trip) Bit 0 (LVT) DIO_16 0/1 0/1 Bit Setting Description Bit 0 (LVT) 0 No LVT output signal 1 LVT output signal Bit 1 (Inverter trip) 0 No inverter trip output signal 1 Inverter trip output signal (excludes LVT) Detailed operation by function groups 194 6.4 Analog input and output (AIO) group 6.4.1 Jump code (AIO_00) AIO_00 code is used to directly access a certain code. The following is an example of jumping directly to AIO_13 from AIO_00 code. Press [PROG]. Use [SHIFT/ESC], [▲], or [▼] to change the code number to “13”. Press [ENT] to access code AIO 13. If an invalid code number is entered, the next available code number is automatically selected. Note After jumping directly to a code, you can move to other codes by pressing [▲] or [▼]. Detailed operation by function groups 195 6.4.2 Multifunction analog input Operation Details 6.4.2.1 Multifunction analog input terminals AIO_01–12 (settings, input options, minimum input, bias, maximum input, gain, low pass filter time constant, and lost command conditions for Ai1 [=V1]) Ai1 (V1) analog input terminal allows –10–10 V voltage inputs. It can be defined for one of the following. Bit Setting Description Speed Ref Speed reference The speed reference becomes ±100% of the motor’s maximum speed when the input signal is ±10 V. Torque Bias Torque bias The torque bias becomes ±100% of the motor’s rated torque when the input signal is ±10 V. The available range is -250–250% of the motor’s rated torque, depending on gain and bias settings. Only one function may be assigned to one terminal at a time. If you try to assign a function to more than one terminal, the setting will not be saved on the second terminal, and its original function will be retained. If an analog input terminal that was previously defined is defined again for another function, the previously set values will be initialized to “0”. Detailed operation by function groups 196 The following table lists the functions available for multifunction analog input terminals. Code Keypad display Function Range Unit Description AIO_01 Ai1 Define Define multifunction analog input Ai1 0 (Not Used) 1 (Speed Ref) 6 (Torque Bias) Defines types of multifunction analog input Ai1 (V1). AIO_02 Ai1 Source Input source for multifunction analog input Ai1 0 (0 – 10 V) 1 (10 – 0 V) 2 (-10 – 10 V) 3 (10 – -10 V) Defines input options of multifunction analog input Ai1 (V1). AIO_03 Ai1 In X1 Minimum value for multifunction analog input Ai1 AIO_07 –AIO_05 % Sets the minimum amount of analog Input (based on 0 V input). AIO_04 Ai1 Out Y1 Minimum input bias for multifunction analog input Ai1 AIO_08 –AIO_06 % Defines the value set at AIO_01 based on the analog input at AIO_03 AIO_05 Ai1 In X2 Maximum input for multifunction analog input Ai1 0.00–100.00 % Defines the maximum input value for analog input. AIO_06 Ai1 Out Y2 Maximum input gain for multifunction analog input Ai1 0.00–250.00 % Defines the value set at AIO_01 based on the analog input at AIO_05. Detailed operation by function groups 197 Code Keypad display Function Range Unit Description Operation Details AIO_07 Ai1 In -X1 Minimum negative input for multifunction analog input Ai1 AIO_09 –AIO_03 % Defines the minimum negative value for the analog input (based on 0 V input). AIO_08 Ai1 Out -Y1 Minimum negative input bias for multifunction analog input Ai1 AIO_10 –AIO_04 % Defines the value set at AIO_01 based on the analog input at AIO_07. AIO_09 Ai1 In -X2 Maximum negative input for multifunction analog input Ai1 -100.00–0.00 % Defines the maximum negative value for the analog input. AIO_10 Ai1 Out -Y2 Maximum negative input gain for multifunction analog input Ai1 -250.00–0.00 % Defines the value set at AIO_01 based on the analog input at AIO_09. AIO_11 Ai1 LPF Ai1 input low-pass filter time constant 0–2000 ms Defines the low-pass filter time constant for the analog input. AIO_12 Ai1 Wbroken Lost command for multifunction analog input Ai1 0 (None) 1 (Half of x1) 2 (Below x1) Defines the lost command conditions for the analog input Ai1. AIO_03 expresses the minimum voltage input that can be recognized by the inverter in a percentage to the maximum input voltage (10 V). For example, if AIO_03 is set to 20%, this stands for 2 V in voltage. If AIO_04 is set to 0%, any input to the analog input terminal that is smaller than 2 V is not regarded as an effective input. Detailed operation by function groups 198 AIO_03 is used to define the range of voltage input at the analog input terminals. In general, AIO_03 is set to 0%, andAIO_05 is set to 100%. However, for those analog input devices that generate chattering with 0% AIO_03 setting value, you may adjust the value to avoid the chattering. When the main controller receives voltage input at the analog input terminal, inaccuracy of the analog input or output devices may create deviations in the signals. AIO_04 and AIO_06 are similar to bias and gain settings which are used to correct the deviation in the inverter’s main controller. Codes AIO_07 through AIO_10 are identical to AIO_03 through AIO_06 in their functions, except that these codes are for negative analog input values. As it is represented in the concept diagram, not only does the L100 inverter allow analog inputs in quadrant I & III, it also allows inputs in quadrant II & IV, depending on the settings at AIO_02. By defining codes AIO_03 through AIO_10, inputs expressed in broken lines become available. Detailed operation by function groups 199 6.4.2.2 Analog input terminals AIO_13–24 (settings, input Operation Details options, minimum input, bias, maximum input, gain, low pass filter time constant, and lost command conditions for Ai2 [=I1]) Ai2 (I1) analog input terminal allows 0–20 mA current inputs. The following table lists the functions available for analog input terminals. Code Keypad display Function Range Unit Description AIO_13 Ai2 Define Define analog input Ai2 0 (Not Used) 1 (Speed Ref) Defines types of analog input Ai2 (I1) AIO_14 Ai2 Source Input source for analog input Ai2 0 (0 – 20 mA) 1 (20 – 0 mA) Defines input options of analog input Ai2 (I1). AIO_15 Ai2 In X1 Minimum value for analog input Ai2 0 % Sets the minimum amount of analog Input (based on 0 mA input). AIO_16 Ai2 Out Y1 Minimum input bias for analog input Ai2 0 % Defines the speed based on the analog input at AIO_15 AIO_17 Ai2 In X2 Maximum input for analog input Ai2 100.00 % Defines the maximum input value for analog input. AIO_18 Ai2 Out Y2 Maximum input gain for analog input Ai2 100.00 % Defines the speed based on the analog input at AIO_17 AIO_23 Ai2 LPF Ai2 input low-pass filter time constant 0–2000 ms Defines the low-pass filter time constant for the analog input. Detailed operation by function groups 200 Code Keypad display Function Range Unit Description AIO_24 Ai2 Wbroken Lost command for analog input Ai2 0 (None) 1 (Half of x1) 2 (Below x1) Defines the lost command conditions for the analog input Ai2. AIO_15 expresses the minimum current input that can be recognized by the inverter in a percentage to the maximum input current (20 mA). For example, if AIO_15 is set to 20%, this stands for 4 mA in current. If AIO_15 is set to 0%, any input to the analog input terminal that is smaller than 4 mA is not regarded as an effective input. AIO_15 is used to define the range of current input at the analog input terminals. In general, AIO_16 is set to 0%, and AIO_18 is set to 100%. However, for those analog input devices that generate chattering with 0% AIO_15 setting value, you may adjust the value to avoid the chattering. When the main controller receives current inputs at the analog input terminals, inaccuracy of the analog input or output devices may create deviations in the signals. AIO_16 and AIO_18 are similar to bias and gain settings which are used to correct the deviation in the inverter’s main controller. 6.4.2.3 Adjusting bias and gain using the keypad (Out Y1 and Out Y2) Setting the bias at AIO_04 (Ai1 Out Y1) Connect voltage or current input source to multifunction analog terminals V1 through GND, and set AIO_03 to 0%. Provide 0 V input, and then follow the instructions below to adjust analog input bias. Key operation Keypad display Description - Initial LCD display Detailed operation by function groups 201 Key operation Keypad display Description Operation Details PROG Press [PROG]. The first line on the display shows the input/output ratio in a percentage, which is calculated at the controller. The second line shows the currently set bias value. ▲ To adjust the bias so that 0.00% output is made with 0 V input, press [▲] until 0.00% is displayed in the first line. ENT After adjusting the bias, press [ENT] to save it. Setting the gain at AIO_06 (Ai1 Out Y2) Connect voltage input source to multifunction analog terminals V1 through GND, and set AIO_05 to 100%. Provide 10 V input, and then follow the instructions below to adjust analog input gain. Key operation Keypad display Description - Initial LCD display PROG Press [PROG]. The first line on the display shows the input/output ratio in a percentage, which is calculated at the controller. The second line shows the currently set gain value. ▲ To adjust the gain so that 100.00% output is made with 10 V input, press the [▲] until 102.00% is displayed in the second line. Detailed operation by function groups 202 Key operation Keypad display Description ENT After adjusting the gain, press [ENT] to save it. You can set other analog input bias and gain values including codes AIO_08 and AIO_10 using the procedures as provided above. For the multifunction analog inputs, if In X1 is set to 20%, In X2 to 70%, Out Y1 to 30%, and Out Y2 to 80%, the change in the outputs to 0–10 V analog inputs are as follows. Detailed operation by function groups 203 6.4.2.4 Lost command conditions for multifunction analog input Operation Details Ai1 (AIO_12) The following table lists lost command options available for multifunction analog input terminal V1. Code Keypad display Function Range Unit Description AIO_12 Ai1 Wbroken Lost command conditions for multifunction analog input Ai1 0 (None) Do not use analog input lost command options. 1 (half of x1) Analog input lost command is decided when analog input based on AIO_02 (Ai1 source) is in the following range. 0 → 10 V 0–(AIO_03 Ai1 In X1)/2 10 → 0 V 0–(AIO_03 Ai1 In X1)/2 -10 → 10 V (AIO_07 Ai1 -In X1)/2 – (AIO_03 Ai1 In X1)/2 10 → -10 V (AIO_07 Ai1 -In X1)/2 – (AIO_03 Ai1 In X1)/2 2 (Below x1) Analog input lost command is decided when analog input based on AIO_02 (Ai1 source) is in the following range. 0 → 10 V 0–(AIO_03 Ai1 In X1) 10 → 0 V 0–(AIO_03 Ai1 In X1) -10 → 10 V (AIO_07 Ai1 -In X1) – (AIO_03 Ai1 In X1) 10 → -10 V (AIO_07 Ai1 -In X1) – (AIO_03 Ai1 In X1) 6.4.2.5 Lost command conditions for multifunction analog input Ai2 (AIO_24) The following table lists lost command options available for multifunction analog input terminal I1. Code Keypad display Function Range Unit Description AIO_2 4 Ai2 Wbroken Lost command 0 (None) Do not use analog input lost command options. Detailed operation by function groups 204 Code Keypad display Function Range Unit Description conditions for multifunction analog input Ai2 1 (half of x1) Analog input lost command is decided when analog input based on AIO_14 (Ai2 source) is in the following range. 0 → 20 mA 0–(AIO_15 Ai2 In X1)/2 20 → 0 mA 0–(AIO_15 Ai2 In X1)/2 2 (Below x1) Analog input lost command is decided when analog input based on AIO_02 (Ai1 source) is in the following range. 0 → 20 mA 0–(AIO_15 Ai2 In X1) 20 → 0 mA 0–(AIO_15 Ai2 In X1) 6.4.2.6 Multifunction analog input command lost command decision time (AIO_37 Time out) AIO_37 (Time Out) is used to define the time values to make analog input lost command decisions. The inverter decides that the command is lost after the time set has been elapsed. Code Keypad display Function Range Unit Description AIO_37 Time out Multi-function analog input lost command decision time 0.1–120.0 sec If the conditions for multifunction analog input lost command is met, and is maintained for the set time, the inverter decides that the command is lost. The lost command decision time set at AIO_37 applies to analog input terminal parameters at AIO_12 and AIO_24. When multifunction analog input is lost, the inverter performs a deceleration stop or a free-run stop according to the parameter setting at AIO_38. 6.4.2.7 Operation when multifunction analog input command is lost (AIO_38 Ai Lost Comm) AIO_38 is used to define the inverter operation when the analog input command is lost. If the lost command conditions are met, and if the condition is maintained Detailed operation by function groups 205 for the time set at AIO_37 (Time Out), the inverter decides that the analog input Operation Details command is lost. For multifunction analog input lost command conditions and the decision time, refer to 6.4 Analog input and output (AIO) group on page 194. If the inverter operation is stopped due to a lost command, the inverter does not restart automatically when the lost command condition is released. If the inverter is run by terminal block inputs, the forward operation command must be turned off, and then turned on again for the operation to begin again. If it is run by the keypad, the FWD or REV keys must be pressed again. Code Keypad display Function Unit Description Range AIO_38 Lost Command 0 (None) - Continue operation when a multifunction analog input lost command happens. 1(Free-run) - Perform a free-run stop when a multifunction analog input lost command happens. 2 (Decel) - Perform a deceleration stop when a multifunction analog input lost command happens. When a lost command takes place, an “LOAI [input terminal #]” message is displayed on the keypad. The percentage value in the second line shows the analog input value. Adjust this value to make it stay out of range of the lost command conditions to make the message disappear and change the status of the inverter operable. [V/F, Slip Comp mode] [Speed(IM) mode] Detailed operation by function groups 206 6.4.3 Analog output 6.4.3.1 Defining the multifunction analog output terminal and setting output options, bias, gain, and an absolute value (AIO_40–53) The L100 inverter provides two analog output terminals that can be user defined for various use. The output signal range is -10 V–+10 V, and the output types are as follows. Code Keypad display Function Range Unit Description AIO_40 AO1 Define Define multifunction analog output AO1 Defines the type of multifunction analog output AO1. AIO_41 AO1 Source Multifunction analog output AO1 output range 0(0 – 10 V) 1(10 – 0 V) 2(-10 – 10 V) 3(10 – -10 V) Defines output range for multifunction analog output AO1. AIO_42 AO1 Bias Multifunction analog output AO1 bias 0–AIO_43 % Defines bias for multifunction analog output AO1. AIO_43 AO1 Gain Multifunction analog output AO1 gain 0.0–500.0 % Defines gain for multifunction analog output AO1. AIO_44 AO1 -Bias Multifunction analog output AO1 bias AIO_45–0 % Defines negative bias for multifunction analog output AO1. AIO_45 AO1 -Gain Multifunction analog output AO1 gain -500.0 –0 % Defines negative gain for multifunction analog output AO1. AIO_46 AO1 ABS Multifunction analog output AO1 absolute value 0(No) / 1( Yes) Allows the analog output AO1 to always provide positive outputs. The same setting options provided above are available for other multifunction analog output terminals. Detailed operation by function groups 207 The following is a concept diagram that explains the analog outputs. By defining Operation Details AO1 Source, outputs in the dotted line become available. Detailed operation by function groups 208 The following table lists the type and setting for multifunction analog outputs. Output types Description Output signal level Ai1 Value Analog input value +10 V: 10 V Ai2 Value Analog input value +10 V: 20 mA PreRamp Ref Speed command before acceleration/deceleration +10 V: MaxSpeed PostRamp Ref Speed command after acceleration/deceleration +10 V: MaxSpeed ASR Inp Ref Speed controller input command +10 V: MaxSpeed Output Freq Output frequency +10 V: MaxSpeed Motor SpeedNote1) Motor speed +10 V: MaxSpeed Speed Dev Note1) Speed deviation +10 V: Rated slip x 2 ASR Out Note1) Speed controller output +10 V: 250% Torque Bias Note1) Torque bias +6 V: 150% PosTrq Limit Note1) Forward torque limit 10 V: 250% NegTrq Limit Note1) Reverse torque limit 10 V: 250% RegTrq Limit Note1) Torque limit at regeneration 10 V: 250% IqeRef Note1) Torque current reference +10 V: 250% of the rated torque current Iqe Note1) Torque current +10 V: 250% of the rated torque current Flux Cur Ref Note2) Recommended flux current reference 10 V: Rated inverter current x 1 IdeRef Note1) Flux current reference +10 V: Rated flux current x 2 Ide Note1) Flux current +10 V: Rated flux current x 2 ACR_D Out Note1) D-axis current controller output +10 V: 600 ACR_Q Out Note1) Q-axis current controller output +10 V: 600 Detailed operation by function groups 209 Output types Description Output signal level Operation Details VdeRef D-axis voltage +10 V: 600 VqeRef Q-axis voltage +10 V: 600 Out Amps RMS Output current 10 V: Inverter rated current x 2 Out Volt RMS Output voltage +10 V: 600 Power Output power +10 V: Rated output x 2 DC Bus Volt DC-link voltage 10 V: 1000 V Inv Temp Inverter temperature +10 V: 150℃ Note 1) Available only when the control mode is set to “Speed(IM),” or “Speed(PM)” at PAR_07. Note 2) Available only when the control mode is set to “Speed(IM)” at PAR_07. 6.4.3.2 Adjusting bias and gain using the keypad Setting the bias at AIO_42 (AO1 bias) Follow the procedures below to set the analog output bias for AO1. Actual output is made when the output exceeds the bias value. Key operation Keypad display Description - Initial LCD display PROG Press [PROG]. The first line on the display shows the output ratio in a percentage, which is calculated at the controller. The second line shows the currently set bias value. ▲ To adjust the bias so that the actual output is made when the output exceeds 30.0%, press the [▲] until 30.0% is displayed in the first line. Detailed operation by function groups 210 Key operation Keypad display Description ENT After adjusting the bias, press [ENT] to save it. Setting the gain at AIO_43 (AO1 gain) Follow the procedures below to set the analog output gain for AO1 to adjust the output gradient where the maximum output value is 10 V. Key operation Keypad display Description - Initial LCD display PROG Press [PROG]. The first line on the display shows currently set bias value. The second line shows the currently set gain value. ▲ To adjust the gain so that a 10V output is made when the gain exceeds 200.0%, press [▲] until 200.0% is displayed in the first line. ENT After adjusting the gain, press [ENT] to save it. Examples of multifunction analog outputs to -10–10 V analog inputs depending on different bias and gain settings are as follows. Detailed operation by function groups 211 Operation Details • Analog output may fluctuate when the inverter starts. These analog output characteristics must be considered when an inverter is used in a control system. • Analog output values outside the inverter’s operable range are regarded as invalid. Detailed operation by function groups 212 6.5 Function (FUN) group 6.5.1 Jump code (FUN_00) FUN_00 code is used to directly access a certain code. The following is an example of jumping directly to FUN_02 from FUN_00 code. Press [PROG]. Use [SHIFT/ESC], [▲], or [▼] to change the code number to “02”. Press [ENT] to access FUN_02 code. If an invalid code number is entered, the next available code number is automatically selected. Note After jumping directly to a code, you can move to other codes by pressing [▲] or [▼]. Detailed operation by function groups 213 6.5.2 Selecting the command source Operation Details 6.5.2.1 Setting the run/stop command source (FUN_01) The L100 inverter provides four different options for run and stop commands: two terminal input options (terminal 1 and 2) that uses digital input FX/RX, keypad input, and network input utilizing CAN or RS232 communication. The default setting for the input option is the analog terminal input using terminal 1. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_01 Run/Stop Src RUN/STOP command source 0 (Terminal 1) 1 (Terminal 2) 2 (Keypad) 4 (CAN) 0 (Terminal 1) Terminal inputs: Terminal 1 and terminal 2 Run/stop command source Input settings Operation command Terminal 1 FX ON Forward operation command OFF Stop command RX ON Reverse operation command OFF Stop command Terminal 2 FX ON Operation command OFF Stop command RX ON Set reverse OFF Set forward Detailed operation by function groups 214 When voltage is used for speed reference, positive voltage is used for forward operation and negative voltage is used for reverse operation. The following table lists the motor’s rotating directions depending on the voltage operation command signals. Analog speed signal range FX / FWD / Network FWD command RX / REV / Network REV command 0 – +10 V Forward Reverse -10 – 0 V Reverse Forward 6.5.2.2 Setting the operation speed (FUN_02) The L100 inverter provides four different options for operation speed commands: digital input via the keypad (“Keypad1”), digital input via the keypad (”Keypad2”), analog terminal input, and network input utilizing the CAN communication. When “Keypad1” is selected for speed reference, set FUN_12 (Speed 0) to the required speed reference using the [▲] and [▼], and then press [ENT] to apply it. When “Keypad2” is selected, the speed reference is applied as soon as it is set on the keypad, without pressing [ENT]. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_02 Spd Ref Src Speed reference source 0 (Analog) 1 (Keypad 1) 2 (Keypad 2) 4 (CAN) - Keypad 1 6.5.2.3 Setting the stop mode options (FUN_03) FUN_03 (Stop Mode) is used to select stop mode options. If “Decel” is selected for the stop mode, the motor decelerates based on the “deceleration time1” set at FUN_42 before it fully stops. If it fails to stop within the deceleration time, the motor free-runs after deceleration. Detailed operation by function groups 215 If “Free-run” is selected, the motor performs a free-run without deceleration. Operation Details If “DC-Brake” is selected, DC voltage is injected into the motor during deceleration to brake and stop it. This option is available only when the control mode is set to “V/F”, or “Slip Comp.” Refer to FUN_06–FUN_09 for information about using the DC brake. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_03 Stop Mode Stop mode options 0(Decel) 1(Free-run) 2(DC-Brake) Decel 6.5.3 DC-braking stop (FUN_06–FUN_09) Codes FUN_06 through FUN_09 are used to set the DC-braking options. When a stop command is given, the inverter decelerates the motor. During motor deceleration, when the operation frequency reaches the DC-braking frequency set at FUN_06, DC voltage is provided to the motor and stops it. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_06 Dcbr Freq DC braking start frequency PAR_12– PAR_11 Hz 1.00 FUN_07 Dcblk Time Output block time before DC braking 0.00–60.00 sec 0.00 FUN_08 Dcbr Value DC braking amount 0–200 % 10 FUN_09 Dcbr Time DC braking time 0.0–60.0 sec 1.0 Detailed operation by function groups 216 6.5.4 Start after DC-braking: Dc-Start (FUN_10– FUN_11) FUN_10 and FUN_11 are used to set options when stopping the motor using DC-braking, and then restarting it. DC voltage is applied to the motor for a set time to stop it, and then the inverter accelerates the motor from its stopped state. This function is useful in the operations where the motor has to be fully stopped before it runs again, and the motor is still rotating from the previous operation. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_10 Dcst Value DC-braking amount for start after DC-barking 0–200 % 10 FUN_11 Dcst Time DC-braking time for start after DC-braking 0.0–60.0 sec 0.0 If a DC-braking amount that exceeds the inverter’s rated current is set for this operation, the DC-braking amount is limited to the inverter’s rated current. Detailed operation by function groups 217 Operation Details • While using “DC-braking stop” or “start after DC-braking,” if a DC-braking amount that exceeds the inverter’s rated current is set, the DC-braking amount is limited to the inverter’s rated current. The motor may be overheated and be damaged, or an inverter overload fault trip (IOLT) may occur if the DC-braking amount is set too great, or if the DC-braking time is set too long. If motor overheating or inverter overload fault trip occurs, decrease the DC-braking amount or time. • DC-braking is available only when FUN_03 (Stop mode) is set to “DC-Brake”. 6.5.5 Setting the speed reference for multistep operations 6.5.5.1 Multistep speed 0–7 (FUN_12–19) When the multifunction input terminals are set for multispeed operation, the speed reference is decided by a combination of multifunction terminal inputs (P1–P7). The following table lists the multistep speed by a combination of inputs at terminals P1, P2, P3, and P4. P1 (Speed-L) P2 (Speed-M) P3 (Speed-H) Speed OFF OFF OFF Speed reference by the setting at FUN_12 or V1/ I1 analog input ON OFF OFF FUN_13 (Multistep speed1) OFF ON OFF FUN_14 (Multistep speed2) ON ON OFF FUN_15 (Multistep speed3) OFF OFF ON FUN_16 (Multistep speed4) ON OFF ON FUN_17 (Multistep speed5) OFF ON ON FUN_18 (Multistep speed6) Detailed operation by function groups 218 P1 (Speed-L) P2 (Speed-M) P3 (Speed-H) Speed ON ON ON FUN_19 (Multistep speed7) If multistep speed 0 (P1, P2, P3 are all turned off) is selected, digital input on the keypad, analog input at the terminal block, or the network input via CAN or RS232 communication terminals may be used as the speed reference depending on the frequency reference source settings. Jog operation takes priority over other operations. If jog operation signal is received at terminal P4, all other terminal inputs are ignored, and jog operation is performed based on the jog speed set at FUN_20. The following table lists the range of multistep speed references and the default settings. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_12 Speed 0 Multispeed 0 0.0–PAR_11 Hz/rpmNote1) 0.0 FUN_13 Speed 1 Multispeed 1 0.0–PAR_11 Hz/rpmNote1) 0.0 FUN_14 Speed 2 Multispeed 2 0.0–PAR_11 Hz/rpmNote1) 0.0 FUN_15 Speed 3 Multispeed 3 0.0–PAR_11 Hz/rpmNote1) 0.0 FUN_16 Speed 4 Multispeed 4 0.0–PAR_11 Hz/rpmNote1) 0.0 FUN_17 Speed 5 Multispeed 5 0.0–PAR_11 Hz/rpmNote1) 0.0 FUN_18 Speed 6 Multispeed 6 0.0–PAR_11 Hz/rpmNote1) 0.0 FUN_19 Speed 7 Multispeed 7 0.0–PAR_11 Hz/rpmNote1) 0.0 Note 1) Speed unit: “Hz” is used in “V/F” or “Slip Comp” operation modes. “rpm” is used in “Speed(IM)” or “Speed(PM)” operation modes. Set values are automatically converted according to the speed units (rpm and Hz). • PAR_11 is used to setup the maximum motor speed. Detailed operation by function groups 219 6.5.6 Frequency jump (Jump Freq) Operation Details Frequency jump is used to avoid mechanical resonance of the inverter, with other devices. The inverter will not accept frequency settings that are within a preset frequency jump band during acceleration or deceleration. Any frequency that belongs in the jump frequency ranges cannot be used as the inverter’s frequency reference. If jump frequencies are reached during acceleration, the inverter maintains the frequency jump low limit, and then resumes acceleration when the speed reference (via digital, analog, CAN, or RS232 input) gets out of the jump frequency. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_27 Jump Lo 1 Jump frequency low limit 1 0.00–FUN_28 Hz 10.00 FUN_28 Jump Hi 1 Jump frequency high limit 1 FUN_27–FUN_29 Hz 15.00 FUN_29 Jump Lo 2 Jump frequency low limit 2 FUN_28–FUN_30 Hz 20.00 FUN_30 Jump Hi 2 Jump frequency high limit 2 FUN_29–FUN_31 Hz 25.00 FUN_31 Jump Lo 3 Jump frequency low limit 3 FUN_30–FUN_32 Hz 30.00 FUN_32 Jump Hi 3 Jump frequency high limit 3 FUN_31–PAR_11 Hz 35.00 Detailed operation by function groups 220 6.5.7 Setting acceleration and deceleration patterns and times 6.5.7.1 Setting acceleration/deceleration speed reference (FUN_33) FUN_33 is used to define acceleration and deceleration time based on the motor maximum speed or speed reference. For example, when FUN_33 is set to “Max Speed”, if motor maximum speed is set to 3,000 rpm, and the acceleration time is set to 5 seconds, acceleration time taken for the motor to reach 1,500 rpm becomes 2.5 seconds. When FUN_33 is set to “Ref Speed,” the acceleration and deceleration times can be configured based on the time taken to reach the next speed reference regardless of the motor maximum speed. Detailed operation by function groups 221 For example, for a multistep operation of 2 speeds (500 and 1,500 rpm), if Operation Details acceleration time is set to 5 seconds, the operation can be illustrated as shown in the figure below. 6.5.7.2 S-curve acceleration/deceleration pattern 1–2 (FUN_36– 39) Acceleration/deceleration gradient level patterns can be configured to enhance and smooth the inverter’s acceleration and deceleration curves. While linear pattern features a linear increase or decrease to the output frequency, at a fixed rate, an S-curve pattern provides a smoother and more gradual increase or decrease of output frequency, ideal for lift-type loads or elevator doors, etc. Acceleration/deceleration patterns can be defined by the parameter settings listed in the following table. Codes FUN_36–FUN_39 define the curvature. Codes FUN_36 and FUN_37are for acceleration, while FUN_38, FUN_39 are for deceleration. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_36 Acc S Start S-curve rate at acceleration 1 0.0–50.0 % 0.0 FUN_37 Acc S End S-curve rate at acceleration 2 0.0–50.0 % 0.0 FUN_38 Dec S Start S-curve rate at deceleration 1 0.0–50.0 % 0.0 FUN_39 Dec S End S-curve rate at deceleration 2 0.0–50.0 % 0.0 Detailed operation by function groups 222 Examples of S-curve acceleration/deceleration patterns are as follows. Basic formula • St1_time = AccTime * (S-curve rate deceleration 1/ 50.0%) • St2_time = AccTime * (S-curve rate at acceleration 2/ 50.0%) • St1_Δrpm = St1_time * (MaxSpeed / AccTime) * 0.5 • St2_Δrpm = St2_time * (MaxSpeed / AccTime) * 0.5 Calculation 1 When Δrpm ≥ (St1_Δrpm + St2_Δrpm), where Δrpm is the difference between the current speed and the speed reference: • L_time = (Δrpm–St1_Δrpm–St2_Δrpm) x (AccTime / MaxSpeed) • Total acceleration time = St1_time + L_time + St2_time Detailed operation by function groups 223 Calculation 2 Operation Details When Δrpm<(St1_Δrpm + St2_Δrpm), where Δrpm is the difference between the current speed and the speed reference: • St1’_time = √{ [Δrpm x AccTime2 x St1_time2] / [ 25 x MaxSpeed x (St1_time + St2_time) ] } • St2’_time = √{ [Δrpm x AccTime2 x St2_time2] / [ 25 x MaxSpeed x (St1_time + St2_time) ] } • Total acceleration time = St1’_time + St2’_time - MaxSpeed is set at PAR_11 - AccTime is set at FUN_41, 43, 45, 47 - St1_∆rpm: S-curve acceleration setting 1 (FUN_36) is used when accelerating, and Scurve deceleration setting 2 (FUN_39) is used when decelerating. - St2_∆rpm: S-curve acceleration setting 2 (FUN_37) is used when accelerating, and Scurve deceleration setting 2 (FUN_38) is used when decelerating. - St1_time: St1_∆rpm section - St2_time: St2_∆rpm section S-curve acceleration gradient 1 (FUN_36) Sets the gradient level as acceleration starts when using an S-curve acceleration pattern. The gradient is for the first half of the acceleration section. When the speed reference is 60 Hz and the maximum frequency is 60 Hz, if FUN_36 is set to 50%, S-curve acceleration gradient 1 is used for the 0–30 Hz section of the acceleration. S-curve acceleration gradient 2 (FUN_37) Sets the gradient level as acceleration ends when using an S-curve acceleration pattern. The gradient is for the second half of the acceleration section. When the speed reference is 60 Hz and the maximum frequency is 60 Hz, if FUN_37 is set to 50%, S-curve acceleration gradient 2 is used for the 30–60 Hz section of the acceleration. Detailed operation by function groups 224 S-curve deceleration gradient 1 (FUN_38) Sets the gradient level as deceleration starts when using an S-curve deceleration pattern. The gradient is for the first half of the deceleration section. When the speed reference is 60 Hz and the maximum frequency is 60 Hz, if FUN_38 is set to 50%, S-curve deceleration gradient 1 is used for the 60–30 Hz section of the deceleration. S-curve deceleration gradient 2 (FUN_39) Sets the gradient level as deceleration ends when using an S-curve deceleration pattern. The gradient is for the second half of the acceleration section. When the speed reference is 60 Hz and the maximum frequency is 60 Hz, if FUN_39 is set to 50%, S-curve acceleration gradient 2 is used for the 30–0 Hz section of the deceleration. 6.5.7.3 Acceleration/deceleration times 1–4 (FUN_41–48) You can define 4 different acceleration or deceleration times to use with the selected patterns. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_41 Acc Time-1 acceleration time 1 0.00–600.00 sec 2.00 FUN_42 Dec Time-1 deceleration time 1 0.00–600.00 sec 2.00 FUN_43 Acc Time-2 acceleration time 2 0.00–600.00 sec 3.00 FUN_44 Dec Time-2 deceleration time 2 0.00–600.00 sec 3.00 FUN_45 Acc Time-3 acceleration time 3 0.00–600.00 sec 4.00 FUN_46 Dec Time-3 deceleration time 3 0.00–600.00 sec 4.00 FUN_47 Acc Time-4 acceleration time 4 0.00–600.00 sec 5.00 FUN_48 Dec Time-4 deceleration time 4 0.00–600.00 sec 5.00 Set the multifunction input terminals for acceleration/deceleration time selection Detailed operation by function groups 225 to switch between the acceleration or deceleration times. Operation Details The following is an example where multifunction input terminals P1 and P2 are used for acceleration/deceleration time selection. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Parameter setting DIO_01 P1 Define Defines P1 input Xcel–L DIO_02 P2 Define Defines P2 input Xcel–H The following is an example of setting multifunction terminals P1, P2, and P3 to switch between the acceleration/deceleration times, and to use the soft start cancel function. P1 (Xcel-L) P2 (Xcel-H) P3 (SoftStartCncl) Acc/Dec time OFF OFF OFF Acceleration/Deceleration 1 ON OFF OFF Acceleration/Deceleration 2 OFF ON OFF Acceleration/Deceleration 3 ON ON OFF Acceleration/Deceleration 4 X X ON Fastest Acceleration/Deceleration available Detailed operation by function groups 226 6.5.7.4 Emergency stop deceleration time (FUN_51) and emergency stop terminal input low pass filter (FUN_52) If any emergency arises during operation, you can use the BX (emergency stop) signal input at the terminal block to stop the motor operation immediately. Once the BX input is provided, the motor decelerates based on the “Emergency stop deceleration gradient” set at FUN_51, and then it stops. If the motor cannot complete a full-stop within the set time, it continues to perform a free-run stop. If you need to allow to motor to free run as soon as the BX signal input is provided, set FUN_51 to “0”. Also, set the time constant for the low pass filter at FUN_52 (BX Termi LPF) to avoid noise interference if the noise level is high at the installation site. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_51 BX Time Emergency stop deceleration time 0.0–6000.0 sec 0.0 FUN_52 BX Termi LPF Emergency stop terminal input low pass filter 0–2000 ms 0 Detailed operation by function groups 227 Operation Details < BX time (FUN_51) set to a value other than “0”> Detailed operation by function groups 228 6.5.7.5 Setting the Motor Pre-excite time (FUN_53) Pre-excitation refers to a process where power is supplied to the coils in the motor to magnetize them before the motor rotation begins. Because preexcitation creates flux in a motor by magnetizing the coils and gets the motor ready to run, it enhances motor’s acceleration response in a system where a high starting torque is required. During pre-excitation, the [FWD] and [REV] indicators flash simultaneously. • The pre-excite time set at FUN_53 is used only when FUN_02 (Spd Ref Sel) is set to “Keypad1”, or “Keypad2”. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_53 PreExct Time Motor Pre-excite time 0–10000 ms 0 6.5.7.6 Zero-speed time after a stop (FUN_54) FUN_54 (Hold time) is used to set the time for the motor to stay at the zerospeed after a deceleration stop. When the motor is running a load with high inertia, this function can prevent a motor movement by the residual inertia. Detailed operation by function groups 229 Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting Operation Details FUN_54 Hold Time Zero-speed time after a stop 10–10000 ms 1000 6.5.7.7 Acceleration/deceleration time scale (FUN_40) FUN_40 (Acc/dec time scale) is used when the precise acceleration/deceleration time is need depending on the characteristics of load or the maximum acceleration/deceleration time needs to be increased. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_11 Time Scale Acc/dec time scale 0 (0.01 sec) 1 (0.1 sec) 0 (0.01 sec) The parameters that acceleration/deceleration time scale is applied is as follows. Code Keypad display Name Code Keypad display Name FUN_41 Acc Time-1 Acceleration time 1 FUN_45 Acc Time-3 Acceleration time 3 FUN_42 Dec Time-1 Deceleration time 1 FUN_46 Dec Time-3 Deceleration time 3 FUN_43 Acc Time-2 Acceleration time 2 FUN_47 Acc Time-4 Acceleration time 4 FUN_44 Dec Time-2 Deceleration time 2 FUN_48 Dec Time-4 Deceleration time 4 Detailed operation by function groups 230 6.5.8 Setting parameters for short floor operations (FUN_56, FUN_57) When the multistep speed operation is used to control elevator speed, repeated short trip patterns can reduce the overall riding quality of the elevator. Use the inverter’s ‘Short Floor’ function to improve elevator speed control FUN_56 (ShortFlr speed) and FUN_57 (ShortFlr time). The inverter’s short floor control is for acceleration speed only and is not available in the features dedicated for elevators that use ELIO. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_56 ShortFlr Spd Short floor operation speed 0.0–PAR_11 Hz /rpm 0.00 FUN_57 ShortFlrTime Short floor operation time 0.00–100.00 sec 0.00 For example, when multifunction input terminals P1 and P2 are set to “Speed-L” and “Speed-M,” and if FUN_12 and FUN_13 are set with smaller values the setting at FUN_56, and the setting at FUN_14 is greater than the settings at FUN_56, the following operation becomes available. (Set FUN_57 to “0” or other fixed value). Example 1: Elevator running speed is less than the short floor speed and the short floor speed is not set at “0”. When the motor starts and accelerates in the forward direction and multifunction input P2 is ON, a new speed reference is calculated if the signal at P2 is OFF. If the new speed reference is less than the speed set at FUN_56 (ShortFlr Spd), the motor accelerates to the new speed reference and maintains the speed for the time set at FUN_57. After the operation time has elapsed, the motor runs at the speed set at FUN_12. Use the following formula to calculate the new speed reference. • New speed reference = Current speed + ([FUN_04] ⅹ [FUN_37]) If FUN_37 is set to “0”, the current speed becomes the new speed reference. Detailed operation by function groups 231 Operation Details Example 2: Elevator running speed is higher than the short floor speed and the short floor speed is not set at “0”. When the motor starts and accelerates in the forward direction while multifunction input P2 is ON, a new speed reference is calculated when the signal at P2 is turned OFF at a higher speed than the speed set at FUN_56 (ShortFlr Spd).After the motor speed reaches the newly calculated speed reference, the motor decelerates to the new speed reference set at FUN_12. If the FX signal is OFF, the motor stops. Use the formula in the previous example to calculate the new speed reference command. Detailed operation by function groups 232 Example 3: Elevator running speed is less than the short floor speed, or it is higher than the short floor speed and the short floor time is set to “0”. If FUN_57 is set to “0”, the motor decelerate from the current speed regardless of the setting at FUN_56, without applying the S-curve gradient. Then, it operates again at the speed set at FUN_12. Turning the FX signal OFF stops the motor. The new deceleration speed reference changes to the current operation speed. Detailed operation by function groups 233 Operation Details 6.5.9 Setting parameters for anti-hunting regulator During inverter operation, current hunting (distortion or oscillation of current) by mechanical resonance or other factors may adversely affect the load system. Set the anti-hunting regulation parameters to avoid it. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_58 AHR Sel Anti-hunting regulator options 0 (No) / 1 (Yes) - 1 (Yes) FUN_59 AHR PGain Anti-hunting regulator P gain 0.00–100.00 - 50.00 FUN_60 AHR Low Freq Anti-hunting regulator start frequency 0–60.00 Hz 3.00 FUN_61 AHR Hi Freq Anti-hunting regulator end frequency FUN_60– PAR_11 Hz 60.00 Anti-hunting regulator options (FUN_58) Set the parameter to enable or disable the anti-hunting regulator function. Detailed operation by function groups 234 Anti-hunting regulator P gain (FUN_59) Higher AHR (anti-hunting regulator) proportional gain enhances the responsiveness of the system and provides good hunting prevention. However, unstable current conditions may result if you set it too high. Anti-hunting regulator start/end frequency (FUN_60/FUN_61) FUN_60 and 61 are used to define the minimum and maximum frequency where the AHR function will operate. 6.5.10 Setting the operation speed and input voltage for battery operation Battery operation is an emergency measures to continue the inverter operation using the external battery when the power source is interrupted due to blackout or other reasons. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_67 Batt. Speed Battery operation speed PAR_12 - 6.66 / 0-200.0 Hz /rpm 1.66 FUN_68 Batt. Volt Battery input voltage 12–PAR_15 V 48 DIO_04 P4 Define Define P4 function Battery Run FUN_67 and FUN_68 are displayed only when one of the multifunction inputs DIO_01 –07 is set for “Battery Run”. FUN_67 is used to define the operation speed during the emergency operation on battery power. FUN_68 is used to define the battery input voltage during the emergency operation on battery power. To enable the inverter operation on battery, turn on the signal at the multifunction input that is set for the battery operation (“Battery Run”). The inverter runs on battery based on the speed set at FUN_67, and the low voltage fault trip level is Detailed operation by function groups 235 lowered. Operation Details To resume normal operation utilizing a commercial power source (380–440 Vac), turn off the signal at the multifunction input that is set for the battery operation (“Battery Run”). The inverter runs on the original power source and all other operating conditions will be reverted. Additional wiring connections are required for battery operation. • Run cables from two of the input terminals (R, S, or T) to the battery’s positive terminal via a magnetic contactor. • At the main input terminals, connect the DCN terminal N (-) to the battery negative terminal. • Supply UPS input voltage (220 V) to terminals AC1 and AC2. • To prevent inverter damage, an isolating transformer (100 VA) must be installed in the control board of the auxiliary power supply. • When the battery power is off, inverter may be damaged if the main power returns to on before the Low Voltage trip occurs. Turn on the main power after the Low Voltage trip occurs when the battery power is off. • For battery operation, the battery power always must be on when the auxiliary power is connected, and the auxiliary power must be off after the battery power turns off. Detailed operation by function groups 236 • During operation on battery, the current operation mode and “BAT” are displayed alternately on the top right corner of the keypad display. • If a multifunction output is set to “INV Ready,” the relevant terminal is turned off during a battery operation. Detailed operation by function groups 237 • After the power source is switched to battery, it takes about two seconds to Operation Details release the fault trip and adapt the internal voltage until the inverter is ready for operation. • If the voltage drops below 53% of the setting value at FUN_68, a low voltage fault trip occurs. • When operating the inverter on battery, take the battery capacity into consideration and operate the inverter slower than usual. • When setting the battery operation speed (FUN_67), the battery voltage (FUN_68), sync speed (PAR_14), and motor rated voltage (PAR_15) must be considered. Before switching the battery power to mains power, de-energize the battery’s magnetic contactor and stop the battery input signal. Then, supply mains power after a low voltage trip occurs. 6.5.11 ALLS (Automatic light load search) (FUN_69– FUN_72) When the inverter is running on battery, the ALLS function is used to move the elevator to the next closest floor that reduces the load. Set FUN-69 (ALLS Enable) to “1 (Enabled)” to activate this function. If the battery run signal is OFF while the inverter is operating via the battery supply, a fault trip occurs at the inverter. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_69 ALLS Enable ALLS options 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) FUN_70 ALLS DirChgT Hold time at internal FX, RX switching 1.0–10.0 sec 5.0 FUN_71 ALLS Time Light load search time (FUN-72)– 10.0 sec 5.0 FUN_72 ALLS LoadCkT Light load checking time 1.0–5.0 sec 2.0 Detailed operation by function groups 238 ALLS options (FUN_69) Enable or disable ALLS options. This option is available only when a multifunction input is set to “Battery Run”. Hold time at internal FX, RX switching (FUN_70) When ALLS is enabled, set the hold time (zero-speed time) for direction switching. Light load search time (FUN_71) When ALLS is enabled, set the load search time for the constant operations in FX/RX directions. Light load checking time (FUN_72) Sets the time period for the inverter to detect light load during the light load search time set at Fun_71. When forward operation has a lighter load: The graph below shows an example of an ALLS. In the example, the forward operation has a lighter load than the reverse operation. A forward or a reverse ALLS operation is run two seconds after an ALLS [T1] starts. When the output frequency reaches the value set at FUN_67 (T2), the operation speed is maintained for the time set at FUN_71. During this time, a load detection is performed for the time set at FUN_72 (D1 section). After the time set at FUN_71 has elapsed, the motor decelerates and stops. The motor remains in the stopped condition for the time set at FUN_70 (D2 section), and then another load detection is performed in the other rotational direction until it reaches T3. • When the FX/RX operation is complete, the motor stops for the time set at FUN_70 (T4). Then, the motor runs in the direction with the least load. • If a stop command is received during ALLS (T5), the motor decelerates and Detailed operation by function groups 239 stops. Operation Details < When forward operation has a lighter load> Detailed operation by function groups 240 When reverse operation has a lighter load: The graph below shows an example of an ALLS. In the example, the reverse operation has a lighter load than the forward operation. The operating principle is identical to an ALLS when the forward operation has a lighter load. However, once the inverter detects that the reverse direction has a lighter load (E1), an ALLS starts in the reverse direction without stopping the motor. < When reverse operation has a lighter load > Detailed operation by function groups 241 Loss of battery run signal during ALLS: Operation Details The battery run signal must be ON and FUN_69 (ALLS Enable) must be set to “YES” for ALLS to run. If the battery run signal is OFF during ALLS, the inverter output is immediately blocked, the motor decelerates at free-run, and then stops. If the battery run signal is OFF during ALLS, a “BatRun Fault” occurs. 6.5.12 Automatic load cell calculation Automatic load cell calculations allow for easy configuration of related parameters when an improvement is required to correct operational problems including roll-backs. When you operate the inverter with a load cell, full-load climbing and no-load descending operations must be performed to correctly configure the related parameters. 6.5.12.1Preparing a load cell calculation Connect the load cell output (0–10 V) to V1-GND terminal. Ensure that the load cell signals are correctly output during inverter operation. If any incorrect load cell signals are noticed, eliminate signal noise to correct it. Keypad display Description Set AiO_01 to “Torque Bias”. Set AIO_02 to “0–10 V”. For AIO_03 through AIO–10, use the default setting values unless adjustments are necessary. Detailed operation by function groups 242 Keypad display Description Set AIO_11 to 50ms, and then adjust the time value based on the presence of noise interference. 6.5.12.2Full-load climbing operation Move the elevator to the bottom floor, and load with its maximum capacity to make it fully loaded. Set the manual operation speed reference to “0 rpm” to perform a climbing operation. Refer to the following table and write down the values that are displayed on the keypad. Keypad display Description Move to DIS_01 and press [PROG]. The cursor flashes. Press [▲] until “Ai1 Value” is displayed. Then, note the value that is displayed. Set the manual operation speed reference to “0.0 rpm”. Then, record the torque that is displayed. Set the manual operation speed reference to “0.0 rpm”. Then, record the torque that is displayed. To display the torque on the keypad, E/L_58 (Display Sel) must be set to “Trq Output”. Detailed operation by function groups 243 6.5.12.3No-load descending operation Operation Details Move the elevator to the top floor, and unload it to make it a no-load condition. Set the manual operation speed reference to “0 rpm” to perform a descending operation. Refer to the following table and write down the values that are displayed on the keypad. Keypad display Description Move to DIS_01 and press [PROG]. The cursor flashes. Press [▲] until “Ai1 Value” is displayed. Then, note the value that is displayed. Set the manual operation speed reference to “0.0 rpm”. Then, write down the torque that is displayed. Set the manual operation speed reference to “0 rpm”. Then, write down the torque that is displayed. To display the torque on the keypad, E/L_58 (Display Sel) must be set to “Trq Output”. Detailed operation by function groups 244 6.5.12.4Keypad input Set CON_37 (Trq Bias Src) to “Analog”. Keypad display Description Set CON_37 (Trq Bias Src) to “Analog. Set FUN_73 (Use LoadCell) to “Yes”. Input the torque and Ai1 values for full-load climb at FUN_74–77. AIO_06 and CON_40 will be automatically set. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_73 Use LoadCell Use auto loadcell 0 (No)/1 (Yes) 1 (Yes) FUN_74 FullLoad Trq Full-load climb torque -250.0–250.0 % 100.0 FUN_75 FullLoad Ai Full-load climb Ai1 -100.0 –100.0 % 100.0 FUN_76 No load Trq No-load descent torque -250.0–250.0 % -100.0 FUN_77 No load Ai No-load descent Ai1 -100.0 –100.0 % 0.0 FUN_78 TrqRamp Time Torque current clime time 1–1000 ms 1 Check the following parameter setting values for correct calculation. Keypad display Description Formula: 100 x (Climb torque – Descent torque) ÷ (Climb Ai1 –descent Ai1) Formula: ABS (No-load descent torque) – (AIO_06 x [No-load descent Ai1]) /100 Note For correct calculation results, the analog input terminal Ai1 must be used when using the automatic load cell calculation. Detailed operation by function groups 245 6.5.13 Setting zero-speed deceleration time (FUN_94– Operation Details FUN_97) Codes FUN_95, FUN_96, and FUN_97 become available when FUN_94 (Use zero speed deceleration time) is set to “1 (Yes).” If the motor speed (Multistep speed0 set at FUN_12) is greater than the speed set at FUN_97 (Zero speed deceleration target speed), the motor decelerates and stops using the time set at FUN_95 (Zero speed deceleration time1). If the motor speed (Multistep speed0 set at FUN_12) is smaller than the speed set at FUN_97 (Zero speed deceleration target speed), the motor decelerates and stops using the time set at FUN_96 (Zero speed deceleration time2). Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting FUN_94 Use 0 Dec T Use zero speed deceleration time 0 (No) 1 (Yes) - 0 (No) FUN_95 0 Dec Time 1 Zero speed deceleration time 1 0.00 – 600.00 Sec 1.00 FUN_96 0 Dec Time 2 Zero speed deceleration time 2 0.00 – 600.00 Sec 3.00 FUN_97 0 Dec TarSpd Zero speed deceleration target speed 0.00 – PAR_11 Hz /rpm 0.0 When FUN_94 (Use zero speed deceleration time) is set to “0 (No)” The motor decelerates and stops using the time set at FUN_42 (Deceleration time1). Detailed operation by function groups 246 When FUN_94 (Use zero speed deceleration time) is set to “1 (Yes)” If FUN_12(Multistep speed0) > FUN_97 (Zero speed deceleration target speed): The motor decelerates and stops using the time set at FUN_95 (Zero speed deceleration time1). If FUN_12(Multistep speed0) < FUN_97 (Zero speed deceleration target speed): The motor decelerates and stops using the time set at FUN_96 (Zero speed deceleration time2). Detailed operation by function groups 247 Operation Details 6.6 Control (CON) group 6.6.1 Code jumping - accessing certain codes directly (CON_00) CON_00 code is used to directly access a certain code. The following is an example of jumping directly to CON_03 from CON_00 code. Press [PROG]. Use [SHIFT/ESC], [▲], or [▼] to change the code number to “03”. Press [ENT] to access CON_03 code. If an invalid code number is entered, the next available code number is automatically selected. Detailed operation by function groups 248 Note After jumping directly to a code, you can move to other codes by pressing [▲] or [▼]. 6.6.2 Speed controller PI ratio Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Parameter setting CON_02 ASR PI Ratio Speed controller gain ratio 1.0–500.0 % 20.0 CON_02 is only used with a synchronous motor. 6.6.3 Speed controller (Automatic Speed Regulator: ASR) Speed controller PI gain 1 (CON_03–04)/Speed Controller PI gain 2 (CON_06–07) When you switch two types of speed controller PI gain, LPF time constant (speed command value) also changes according to the selected gain. If the multifunction input terminal is set to OFF, the gain1 and LPF time constant are selected. If the multifunction input terminal is set to ON, the gain2 and LPF time constant are selected. The following table lists the examples of code settings when multifunction terminal P4 is set for ASR PI Gain switching. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting DIO_04 P4 define Multifunction input terminal P4 Definition ASR Gain Sel Detailed operation by function groups 249 You can set speed PI controller to P gain or I gain according to the “ARS Gain Operation Details Sel” of the multifunction input terminal. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_03 ASR P Gain1 Speed Controller proportional gain 1 0.1–500.0 % Induction motor 50.0 Synchronous motor 100.0 CON_04 ASR I Gain1 Speed Controller integral time 1 0–50000 ms Induction motor 300 Synchronous motor 50 CON_06 ASR P Gain2 Speed Controller proportional gain 2 0.1–500.0 % Induction motor 50.0 Synchronous motor 100.0 CON_07 ASR I Gain2 Speed Controller integral time 2 0–50000 ms Induction motor 300 Synchronous motor 50 Speed controller LPF time constant 1(CON_05)/Speed Controller LPF time constant 2 (CON_08) The following table lists the examples of LPF time constant code settings. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_05 ASR LPF1 ASR input LPF time constant 1 0–20000 ms 0 CON_08 ASR LPF2 ASR input LPF time constant 2 0–20000 ms 0 Detailed operation by function groups 250 Speed controller gain switching ramp time (CON_10)/Speed Controller gain switching Speed (CON_11) This function prevents a shock applied to the system due to a sudden change between P gain and l gain while switching ARS gain. When another value except for 0 is entered for CON_11 and the inverter’s speed exceeds the entered value, the P gain changes to Ramp, and the P gain 2 changes to the P gain 1. When the multifunction input terminal is set to “ARS Gain Sel” and the terminal is on, the speed gain switching activates. When the terminal is off, the speed gain switching deactivates. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_10 ASR Ramp Speed controller gain switching ramp time 10–10000 ms 1000 CON_11 ASR TarSpd Speed controller gain switching speed 0.0– PAR_11 rpm 0.0 CON_10 Gain Ramp Time P Gain CON_03 CON_06 Speed CON_11 ASR TarSpd Detailed operation by function groups 251 Operation Details How to set proportional gain and integral time of speed controller The proportional gain (%) of speed controller is scaled to have the same value of the torque reference (%) when the speed error is rated slip. The integral time is the time it takes until the output torque changes from 0 to 100% when the speed error is rated slip. When the proportional gain is 100% and the speed error is rated slip, the speed controller output has the same value of 100% torque. CON_10 Gain Ramp Time P Gain OFF ON CON_03 CON_06 P4 (ASR Gain Sel) Speed CON_11 ASR TarSpd Detailed operation by function groups 252 The response time must be checked after each parameter adjustment. E.g.) Check the response after adjusting CON_02 – Check the response after adjusting CON_03 Option CON_02 Note1) CON_03 CON_04 Description To speed up the response Slower Faster Slower The respond times speed up, but the system is unstable, and the motor vibration and overshoot are increased. To slow down the response Faster Slower Faster Motor vibration and overshoot are decreased, but the response times speed down. Note 1) Displayed only when the operation mode (PAR_07) is set to “Speed (PM).” 6.6.4 Overshoot Prevention This function prevents the motor’s feedback speed from overshooting. overshoot prevention gain (CON_09) If a value other than ‘0’ is set at CON_09, the overshoot prevention function is active. The overshoot rate for motor feedback speed varies based on the motor’s inertia set at (PAR_57). Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_09 ASR FF Gain Overshoot prevention gain 0–1000 % 0 Detailed operation by function groups 253 6.6.5 Torque-related parameters Operation Details The torque limit definition, forward/backward/ regenerated torque limit (CON_33–36) Because the motor’s torque output is calculated internally in the vector control, the torque limit can be set within a specific value. Use this function when you want to permit the torque within a specific limit or when you want a certain amount of regenerated energy. The torque limit can be set differently by Forward, Reverse, or Regeneration mode which is changed according to the motor operation type. Each operation mode may be configured to take inputs from the function code settings and CAN communication. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_33 Trq Lmt Src Torque limit definition See below Kpd Kpd Kpd Motor rpm(REV) Motor rpm(FWD) Detailed operation by function groups 254 Torque limit definition The torque limit value is set according to the CON_33 code value. CON_33 code setting Forward torque limit Reverse torque limit Regeneration torque limit 0 (Kpd Kpd Kpd) CON_34 CON_35 CON_36 8 (CAN CAN CAN) Forward torque limit Reverse torque limit Regeneration torque limit Vx is the value set as the torque limit from the terminal block Analog input. The torque current standard The torque current standard is used to transform torque reference input into current reference. The torque current standard is calculated from the motor’s rated current and flux current. By default, the motor’s rated current and flux current are set for HEIGEN vector motors based on the motor capacity set at PAR_09. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_09 Motor Select Motor capacity option 2.2–22.0 kW Varies by motor capacity. PAR_19 Rated-Curr Motor rated current 1.0–1000.0 A PAR_52 Flux-Curr Motor flux current 0.0 – 70% of PAR_19 A Torque bias options (CON_37)/torque bias value (CON_38) When CON_37 is set to “1 (Analog),” torque bias is provided via analog inputs (AIO_01, Torque bias). When CON_37 is set to “2 (Keypad)” or “4 (CAN),” torque bias is provided via keypad input (CON_38, Torque bias value) or input from CAN communication. When you use the multifunction terminal block input, 0–10 V voltage input is converted and used as 0–200% input value. Torque bias can also be adjusted by setting gain and bias values. Detailed operation by function groups 255 Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting Operation Details CON_37 Trq Bias Src Torque bias option 0 (None) 1 (Analog) 2 (Keypad) 4 (CAN) 0 (None) CON_38 Trq Bias Torque bias value -150.0–150.0 % 0.0 Torque bias options When one of the multifunction input terminals P1–P7 is set to “Use Trq Bias,” torque bias is enabled or disabled when input signal to the multifunction input terminal is turned On or Off. The following table lists an example of code setting when multifunction terminal P5 is set for this function. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting DIO_05 P5 Define Multifunction input terminal P5 Definition Use Trq Bias Select the source of torque bias by configuring CON_37(Trq Bias Src) and define the relevant codes as follows. Code Keypad display Name Range Application CON_37 Trq Bias Src Torque bias options 0 (None) Torque bias is not used. 1 (Analog) Set the following codes: AIO_01(Ai1 Define): “Torque Bias” AIO_02(Ai1 Source): “0–10V” (voltage input to V1 terminal) AIO_06(Ai1 Out Y2): “200%” CON_40(Trq Balance): 100% 2 (Keypad) Set CON_38(Trq Bias) 4 (CAN) Set CAN communication Detailed operation by function groups 256 If one of the multifunction input terminals P1–P7 has NOT been set to “Use Trq Bias,” setting CON_37 alone can immediately begin applying torque bias to the operation. Torque bias compensation for loss by friction (CON_39) This is the torque bias to compensate the loss by friction. Because the loss by friction is changed by the motor’s rotation direction, the torque bias is added by multiply the sign according to the rotation direction. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_39 Trq Bias FF torque bias compensation for loss by friction -150.0–150.0 % 0.0 Torque balance value (CON_40) Use a load cell to balance the amount of load torque feedback while operating lift-type loads. When a load cell is used, the compensation is made based on the load cell’s output torque from the balanced state of the load. Balance the load of the lift and the counterweight to be exactly even, and then adjust the value at CON_40 to 100%. The value that appears when you press [PROG] on the keypad is the load cell voltage input to the inverter. Press [▲] or [▼] to adjust the percentage (%) to make this value the reference for compensation. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_40 Trq Balance Torque balance value 0.0–100.0 % 50.0 Detailed operation by function groups 257 6.6.6 Torque boost Operation Details Torque boost enables users to adjust output voltage at low speed or during motor start. This feature increases low speed torque or improves motor starting properties by manually increasing output voltage. Manual torque boost is suited for loads that require high starting torque, such as elevators. 6.6.6.1 Manual torque boost When the inverter control mode is set to V/F or slip comp, the inverter controls the open loop. To prevent situations where users cannot start the inverter due to insufficient torque, users can set a torque boost values and provide additional voltage to the inverter. The additional voltage is generated at a fixed ratio of a frequency. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON-41 Torque boost Torque boost method 0 (Manual) 1 (Auto) 0 (Manual) CON-42 Fwd boost Forward torque boost 0.0–20.0 % 2.0 CON-43 Reverse boost Reverse torque boost 0.0–20.0 % 2.0 Forward torque boost (CON_42) When the inverter rotates the motor in the forward direction, this function adjusts the level of torque boost. Reverse torque boost (CON_43) When the inverter rotates the motor in the reverse direction, this function adjusts the level of torque boost. Detailed operation by function groups 258 Manual torque boost adjusts the inverter output based on the setting values regardless of the amount of the load. • Excessive torque boost will result in failures due to motor overheat or overcurrent. • An overcurrent trip may occur also when the load is heavy and the torque boost is low. Detailed operation by function groups 259 6.6.6.2 Auto torque boost Operation Details Auto torque boost can be used when CON_41 is set to “1 (Auto).” Auto torque boost enables the inverter to automatically calculate the amount of output voltage required for torque boost based on the amount of load. It automatically compensates for the amount of load unlike manual torque boost that adjusts the inverter output regardless of the amount of the load. Auto torque boost adjusts the output voltage based on the ATB Gain_M and ATB Gain_G values at CON_46 and CON_47. It is used when the torque is insufficient for motor starting or in overcurrent conditions. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON41 Torque boost Torque boost method 0 (Manual) 1 ( Auto) 0 (Manual) CON42 Fwd boost Forward torque boost 0.0–20.0 % 2.0 CON43 Reverse boost Reverse torque boost 0.0–20.0 % 2.0 CON45 ATB Filter Gain Auto torque boost filter gain 1–10000 ms 200 CON46 ATB Gain M Auto torque boost motoring voltage gain 0–300.0 % 15.0 CON47 ATB Gain G Auto torque boost regeneration voltage gain 0–300.0 % 10.0 Auto torque boost filter gain (CON_45) The filter gain used to calculate the auto torque boost value. Auto torque boost motoring voltage gain (CON_46) The voltage gain used to calculate the motoring auto torque boost value. Detailed operation by function groups 260 Auto torque boost regeneration voltage gain (CON_47) This is the voltage gain used to calculate the regeneration auto torque boost value. When not loaded Detailed operation by function groups 261 When not loaded, the additional voltage for the auto torque boost is 0. It is same Operation Details as the normal manual boost value. When loaded Detailed operation by function groups 262 The graph above shows the auto torque boost wave when a load is applied. When loaded, voltage compensation varies depending on the operation direction and motoring operation. When the control mode is set to “Slip Comp”, the CON_41 Torque Boost mode is automatically configured to Auto. The current hunting may occur if the value in CON_42 and CON 43 are different when using the torque boost while not loaded. Detailed operation by function groups 263 6.6.7 V/F (Voltage/Frequency) control Operation Details V/F control is used to configure the inverter’s output voltages, gradient levels, and output patterns to achieve a target output frequency. The amount of torque boost used during low frequency operations can also be adjusted. 6.6.7.1 V/F voltage pattern CON_48 V/F pattern: Linear A linear V/F pattern configures the inverter to increase or decrease the output voltage at a fixed rate based on the V/F ratio, according to the increase or decrease of the operating frequency. Detailed operation by function groups 264 6.6.7.2 User V/F pattern (User V/F) You can set the configuration of user-defined V/F patterns to suit the load characteristics of special-purpose motors. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON-48 V/F pattern Output voltage pattern for output frequency 0 (Linear) 2 (User V/F) 0 (Linear) CON-49 User freq 1 User freq 1 0–CON_51 Hz 15.00 CON-50 User volt 1 User volt 1 0–100 % 25 CON-51 User freq 2 User freq 2 CON_49– CON_53 Hz 30.00 CON-52 User volt 2 User volt 2 0–100 % 50 CON-53 User freq 3 User freq 3 CON_51– CON_55 Hz 45.00 CON-54 User volt 3 User volt 3 0–100 % 75 CON-55 User freq 4 User freq 4 CON_55– PAR_11 Hz 60.00 CON-56 User volt 4 User volt 4 0–100 % 100 When the base frequency, minimum frequency, and motor rated voltage are set in the inverter, and users want to generate the V/F voltage pattern after setting the user V/F, users should set CON_49–CON_56. When the setting is entered, the inverter generates the user-defined voltage values for a specific frequency when the operation command is ON. Detailed operation by function groups 265 Operation Details For induction motors, a pattern that deviates sharply from linear V/F pattern must not be used. Patterns that deviates sharply from linear V/F pattern can result in insufficient motor torque or over-excitation and cause motor overheating. When a user V/F pattern is in use, torque boost does not operate. When the control mode is V/F, or Slip Comp, the direction cannot be changed during operation. To change the current direction, stop the inverter and allow the operation command in the required direction. Detailed operation by function groups 266 6.6.8 Motor output voltage control (CON_57) When the input power and rated motor voltage are different, enter the voltage displayed on the motor’s nameplate to configure the motor voltage. The configured voltage value becomes the output voltage for the base frequency. If the frequency is higher than the base frequency and the input voltage is higher than the parameter setting, the inverter regulates it and supplies the rated voltage to the motor. However, if the frequency is higher than the base frequency and the input voltage is lower than the rated motor voltage, the inverter supplies the input voltage to the motor. Detailed operation by function groups 267 6.6.9 Slip compensation Operation Details Slip refers to the difference between the set frequency (synchronous speed) and the motor rotation speed. As the load increases, difference between the set frequency and the motor rotation speed can occur. Slip compensation is used for loads that experience speed variations and require compensating speed. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_63 SlipCompFreq Slip compensation operation frequency 0.00–120.00 Hz 5.00 CON_64 SlipGain_MH Slip compensation motoring gain H 0–1000 % 100.0 CON_65 SlipGain_ML Slip compensation monitoring gain L 0–1000 % 100.0 CON_67 SlipGain_GH Slip compensation generation gain H 0–1000 % 100 CON_68 SlipGain_GL Slip compensation generation gain L 0–1000 % 100 CON_69 Slip Filter Slip compensation filter time constant 10–10000 ms 500 PAR-07 Control Mode Control mode 2 (Speed(IM) ) 4 (V/F) 5 (Slip Comp) 6 (Speed(PM)) 2 (Speed(IM)) PAR-12 Min Speed Inverter output minimum frequency 0.10–10.0 Hz 0.50 PAR-13 Base Freq Inverter base frequency 30.00–120.00 Hz 60.00 PAR-15 Rated Volt Motor rated voltage 300–528 V 380 PAR-18 Rated Slip Motor rated slip 0.10–25.00 Hz 1.66 PAR-19 Rated Curr Motor rated current 0–Motor rated Current A 15 PAR-52 Flux-Curr Excitation current 0–Motor rated A 6.3 Detailed operation by function groups 268 Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting (Motor no load current) Current CON-48 V/F pattern Output voltage pattern 0 (linear) 2 (User V/F) 0 (Linear) CON-41 Torque boost Torque boost method 0 (Manual) 1 (Auto) 1 (Auto) CON-42 Fwd boost Forward torque boost 0.0–20.0 % 2.0 CON-43 Reverse boost Reverse torque boost 0.0–20.0 % 2.0 CON-45 ATB Filter Gain Auto torque boost filter gain 1–10000 ms 200 CON-46 ATB Gain M Auto torque boost reverse voltage gain 0.0–300.0 % 15.0 CON-47 ATB Gain G Auto torque boost regeneration voltage gain 0.0–300.0 % 10.0 Slip compensation starting frequency (CON_63) Set the frequency to use when slip compensation starts. Slip compensation motoring gain (CON_64, CON_65) Set values for motoring gain when the output frequency exceeds the slip compensation gain frequency. Gain values can be individually set for reverse and regeneration operation. Slip compensation generation gain (CON_67, CON_68) Set values for generation gain when the output frequency is lower than the slip compensation gain frequency. Detailed operation by function groups 269 Slip compensation filter time constant (CON_69) Operation Details Slip compensation filter time constant refers to the filter time constant used for calculating the required current for slip compensation. If load is allowed after reaching the target frequency: When the motor is not loaded and the target frequency is reached, the inverter outputs the combined frequency of the user-defined target frequency and slip frequency. When the control mode is V/F or Slip Comp, the direction of rotation cannot be changed during operation. To change the direction of rotation, stop the motor and configure the operation command for the desired direction. Detailed operation by function groups 270 6.6.10 Anti Rollback Function Use this function to prevent roll back and to maintain the starting torque. The function does this by compensating for initial load without using the loadcell while elevator is operated. Anti Rollback time (CON_71) If a value other than ‘0’ is set at CON_71 Anti-Rollback Time, the anti-rollback function is active. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_71 ARF Time Anti rollback time 0–10000 ms 0 Anti Rollback speed controller P/I gain (CON_72–73) When anti-rollback is active, Speed Controller P/I gain can be set. Detailed operation by function groups 271 The value set at CON_72 must be higher than the value set at CON_03. Operation Details Increase the setting value if rollback occurs and decrease it if vibration and noise occur. Enter a value at CON_73 that is less than the value set at CON_04. Decrease the setting value if rollback occurs and increase it if vibration and noise occur. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_72 ARF ASR P Anti rollback ASR P gain 1–3000 % 100 CON_73 ARF ASR I Anti rollback ASR I gain 1–50000 ms 5 Anti Rollback location control P gain (CON_74) Set the location controller P gain for anti-rollback. Increase the setting value if rollback occurs and decrease it if vibration and noise occur. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_74 ARF APR P Anti rollback APR P gain 1–9999 % 200 Motor inertia value (PAR_57) Enter a value for motor inertia. When an inertia value is shown on the motor’s rating plate, enter the rated value. If an inertia value is not shown, adjust the settings based on anti-rollback performance. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PAR_57 Inertia Motor inertia number 0.001–60.000 kgm2 Asynch: 0.072 Synch: 5.000 Note The motor can generate noise based on the anti-rollback settings for APR and ASR gain. Detailed operation by function groups 272 6.6.11 Automatic current regulator (ACR)) Use this function to control the torque current and flux current. The following parameters may be used to adjust the amount of gains that have already been calculated. The current controller gain is affected by motor parameter settings. q axis current regulator P/I gain (CON_88–89) Set the q axis P/I gain of the current regulator to adjust the torque current (q-axis current). Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_88 ACR P Gain q axis current controller P gain 10–2000 % 100 CON_89 ACR I Gain q axis current controller I gain 10–2000 % 100 d axis current regulator P/I gain (CON_90–91) Set the d axis P/I gain of the current regulator to adjust the flux current (d-axis current). Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_90 ACRd P Gain d axis current controller P gain 10–2000 % 100 CON_91 ACRd I Gain d axis current controller I gain 10–2000 % 100 Detailed operation by function groups 273 6.6.12 Flux current level control Operation Details To facilitate proper speed control at the start of a motor operation, the motor flux must be quickly established. For this, the output current of the inverter may be controlled based on the motor flux current (PAR_52, Flux-Curr). Flux current level (CON_92) Decrease the value set at CON_92 (FluxCurr Lvl) if an overcurrent trip occurs when the motor starts up. An overcurrent trip may occur at the motor startup if the flux current level is set too high. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting CON_92 FluxCurr Lvl Flux current level 0.0–100.0 % 80.0 FX(Run) Motor flux Flux current CON_92 (FluxCurr Lvl) Detailed operation by function groups 274 6.7 Elevator (E/L) group Refer to the User Manual provided with ELIO (Elevator I/O) add-on module for detailed information. Detailed operation by function groups 275 Operation Details 6.8 Protection (PRT) group 6.8.1 Jump code (PRT_00) PRT_00 code is used to directly access a specific code. The following is an example for jumping directly to PRT_03 from PRT_00 code. Press [PROG]. Use [SHIFT/ESC], [▲], or [▼] to change the code number to “03”. Press [ENT] to access PRT_03 code. If an invalid code number is entered, the next available code number is automatically selected. Note After jumping directly to a code, you can move to other codes by pressing [▲] or [▼]. 6.8.2 Motor thermal protection ( I T 2 ) Use this function to protect the motor from overheating without adding an external thermal relay. By calculating the motor’s theoretical temperature rise based on various parameters and considering the motor’s load current conditions, this function decides whether or not the motor is overheated. When thermal protection is activated, the inverter output is blocked and a trip message appears. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_01 ETH Select Electronic thermal on/off 0 (No) No Detailed operation by function groups 276 Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting 1 (Yes) PRT_02 ETH 1 Min Electronic thermal one minute rating PRT_03–200 % 150 PRT_03 ETH Cont Electronic thermal continuous rating 50–PRT_02 (150% max) % 100 PAR_19 Rated-Curr Motor rated current 1.0–1000.0 A - PAR_22 Cooling Mtd Motor cooling fan type 0 (Self-cool) 1 (Forced-cool) Forced-cool The electronic thermal level is a ratio (%) to “Motor rated Current” set at PAR_19. “Electronic thermal one minute rating” (PRT_02) is the magnitude of input current that is supplied to the motor for one minute until the motor is considered as overheated. “Electronic Thermal continuous rating” (PRT_03) is the magnitude of input current that the motor is not overheated when the current is continuously supplied to the motor. In general, it is set as the motor’s rated current (100%), and it must be set to a lower value than the value of Electronic Thermal one minute rating. The motor continuously operates to the configured value. “Motor cooling fan type” (PRT_22) is for setting the motor’s cooling fan type for the electronic thermal function. • Self-cool: Select the Self-cool mode when operating the cooling fan attached to the motor axis. This mode is for universally designed induction motors. In this case, the cooling capacity greatly decreases when the motor is operated at low speed. The motor overheats rapidly at lower speed. Therefore, depending on the motor speed, the electric thermal function operates with reduced continuous rated current set at "ETH Cont" (PRT_02) as shown in the graph below. • Forced-cool: Select the Forced-cool mode when operating a cooling fan independently, with a separate power supply. The continuous rated current set at "ETH Cont" (PRT_03) is applied regardless of the motor speed. Detailed operation by function groups 277 Operation Details When the inverter output current changes due to the load variation or frequent acceleration/deceleration, the motor protection is possible because I2T is calculated and accumulated. Detailed operation by function groups 278 6.8.3 Restart delay time after stop command This function only operates when stop mode (FUN_03) is set to free-run. The PRT_07 (Restart Time) option is only available for this function and this function only operates when operating the inverter using the control terminal block. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_07 Restart Time Restart delay time after stop command 0.00–10.00 sec 0.00 FUN_03 Stop mode Stop mode 0 (Decel) 1 (Free-run) 2 (DC-Brake) 0 (Decel) When this function is used, even if a subsequent input command is received after the stop command, the inverter operation will not be resumed until the restart delay time set at PRT_07 (Restart Time) has been elapsed. Detailed operation by function groups 279 6.8.4 EnDat add-on module-related function setting Operation Details PRT_08 is used to set EnDat add-on module related fault trip functions. When an EnDat encoder is used, an initial pole position estimation is performed based on this configuration after a trip or power reset. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_08 Sc/EnDat Func SinCos_1387/EnDat module error and initial pole position estimation setting 111–000 bit 011 Bit 0: ‘EnDat Error’ setting (EnDat mode only) When you set Bit 0 to “1” at PRT-08, a communication error occurs if EnDat addon module ‘s clock or data input signal cable is not connected. The inverter outputs “EnDat Error” while the inverter is in stopped state. Bit 1: Initial pole position estimation after a fault reset (Endat/SinCos_387 mode only) When you set Bit 1 to “1” at PRT-08, an initial pole position estimation is performed upon the first operation after a fault reset. Bit 2: Initial pole position estimation after power reset (Endat/SinCos_387 mode only) When you set Bit 2 to “1” at PRT-08, an initial pole position estimation is performed upon the first operation after the inverter’s power reset. Detailed operation by function groups 280 6.8.5 Encoder error detection If the encoder is disconnected or there is a connection error when “Detection of encoder error” at PRT-09 is set to “Yes”, the inverter detects the encoder error. For open-collector encoders, set PRT-09 to “No” as encoder error detection is not available for this type of encoders. If electronic interference distorts the encoder’s input wave, adjust the “Encoder LPF time constant” setting at PRT-10 to reduce the distortion. When the encoder settings are not accurate, normal speed control does not work. And the inverter frequently generates trips such as “over current” or “over voltage”. If this happens, refer to 8 Troubleshooting on page 334. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_09 Enc Err Chk Detection of encoder error 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 1 (Yes) PRT_10 Enc LPF Encoder LPF time constant 0–100 ms 1 6.8.6 Software encoder error detection (PRT_11–12: Detection time of encoder error, encoder error based on the speed rate) Accurate motor speed detection is critical for motor speed control when an encoder is installed. Correct encoder connection and motor connection are required to ensure accurate speed control. If the motor operation is maintained even after input signal errors such as an encoder disconnection occurred, or if the motor is operated while the encoder or motor cables are incorrectly connected, the motor may not operate properly. Also, the resultant high current flow may result in motor damage. It is essential to ensure that encoder error and connection problems are closely monitored. The L100 inverter detects encoder error with hardware diagnosis (when PRT_09 is set to “Yes”). This is for checking the status of encoder pulse input (input pulse) to detect the hardware damage by some reason such as a disconnection of encoder. However, error of connection cannot be detected only with hardware diagnosis. Set PAR_31 to "Rotational" and perform an encoder test when Detailed operation by function groups 281 performing the auto-tuning. By this procedure, you can rotate the motor to check Operation Details speed value for detecting connection error. There are types of loads that do not allow arbitrary rotation of motor, such as elevator loads. In such cases, the encoder test described above may be not be available. When it is difficult to perform the encoder test, you can enable the software encoder error detection to detect the connection errors. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_11 EncFaultTime Motor error detection time 0.00–10.00 sec 0.00 ELPM: 4.00 PRT_12 EncFaultPerc Motor error standard speed rate 0.0–50.0 % 25.0 ELPM:10.0 PAR_18 Rated-Slip Motor rated slip 10–250 rpm Varies by motor capacity If the encoder or motor cable connection is incorrect, abnormal current exceeding the torque limit current may result, affecting the acceleration. Software encoder error detection is used to detect input pulse errors or improper acceleration caused by cable connection problems. The graphs below illustrate how this function works. When the time set at PRT_11 elapses, it checks the rate of acceleration for the existing motor speed and compares it with the target speed, and the rotation direction of the motor. An error occurs if the acceleration rate is too low, or the motor’s rotating direction is incorrect. The software encoder error detection does not operate during an auto-tuning. It only works when the control mode is set to speed control mode (when PAR_07 is set to Speed(IM) or Speed(PM)), and “EncFaultTime” is set to a value except for 0. The software encoder error detection compares the motor speed with “EncFaultPerc” multiplied by the speed reference to detect encoder errors. Therefore, error detection is only available during an acceleration after the “EncFaultTime”. The software encoder error detection does not operate if the motor is decelerated due to a target speed change or the inverter operation is stopped before the “EncFaultTime” is elapsed. Detailed operation by function groups 282 The encoder error detection is performed only once after an operation begins, only when the target speed is more than twice the rated slip, after the motor speed has exceeded twice the rated slip. For example, when the target speed is 500 (rpm) and the rated slip is 40 (rpm), the detection starts at the point when the target speed becomes 80 (rpm). Detailed operation by function groups 283 Operation Details 6.8.7 Speed deviation error settings Speed deviation errors output an error signal when a deviation occurs between the command speed and the true motor speed. The deviation must be present for longer than the duration set at PRT_14 (Speed deviation detection time) and more than the speed set at PRT_13 (speed deviation detection level that is calculated as a percentage of PAR_14 [Motor sync speed]). The default settings that are used depend on the type of motor. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_13 SpdErrLevel Detection level of speed deviation 0–100 rpm Asynch: 100 Synch: 20 PRT_14 SpdErrTime Detection time speed deviation 0–1000 ms 500 Detailed operation by function groups 284 Note • “Spd Dev Err” may occur depending on the system when operating the inverter to drive an induction motor. In such a case, adjust the setting at PRT_13 or PRT_14. • To disable the speed deviation detection error feature, set one of PRT_13 and PRT_14 to “0.” 6.8.8 Overspeed fault detection (Over Speed) This function detects faults when the motor rotation exceeds prescribed rotation speed and enables detection level and time. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_15 OverSpdLevel Detection level of overspeed fault 100.0–130.0 % 110.0 PRT_16 OverSpd Time Detection time of overspeed fault 0.00–2.00 sec 1.00 Detection level of over-speed fault is 100 % based on the motor’s maximum speed of PAR_11. It detects over-speed fault (over speed) after the motor has operated at a greater speed than what is set at PRT_15 (Detection level of over-speed fault) for the set time set at PRT_16 (Detection time of over-speed fault). If the detection time for over-speed fault is 0.00 (sec) and the speed becomes higher than the fault detection level, then the over–speed fault (Over Speed) is detected. 6.8.9 Input/output phase open detection These functions detect the disconnection of input and output power cables. If an input open-phase error occurs when there are no missing connections, set PRT_18 to a higher value. For more information about the setting criteria, refer to “PhInOpenLvl” settings for DIS_01–DIS_03 codes. Set PRT_18 to a value Detailed operation by function groups 285 equivalent to 150 % of the “PhInOpenLvl” setting value at a maximum load. Operation Details Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_17 PhInOpenChk Input phase open detection 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) PRT_18 PhInOpenLvl Input phase open detection voltage level 2–100 V 3 PRT_19 PhOutOpenChk Output phase open detection 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) Output phase open detection is not available for synchronous motors. 6.8.10 Overload An overload signal is provided when the output current is higher than the overload warning level during an inverter operation (based on the motor rated current). Refer to the overload warning level and time that are set at PRT_20 and PRT_21 codes. Overload warning level (PRT_20), Overload warning time (PRT_21) When the inverter’s output current is maintained above the value set at PRT_20 during the period set at PRT_21, the inverter sends a warning signal. When the current drops below the overload warning level after an overload warning is triggered, the overload warning signal changes to OFF after a set period. The overload warning signal is operated via the multifunction auxiliary output terminals (A1–A4). Set one of the multifunction auxiliary output terminals at DIO_11– DIO_14 (multifunction output terminals AX1–AX4) to “OverLoad” to enable this function. When an overload condition occurs, the inverter continues to operate, and the overload warning signal is provided via the multifunction auxiliary output terminal. Detailed operation by function groups 286 Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_20 OL Level Overload warning level 30–250 % 150 PRT_21 OL Time Overload warning time 0–30 sec 10 Note The overload warning level is set as a percentage of the motor’s rated current. Detailed operation by function groups 287 6.8.11 Overload limit selection, level, time (PRT_22–24) Operation Details When the output current of the inverter is maintained above the overload control level during an overload time limit, the inverter cuts off the output and displays a trip message. PRT_22–24 (Overload limit) function cuts off the inverter’s output and displays the inverter’s output. This function is for detecting load errors, such as, a motor failure, system failure, and other mechanical failures. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_22 OLT Select Overload limit selection 0 (No) / 1 (Yes) - 1 (Yes) PRT_23 OLT Level Overload limit level 30–250 % 180 PRT_24 OLT Time Overload limit time 0–60 sec 30 Note The overload warning level is set as a percentage of the motor’s rated current. 6.8.12 Inv OH Warn When the temperature of the inverter’s heat sink exceeds the reference temperature, a signal is sent. The inverter overheat function detects if the temperature of the heat sink of the inverter is exceeds the set detection level. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_25 IH Warn Temp Inverter overheat detection temperature 50–110 °C 95 PRT_26 IH Warn Band Inverter overheat detection range 0–10 °C 5 Detailed operation by function groups 288 6.8.13 Low Voltage2 (LV2) function When this feature is enabled, the inverter blocks the output and displays “Low Voltage2” error message if the main power supply is interrupted and a low voltage situation occurs. Unlike “Low Voltage” trip, which is automatically released as soon as the normal voltage is recoverd, “Low Voltage2” trip status remains until it is cleared by the user, even after the voltage recovers to a normal range. The trip record is not saved after a reset. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_29 LV2 Enable Low Voltage2 activation 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) 6.8.14 A3 Safety This function enables or disables PWM output of the inverter according to the signals at multifunction input terminals defined for A3 Safety signals. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT_30 A3 StartTime A3 signal input delay section when operated 0–60000 ms 1500 PRT_31 A3 Stop Time A3 signal input delay section when stopped 0–60000 ms 1500 DIO_01– 07 P1–P7 define Multifunction input settings 0–29 (26: A3 Safety) 0 (Not Used) Basic operation To increase PWM Output and Speed, the A3 Safety multifunction input terminal should be set to OFF within the time limit set at [PRT-30 A3 StartTime] after an operation command is received. If the A3 Safety multifunction input terminal is not OFF, an "A3 Safety" fault will occur. If A3 Safety is ON during the operation, PWM stops, the motor decelerates at free-run and stops, and then an "A3 Safety" fault occurs. Detailed operation by function groups 289 After a normal stop (a status that inverter voltage output becomes OFF after the Operation Details stop operation by user settings), the A3 Safety multifunction input terminal should be ON within the time limit set at [PRT-30 A3 StartTime]. If A3 Safety is not ON, an "A3 Safety" fault occurs. If you turn off and then on the inverter power when "A3 Safety" fault has occurred, the fault status is maintained regardless of the Multifunction input A3 Safety. To turn off the fault, use the keypad reset button or RST of the terminal block. The graph below shows the basic movement sequence of A3 Safety. 6.8.15 Fan fault You can decide the inverter’s inner fan is operating or not according to the user settings. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT-32 FAN Control FAN operation setting 0 (During Run) 1 (Always ON) 2 (Temp Control) 0 (During Run) PRT-33 FAN Trip Sel FAN Trip setting 0 (Trip) 1 (Warning) 1 (Warning) Detailed operation by function groups 290 Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting DIO11–14 AX1–AX4 Define Multifunction Output option setting 0– 21 (18: Fan Faults) 0 (Not Used) Basic operation of FAN depending on the settings (PRT_32) • During Run: Operate FAN when PWM Output occurs, and turn OFF the FAN when the PMW Output is cut off and after 60 seconds after the temperature is reduced to 55℃. • Always ON: Always operate the FAN when the power above LV Level is provided to the inverter. • Temp Control: - Operates the FAN when the module’s internal temperature is 75℃ or higher, and stops the FAN when the temperature is 65℃ or lower. FAN fault depending on the settings (PRT_33) When a fan fault occurs, user can set the fan fault type between a warning (“FAN Warning” if the inverter is operated continuously) and Fault (“FAN Fault”, Motor Free Run stop). Warning and trips are detected under the same condition by different methods. 6.8.16 Safety Torque Off (STO) This function cuts off the output based on an input signal coming from an external source via terminals [SA] and [SB]. The two terminals provide a dual safety mechanism when an emergency occurs. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting PRT-34 Safety Sel STO type selection 0 (Latch) 1 (Level) 0 (Latch) Detailed operation by function groups 291 Latch (PRT_34) Operation Details If the Safety Relay is open, the inverter output stops and “SAFETY A (or B)” is ON. If the inverter was in operating when the Safety Relay opened, a free-run stop occurs regardless of the setting at [FUN-03 Stop Mode]. If the [SA] input signal is open, power supply to the inverter's internal PWM buffer is cut off. If [SB] input signal is open, output from the inverter’s internal PWM buffer is blocked, then the PWM output is blocked at the DSP. If a safety fault occurs, perform a reset via keypad or terminal block inputs to manually clear the fault after the [SA] and [SB] relays are closed. Level (PRT_34) If the Safety Relay is open, the inverter output stops and “SAFETY A (or B)” is ON. If the inverter was in operating when the Safety Relay opened, a free-run stop occurs regardless of the setting at [FUN-03 Stop Mode]. If the [SA] input signal is open, the PWM output signal is blocked at the inverter’s DSP. If [SB] input signal is open, output from the inverter’s internal PWM buffer is blocked, then the PWM output is blocked at the DSP. The safety fault will be automatically cleared when the [SA] and [SB] relays are closed. Detailed operation by function groups 292 6.9 Communication (COM) group Communication group consists of parameter codes related to the inverter’s network communication functions via CAN and RS232 protocols. 6.9.1 Jump code (COM_00) COM_00 code is used to directly access a specific code. The following is an example for jumping directly to COM_03 from COM_00 code. Press [PROG]. Use [SHIFT/ESC], [▲], or [▼] to change the code number to “03”. Press [ENT] to access COM_03 code. If an invalid code number is entered, the next available code number is automatically selected. Note After jumping directly to a code, you can move to other codes by pressing [▲] or [▼]. 6.9.2 Setting Station ID for CAN communication (COM_01) Set the station ID of the inverter for CAN communication. Only one of the following values are available for the station ID: 0x0800, 0x0900, 0x0A00, 0x0B00, 0x0C00, 0x0D00, 0x0E00, and 0x0F00 The station ID cannot be duplicated on the same network. Before setting the station ID, ensure that it is not used by another device on the network. If the inverter is the last device connected to the network, enable the terminating resistor by setting SW2 on the inverter’s control board to ON position. Detailed operation by function groups 293 Code Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting Operation Details COM_01 CAN station ID CAN St ID 0x0800 – 0x0f00 0x0800 6.9.3 Setting CAN communication speed (COM_02) Use this code to set CAN network communication speed. Check the communication speed for the network before setting this code. All devices connected to the same network must have identical communication speed. Code Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting COM_02 CAN comm. Speed CAN Baud 0 (125 kbps) 1 (250 kbps) 2 (500 kbps) 3 (1 Mbps) bps 2 (500 kbps) 6.9.4 Setting CAN communication mode (COM_03) Use this code to set CAN network communication mode. Code Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting COM_03 CAN comm. Mode CAN Mode 0 (CAN2.0B) 0 (CAN2.0B) 6.9.5 Setting Station ID for RS232 communication (COM_04) Set the station ID of the inverter for RS232 communication. Only station ID #1 is Detailed operation by function groups 294 available (default). Prepare a dedicated connection cable for the keypad. RS232 communication requires operation via the keypad connector. Code Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting COM_04 RS232 station ID RS232 St ID 1 1 6.9.6 Setting RS232 communication speed (COM_05) Use this code to set RS232 network communication speed (default: 9600 bps). Code Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting COM_05 RS232 comm. Speed RS232 Baud 0 (9600 bps) 0 (9600 bps) 6.9.7 Setting RS232 communication mode (COM_06) Use this code to set RS232 network communication mode (data frame type). The following communication mode is available for RS232 communication: 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit. Code Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting COM_06 RS232 comm. Mode RS232 Mode 0 (8None/1Stop) 0 (8None/1Stop) 6.9.8 Setting response delay time (COM_07) Use this code to set the delay time for the inverter to respond to calls from the master device. The inverter responses to the calls after the time set at COM_07 has elapsed. This function is used for a system with slow slave units that cannot Detailed operation by function groups 295 provide immediate responses, for smooth network communication between the Operation Details master and slave devices. Code Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting COM_07 Delay time for comm. Response COM Delay 2 – 1000 ms 5 6.9.9 Setting protection against lost command (COM_08, COM_09) Set this code to define the criteria for a lost command situation due to an interruption of network communication, and the protection function against it. Code Name Keypad display Range Unit Default setting COM_08 Operation mode for lost command COM LostC 0 (None) 1 (FreeRun) 2 (Decel) 0 (None) COM_09 Lost command decision time COM LostT 1.0 – 30.0 sec 1.0 When the “operation mode for lost command” has been set at COM_08 and loss of communication is maintained for the “lost command decision time” set at COM_09, the inverter performs the following operation. Detailed operation by function groups 296 Setting Keypad display Description 0 None No protection feature is provided. Inverter drives the motor using the previous speed reference. (Lost command function is not used.) 1 FreeRun Inverter output stops and the motor performs free run. 2 Decel Inverter decelerates the motor to a stop. For this function to operate, the command source at FUN_01 (Run/Stop Src) must be set to “CAN.” The following screen is displayed on the keypad when the network communication is lost for the set time at COM_09. The speed in rpm in the second row indicates the currently set speed reference. 6.10 User (USR) group You can create a new group with the frequently used group’s codes. You can also use group codes made for specific application. Detailed operation by function groups 297 6.10.1 Jump code (USR_00) Operation Details USR_00 code is used to directly access a specific code. The following is an example for jumping directly to USR_03 from COM_00 code. Press [PROG]. Use [SHIFT/ESC], [▲], or [▼] to change the code number to “03”. Press [ENT] to access USR_03 code. If an invalid code number is entered, the next available code number is automatically selected. Note After jumping directly to a code, you can move to other codes by pressing [▲] or [▼]. 6.10.2 Definition of macro USR _01 (Macro Init) Define the initialization of code type for each user-defined application. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting USR_01 Macro Init User macro definition User Define E/L User Define When USR_01 is set to “User Define”, all user-defined codes from USR_04 to USR_67 are initialized to “P1 Define”. When “E/L” is set, the code types are initialized as listed in the table below. In this case, USR_59–USR_67 codes that are set as “Undefined” or “Not Used” will not be displayed and only the last code (USR_67) will be displayed to indicate that these codes are not defined for use. Detailed operation by function groups 298 Function code Setting Function code Setting Function code Setting USR_04 DIO_01 USR_26 PAR_24 USR_48 FUN_43 USR_05 DIO_02 USR_27 PAR_25 USR_49 FUN_44 USR_06 DIO_03 USR_28 PAR_26 USR_50 FUN_45 USR_07 DIO_04 USR_29 PAR_27 USR_51 FUN_46 USR_08 DIO_05 USR_30 FUN_01 USR_52 FUN_47 USR_09 DIO_06 USR_31 FUN_02 USR_53 FUN_49 USR_10 DIO_07 USR_32 FUN_03 USR_54 FUN_50 USR_11 DIO_11 USR_33 FUN_12 USR_55 FUN_51 USR_12 DIO_12 USR_34 FUN_13 USR_56 CON_03 USR_13 PAR_11 USR_35 FUN_14 USR_57 CON_04 USR_14 PAR_07 USR_36 FUN_15 USR_58 CON_05 USR_15 PAR_12 USR_37 FUN_16 USR_59 Not Used USR_16 PAR_13 USR_38 FUN_17 USR_60 Not Used USR_17 PAR_14 USR_39 FUN_19 USR_61 Not Used USR_18 PAR_15 USR_40 FUN_33 USR_62 Not Used USR_19 PAR_16 USR_41 FUN_36 USR_63 Not Used USR_20 PAR_17 USR_42 FUN_37 USR_64 Not Used USR_21 PAR_18 USR_43 FUN_38 USR_65 Not Used USR_22 PAR_19 USR_44 FUN_39 USR_66 Not Used USR_23 PAR_20 USR_45 FUN_40 USR_67 Not Used USR_24 PAR_22 USR_46 FUN_41 USR_25 PAR_23 USR_47 FUN_42 Detailed operation by function groups 299 USR_02 (User Save) Operation Details Save the user code and code number defined by the user for the group. USR_03 (User Recall) Display the user code and code number that the user previously saved at “USR_02”. Code Keypad display Name Range Unit Default setting USR_02 User Save User macro save 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) USR_03 User Recall User macro recall 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) 6.10.3 User code definition (USR_04–67) Press [PROG] to display the type and code mode of currently set user code. Change the code numbers to navigate through different functions. If code description is “User Grp” and description is “Not Used”, press [PROG] one more time to change the code description. You can define and save up to 64 user group code. Set the unused codes to “Not Used” to hide them. The following illustration shows the different screens that are displayed when you change a code for a user group. Step Instruction Keypad display 1 Press [PROG] twice. Detailed operation by function groups 300 Step Instruction Keypad display 2 Press [SHIFT/ESC] to change the group. The group names will rotate in the following order: PAR, DIO, AIO, CON, E/LNote 1), PRT, COM, DIS, and PAR. 3 Press [▲] or [▼] to change the code, and then press [ENT] to save the code. 4 Press [PROG], press [▲] or [▼] to change the value, and then press [ENT] to save the value. Note 1) Displayed only when Elio add-on module has been installed and PAR-08 is set to “Elevator.” 301 Communication features Communication Features 7 Communication features This section explains how to remotely control the inverter with a computer using the RS232 communication feature. To use RS232 communication, connect the communication cables and set the communication parameters on the inverter. Refer to the communication protocols and parameters to configure and use RS232 communication. Read this manual thoroughly before installing and operating the inverter. User may be injured or other devices may be damaged if the directions in this manual are not followed correctly. 7.1 RS232 communication standards The L100 products exchange data with PLCs and computers using the RS232 communication protocol. The RS232 communication standard provides an interface that is strongly resistant to electronic interference. Refer to the following table for information about the communication standard. Item Standard Communication method/ transmission type RS232/RS232 Inverter model LSLV-L100 Series Number of connected inverters 1 Transmission distance 34 ft (10 m) maximum / recommended transmission distance is within 24 ft (7 m)] Recommended cable 24 AWG (0.75 mm²), STP cable Cable connection Connected to the master device Communication speed Up to 9,600 bps Communication control Asynchronous communications system 302 Communication features Item Standard Communication system Half duplex system Character system LS INV 485: ASCII Stop bit length 1-bit Sum check 2 bytes Parity check None 7.2 RS232 communication system configuration In an RS232 communication system, the computer is the master device and the inverter is a slave device. When a computer is used as the master, the RS232 converter must be installed to the computer to allow it to communicate with the inverter. Converter specifications and performance may vary depending on the manufacturer, but the basic functions are identical. Refer to the manufacturer’s user manual for details about the features and specifications of the converter. Connect the cables and configure the communication parameters on the inverter by referring to the following communication system configuration. 7.2.1 Communication cable connections Make sure that the inverter is turned off completely, and then connect the RS232 communication cable to the communication terminal of the control board. You can connect only one inverter to a PC. Use STP cables for the connection. It is recommended that the cable length is less than 24 ft (7 m) to ensure stable 303 Communication features Communication Features communication. If cable lengths exceed the maximum (34 ft [10 m]), install a signal repeater to enhance communication distance. A repeater makes the communication circuit less susceptible to electronic interference. 7.2.2 Communication memory map Communication area Memory map Details 5 Series compatible common area 0h0000–0h00FF 5 series compatible area iS7 communication common area 0h0300–0h037F Inverter monitoring area 0h0380–0h03DF Inverter control area 0h03E0–0h03FF Inverter memory control area L100 communication common area 0h0500–0h05FF Common area dedicated for L100 7.3 Network protocols 7.3.1 LS INV 485 protocol The slave device (inverter) responds to read and write requests from the master device (computer). Request ENQ Station ID CMD Data SUM EOT 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Normal response ACK Station ID CMD Data SUM EOT 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 304 Communication features Error response NAK Station ID CMD Data SUM EOT 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes 1 byte • A request starts with ENQ and ends with EOT. • A normal response starts with ACK and ends with EOT. • An error response starts with NAK and ends with EOT. • A station ID indicates the inverter number and is displayed as a two-byte ASCII-HEX string that uses characters 0-9 and A-F. • CMD: Uses uppercase characters (returns an IF error if lowercase characters are encountered)—refer to the table below. Character ASCII-HEX Command ‘R’ 52h Read ‘W’ 57h Write ‘X’ 58h Request buffer monitoring registration ‘Y’ 59h Perform buffer monitoring registration • Data: ASCII-HEX (for example, when the data value is 3000: 3000 → ‘0’’B’’B’’8’h → 30h 42h 42h 38h) • Error code: ASCII-HEX (20h–7Fh) • Transmission/reception buffer size: Transmission=39 bytes, Reception=44 bytes • Monitor registration buffer: 8 words • SUM: A check for communication errors. • SUM=a total of the lower 8-bit values for station ID, command and data (station ID+CMD+data) in ASCII-HEX. - For example, a command to read an address from address 3000: SUM=‘0’+‘1’+’R’+‘3’+‘0’+‘0’+‘0’+’1’ = 30h+31h+52h+33h+30h+30h+30h+31h = 1A7h (the control value is not included: ENQ, ACK, NAK, etc). 305 Communication features Communication Features ENQ Station ID CMD Address Number of addresses SUM EOT 05h ‘01’ ‘R’ ‘3000’ ‘1’ ‘AC’ 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 4 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte ASCII code table HEX DEC ASCII HEX DEC ASCII HEX DEC ASCII HEX DEC ASCII 00h 0 NUL 20h 32 SP 40h 64 @ 60h 96 ` 01h 1 SOH 21h 33 ! 41h 65 A 61h 97 a 02h 2 STX 22h 34 “ 42h 66 B 62h 98 b 03h 3 ETX 23h 35 # 43h 67 C 63h 99 c 04h 4 EOT 24h 36 $ 44h 68 D 64h 100 d 05h 5 ENQ 25h 37 % 45h 69 E 65h 101 e 06h 6 ACK 26h 38 & 46h 70 F 66h 102 f 07h 7 BEL 27h 39 ‘ 47h 71 G 67h 103 g 08h 8 BS 28h 40 ( 48h 72 H 68h 104 h 09h 9 HT 29h 41 ) 49h 73 I 69h 105 i 0Ah 10 LF 2Ah 42 * 4Ah 74 J 6Ah 106 j 0Bh 11 VT 2Bh 43 + 4Bh 75 K 6Bh 107 k 0Ch 12 FF 2Ch 44 , 4Ch 76 L 6Ch 108 l 0Dh 13 CR 2Dh 45 - 4Dh 77 M 6Dh 109 m 0Eh 14 SO 2Eh 46 . 4Eh 78 N 6Eh 110 n 0Fh 15 SI 2Fh 47 / 4Fh 79 O 6Fh 111 o 10h 16 DLE 30h 48 0 50h 80 P 70h 112 p 11h 17 DC1 31h 49 1 51h 81 Q 71h 113 q 12h 18 DC2 32h 50 2 52h 82 R 72h 114 r 13h 19 DC3 33h 51 3 53h 83 S 73h 115 s 14h 20 DC4 34h 52 4 54h 84 T 74h 116 t 15h 21 NAK 35h 53 5 55h 85 U 75h 117 u 16h 22 SYN 36h 54 6 56h 86 V 76h 118 v 17h 23 ETB 37h 55 7 57h 87 W 77h 119 w 306 Communication features HEX DEC ASCII HEX DEC ASCII HEX DEC ASCII HEX DEC ASCII 18h 24 CAN 38h 56 8 58h 88 X 78h 120 x 19h 25 EM 39h 57 9 59h 89 Y 79h 121 y 1Ah 26 SUB 3Ah 58 : 5Ah 90 Z 7Ah 122 z 1Bh 27 ESC 3Bh 59 ; 5Bh 91 [ 7Bh 123 { 1Ch 28 FS 3Ch 60 < 5Ch 92 7Ch 124 | 1Dh 29 GS 3Dh 61 = 5Dh 93 ] 7Dh 125 } 1Eh 30 RS 3Eh 62 > 5Eh 94 ^ 7Eh 126 ~ 1Fh 31 US 3Fh 63 ? 5Fh 95 _ 7Fh 127 DEL Note Broadcasting A broadcast sends commands simultaneously to all inverters connected to the network. When commands are sent from station ID 255, each inverter responds to the command regardless of the station ID. However, no response is issued for commands transmitted via broadcast. 7.3.2 Read protocol details Read Request Reads successive “n” words from address XXXX. ENQ Station ID CMD Address Number of addresses SUM EOT 05h ‘01’–’ 1F’ ‘R’ ‘XXXX‘ ‘1’–‘8’ = n ‘XX’ 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 4 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes = 12. Characters are displayed inside single quotation marks (‘ ‘). 307 Communication features Communication Features Read normal response ACK Station ID CMD Data SUM EOT 06h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘R’ ‘XXXX’ ‘XX’ 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n + 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes = (7 x n x 4): 39 maximum Read error response NAK Station ID CMD Error code SUM EOT 15h ‘01’-‘1F’ ‘R’ ‘**’ ‘XX’ 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes = 9 7.3.3 Write protocol details Write request ENQ Station ID CMD Address Number of addresses Data SUM EOT 05h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘W’ ‘XXXX’ ‘1’–‘8’ = n ‘XXXX…’ ‘XX’ 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 4 bytes 1 byte n x 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes = (12 + n x 4): 44 maximum Write normal response ACK Station ID CMD Data SUM EOT 06h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘W’ ‘XXXX…’ ‘XX’ 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n x 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes = (7 + n x 4): 39 maximum 308 Communication features Write Error Response NAK Station ID CMD Error Code SUM EOT 15h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘W’ ‘**’ ‘XX’ 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes = 9 7.3.4 Error codes Code Abbreviation Description ILLEGAL FUNCTION IF The requested function cannot be performed because the corresponding function at the slave does not exist. ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS IA The received parameter address is invalid at the slave. ILLEGAL DATA VALUE ID The received parameter data is invalid at the slave. WRITE MODE ERROR WM Writing (W) a parameter was attempted that does not allow writing (read-only parameters or when writing is prohibited during operation). FRAME ERROR FE The frame size does not match. 309 Communication features Communication Features 7.3.5 Common parameter compatibility The table below lists common parameters used with the iS5, iG5, iG5A series inverters. Comm. address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments by model 0000h Inverter model R 12: LSLV-L100 0001h Inverter capacity kW R 4: 5.5 kW, 5: 7.5 kW, 6: 11 kW, 7: 15 kW, 8: 18.5 kW, 9: 22 kW 0002h Inverter input voltage R 1: 400 V 0003h Version R (E.g.) 0h0100: Version 1.00 (E.g.) 0h0101: Version 1.01 0004h Reserved -Note 1) 0005h Reserved -Note 1) 0006h Operation command and multifunction input R/W B0 Stop B1 FX operation B2 RX operation B3 Reset B4 BX B5 Reserved B6 Reserved B7 Reserved B8 P1 B9 P2 B10 P3 B11 P4 B12 P5 B13 P6 310 Communication features Comm. address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments by model B14 P7 B15 Reserved 0007h Acceleration time 0.1 sec R/W 0008h Deceleration time 0.1 sec R/W 0009h Output current 0.1 A R 000Ah Output frequency 0.01 Hz R 000Bh Output voltage 1 V R 000Ch DC link voltage 1 V R 000Dh Output power 0.1 kW R 000Eh Operation status R B0 Stopped B1 FX operation B2 RX operation B3 Fault trip B4 Accelerating B5 Decelerating B6 Speed reached B7 Inverter ready B8 Stopping B9 FX rotation B10 Torque limit reached B11 FX operation command B12 RX operation command B13 Reserved B14 Reserved B15 Reserved 000Fh Fault trip information - - R B0 Overcurrent (OCT U, V, W) 311 Communication features Communication Features Comm. address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments by model B1 Overvoltage (OV) B2 Reserved B3 BX B4 Low voltage (LV) B5 Reserved B6 Ground fault (GF) B7 Inverter overheat (IOH) B8 E-Thermal (ETH) B9 Overload (OLT) B10 H/W-diag B11 External-B (EXT-B) B12 Arm short (Arm short U, V, W) B13 Reserved B14 Encoder error B15 Inverter overload (IOLT) 0010h Input terminal information - - R B0 FX B1 RX B2 BX B3 RST B4 Reserved B5 Reserved B6 Reserved B7 Reserved B8 P1 B9 P2 B10 P3 312 Communication features Comm. address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments by model B11 P4 B12 P5 B13 P6 B14 P7 B15 Reserved 0011h Output terminal information - - R B0 30A-30C B1 A1-C1 B2 A2-C2 B3 A3-C3 B4 A4-C4 B5 Reserved B6 Reserved B7 Reserved B8 Reserved B9 Reserved B10 Reserved B11 Reserved B12 Reserved B13 Reserved B14 Reserved B15 Reserved 0012h Analog input 1 0.1 % R -100.0% (0xFC18)–100.0% (0x03E8) 0013h Analog input 2 0.1 % R -100.0% (0xFC18)–100.0% (0x03E8) 0014h Reserved 0015h Motor rotation speed 1 rpm R Displays the existing motor rotation speed (in V/F and Slip Comp. control 313 Communication features Communication Features Comm. address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments by model modes, displays output frequency in rpm). 001Dh Speed reference 1 1/0.1 rpm/ Hz R When the control mode is Speed(IM)/Speed(PM): Target speed reference When the control mode is V/F or Slip Comp.: Ramp frequency reference 001Eh Speed reference 2 1/0.1 rpm/ Hz R When the control mode is Speed(IM)/Speed(PM): Ramp speed reference When the control mode is V/F or slap Comp.: Ramp frequency reference 001Fh Speed controller input reference 1 rpm R Speed controller speed reference 0020h Motor speed 1 rpm R Actual speed of motor 0023h Excitation current 0.1 % R The ratio (%) to the rated excitation current 0024–0026h Reserved - - - - 0027h Inverter temperature 1 ℃ R Inverter temperature Note 1) NAK is received if an unused address is read. 314 Communication features 7.3.6 iS7 expansion common parameters Address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments 0300h Inverter model R 0012h: LSLV-L100 0301h Inverter kW R 4055h: 5.5 4075h: 7.5 40B0h: 11 40F0h: 15 4125h: 18.5 4160h: 22 0302h Inverter input voltage/ power supply/ cooling R 400V 3-phase forced-cooling: 0431h 0303h Inverter s/w version R E.g.) 0x0100: Version 1.00 0x0101: Version 1.01 0304h Reserved Note 1) 0305h Inverter operation status R B0 0: Stopped 1: FX operation 2: RX operation 3: Reserved B1 B2 B3 B4 1: Reserved 2: Accelerating 3: Steady 4: Decelerating 5: Decel stopping 6: Reserved 7: Reserved 8: Reserved B5 B6 B7 B8 -- Reserved B11 B12 0: Normal 8: Fault B13 B14 B15 0306h Inverter frequency source R B0 [Frequency reference source] 0: Keypad speed 1–4: Reserved B1 B2 315 Communication features Communication Features Address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments B3 5: Analog 6-25: Reserved 26-32: Multistep 33-127: Reserved B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 [Command source] 0: Keypad 1: Reserved 2: Reserved 3: Reserved 4: Terminal block 5–127: Reserved B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 0307h Keypad s/w version R E.g.) 0x0100: Version 1.00 0x0101: Version 1.01 0308h Keypad title version R E.g.) 0x0100: Version 1.00 0x0101: Version 1.01 0309h -030Fh Reserved 0310h Output current 0.1 A R 0311h Output frequency 0.01 Hz R 0312h Output rpm 1 rpm R 0313h Motor feedback speed 1 rpm R -32768 rpm - 32767 rpm (directional) 0314h Output voltage 1 V R 316 Communication features Address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments 0315h DC Link voltage 1 V R 0316h Output power 0.1 kW R 0317h Output torque 0.1 % R 0318h -0319h Reserved 031Ah Motor 1 number of poles R Motor 1 number of poles 031Bh Motor 2 number of poles R Motor 2 number of poles 031Ch Selected motor number of poles R Selected motor’s number of poles 031Dh Hz/rpm selection R 0: Hz 1: rpm 031Eh -031Fh Reserved 0320h Digital input R B0 FX B1 RX B2 BX B3 RST B4 P1 B5 P2 B6 P3 B7 P4 B8 P5 B9 P6 B10 P7 B11 Reserved B12 Reserved B13 Reserved 317 Communication features Communication Features Address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments B14 Reserved B15 Reserved 0321h Digital output R B0 Fault output (30A – 30B) B1 Relay 1 (A1 – C1) B2 Relay 2 (A2 – C2) B3 Relay 3 (A3 – C3) B4 Relay 4 (A4 – C4) B5 Reserved B6 Reserved B7 Reserved B8 Reserved B9 Reserved B10 Reserved B11 Reserved B12 Reserved B13 Reserved B14 Reserved B15 Reserved 0322h Reserved 0323h Selected motor R 0: Motor 1 / 1: Motor 2 0324h Ai1 0.01 % R Analog input 1 (standard I/O) 0325h AI2 0.01 % R Analog input 2 (standard I/O) 0326h Reserved 0327h Reserved 0328h AO1 0.01 % R Analog output 1 (standard I/O) 0329h AO2 0.01 % R Analog output 2 (standard I/O) 032Ah -032Fh Reserved 0330h Latch type trip info-1 R B0 Overload B1 Reserved B2 Inverter overload B3 E-Thermal B4 Ground fault B5 Output missing phase 318 Communication features Address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments B6 Input missing phase B7 Overspeed B8 Reserved B9 NTC B10 Overcurrent B11 Overvoltage B12 External-B B13 Reserved B14 Overheat B15 Reserved 0331h Latch type trip info -2 R B0 Reserved B1 Encoder error B2 Reserved B3 FAN error B4 Reserved B5 Reserved B6 Reserved B7 Reserved B8 Reserved B9 Reserved B10 Reserved B11 Reserved B12 Reserved B13 A3 safety B14 LV2 B15 Battery fault 0332h Level type trip info R B0 Reserved B1 LV B2 Lost command B3 Reserved B4 Reserved B5 Reserved B6 Reserved B7 Reserved B8 Reserved B9 Reserved 319 Communication features Communication Features Address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments B10 Reserved B11 Reserved B12 Reserved B13 Reserved B14 Reserved B15 Reserved 0333h HW-diag B0 H/W diag B1 Reserved B2 Reserved B3 Reserved B4 Reserved B5 Reserved B6 Reserved B7 Reserved B8 Reserved B9 Reserved B10 Reserved B11 Reserved B12 Reserved B13 Reserved B14 Reserved B15 Reserved 0334h -033Fh Reserved 0340h On time days day R Total number of days the inverter has been powered on. 0341h On time minutes min R Total minutes left after On time days is calculated. 0342h Run time date day R Total number of days the inverter has been operating. 0343h Run time minutes min R Total minutes left after Run time days is calculated. 0344h Reserved 0345h Reserved 0346h -037Fh Reserved 320 Communication features Address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments 0380h Frequency command 0.01 Hz R/W Frequency command E.g.) Input: 0x03E8 (=1000) Output: 10 Hz (4-pole motor, 300 rpm) 0381h rpm command 1 rpm R/W rpm command (Set FUN_02 to “CAN”) E.g.) Input: 0x03E8 (=1000) Output: 1000 rpm (4- pole motor, 33.33 Hz) 0382h Run command R/W B0 0: Stop 1: Run B1 0: RX 1: FX B2 RST (01: Trip reset) B3 BX (01: Free-run stop) B4 Reserved B5 Reserved B6 Reserved B7 Reserved E.g.) FX run command: 0003h, RX run command: 0001h BX, RST commands are write-only (read as “0”) FUN_01 must be set to “CAN” 0383h Acc time 0.1 sec R/W Set the acceleration time 0384h Dec time 0.1 sec R/W Set the deceleration time 0385h Reserved 0386h Digital output R B0 Fault relay (30A-30B) B1 Relay 1 (A1 – C1) B2 Relay 2 (A2 – C2) B3 Relay 3 (A3 – C3) B4 Relay 4 (A4 – C4) B5 Reserved B6 Reserved B7 Reserved B8 Reserved B9 Reserved B10 Reserved B11 Reserved B12 Reserved B13 Reserved B14 Reserved 321 Communication features Communication Features Address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments B15 Reserved 0387h -0389h Reserved 038Ah Motor rated current 0.1 A R/W PAR_19 Rated-Curr 038Bh Inverter rated voltage R 400: 400 V 038Ch -0390Fh Reserved 0391h Fwd pos torque limit 0.1 % R/W FX motoring torque limitNote 1) 0392h Fwd neg torque limit 0.1 % R/W FX regeneration torque limit Note 1) 0393h Rev pos torque limit 0.1 % R/W RX motoring torque limitNote 1) 0394h Rev neg torque limit 0.1 % R/W RX regeneration torque limit Note 1) 0395h Torque bias 0.1 % R/W Torque bias Note 2) 0396h -039Dh Reserved Note 1) Writable only when CON_33 is set to “CAN CAN CAN” and readable even when CON_33 is not set to “CAN CAN CAN.” Note 2) Writable only when CON_37 is set to “CAN” and readable even when CON_37 is not set to “CAN.” 322 Communication features 7.3.7 L100 (iV5L) common parameters Address Parameter Scale Unit R/W Bit assignments 0500h Command via option board R/W B0 Stop B1 FX B2 RX B3 RST B4 BX B5 Reserved B6 Reserved B7 Reserved B8 P1 B9 P2 B10 P3 B11 P4 B12 P5 B13 P6 B14 P7 B15 Reserved 0501h Multifunction outputNote 1) bit R/W Bit 1: Ax1 Bit 2: Ax2 Bit 3: Ax3 Bit 4: Ax4 0502h Define speed command R/W Define reference 0503h Define Acc time sec R/W Define Acc time 0504h Define Dec time sec R/W Define Dec time 0506h FX torque limit 0.1 % R/W Define FX torque limit 0507h RX torque limit 0.1 % R/W Define RX torque limit 0508h Regeneration torque limit 0.1 % R/W Define regeneration torque limit 0509h Torque bias 0.1 % R/W Define torque bias amount 323 Communication features Communication Features 050Ah No -load current Note 2) A R/W Define no -load current 050Bh Iu Offset 0.01 A R Offset current for U phase inverter output 050Ch Iv Offset 0.01 A R Offset current for V phase inverter output 050Dh Iw Offset 0.01 A R Offset current for W phase inverter output 050Eh Stoppable floor (Car) R Stoppable floo r info. ( Car) 050Fh ELIO Input Signal R/W Bit 0: ELIO deceleration permission signal (upper level controller → inverter) 0510h ELIO Output Signal R Bit 0: ELIO deceleration permission request signal ( inverter →upper level controller) 0527h Warning info. bit R Bit 0: Fan fault warning Bit 1: Inverter overheat warning Bit 2: Motor overheat warning Bit 3: Overload warning 0528h Additional fault info. (latch 1) bit R Bit 0: Fan fault Bit 1: Battery signal is lost during a battery operation Bit 2: Reserved Bit 3: Input phase missing Bit 4: Output phase missing Bit 5: Inverter NTC Thermistor open Bit 6: Reserved Bit 7: Motor overspeed Bit 8: Floor height fault Bit 9: Forced Dec switch fault Bit 10: A3 fault Bit 11: Lv2 fault Bit 12: Safety A fault Bit 13: Safety B fault Bit 14: ADC error 324 Communication features Bit 15: Pole position estimation fault 0529h Additional fault info. (latch 2) bit R Bit 0: EnDat option board fault 052Bh Current floor (Car) R Current floor info. (Car) 0530h Dedicated terminal block info bit R Bit 0: FX Bit 1: RX Bit 2: BV Bit 3: RST Note 1) Set the multifunction output terminals (DIO_11 - DIO_14) to “Not Used” to use them via network communication. Otherwise, the inverter uses the output terminal(s) for the set functions and multifunction output via network communication becomes unavailable. Note 2) The no-load current reference uses a defined percentage of the value set at PAR_52. The value set at PAR_52 stands for 100% of the value, and it can be set to a value less than 100%. 325 Communication features Communication Features 7.4 CAN Communication features This section explains how to remotely control the inverter with a computer using the CAN communication feature. Read this manual thoroughly before installing and operating the inverter. User may be injured or other devices may be damaged if the directions in this manual are not followed correctly. 7.4.1 CAN communication standards The L100 products can exchange data with PLCs and computers using the CAN communication protocol. Item Standard Communication protocol CAN (ISO 11898) Ver. 2.0B Active Communication ID 0x0800,0x0900,0x0A00, 0x0B00, 0x0C00, 0x0Doo, 0x0E00, 0x0F00 Number of connected inverters 8 maximum Transmission speed CAN High Speed 125 kbps, 250 kbps, 500 kbps, 1 Mbps Transmission distance 334 ft (100 m) maximum Recommended cable RJ 45 cable (LAN cable) Topology Bus type (terminating resistance: 120Ω) Communication type Master–Slave 326 Communication features CAN message frame versions CAN 2.0A CAN 2.0B 327 Communication features Communication Features 7.4.2 CAN communication system configuration 7.4.2.1 Communication cable connections Make sure that the inverter is turned off completely, and then connect the CAN communication cable to the communication terminal of the control board. 7.4.2.2 Control board terminals and terminating resistor Refer to the following figure for the location and layout of the CAN signal terminals on the control board. 5.5/7.5 kW 11/15 kW 18.5/22 kW 328 Communication features Connector Layout CN3 CHN CNL VR V1 I1 GND CNS NC AO1 AO2 GND GND Detailed CAN signal terminal specifications are as follows: Connector Indication Description CN3 CNH HIGH signal terminal for CAN communication CNL LOW signal terminal for CAN communication CNS COMMON ground terminal for CAN communication 7.4.2.3 Enabling terminating resistor If the inverter is the last device connected to the network, the terminating resistor must be enabled for proper network communication. Refer to the following figure and set SW2 on the control board to enable or disable the terminating resistor (120Ω). Switch Mode Description SW2 Terminating resistor On Enables termination of a CAN network. Terminating resistor Off Disables termination of a CAN network. 329 Communication features Communication Features 7.4.2.4 Wiring diagram Refer to the following diagram for CAN network cable connections. 330 Communication features 7.4.2.5 CAN read protocol details Parameter Read Request: RxData [8]. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ENQ (0x05) “R” (0x52) Address Low byte Address High byte EOT (0x04) - - - Parameter Read Response (Normal): TxData [8]. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACK (0x06) “R” (0x52) Address Low byte Address High byte Data Low byte Data High byte EOT (0x04) - Parameter Read Response (Abnormal): TxData [8]. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 NAK (0x15) “R” (0x52) Address Low byte Address High byte Data 0xFF Data 0xFF EOT (0x04) - 7.4.2.6 CAN write protocol details Parameter Write Request: RxData [8]. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ENQ (0x05) “W” (0x57) Address Low byte Address High byte Data Low byte Data High byte EOT (0x04) - Parameter Write Response (Normal): TxData [8]. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACK (0x06) “W” (0x57) Address Low byte Address High byte Data Low byte Data High byte EOT (0x04) - Parameter Write Response (Abnormal): TxData [8]. 331 Communication features Communication Features 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 NAK (0x15) “W” (0x57) Address Low byte Address High byte Data 0xFF Data 0xFF EOT (0x04) - 332 Communication features 7.5 Cable configuration for DriveView application LS Electric DriveView may be used to monitor, read, or write the inverter parameters. To utilize DriveView, a PC must be connected to the keypad connector on the inverter (A PC for utilizing DriveView and the keypad cannot be simultaneously connected to the inverter). The following cable connection is required before you can start utilizing DriveView. Remove the keypad cable from the inverter and connect cables for DriveView configuration. 333 Communication features Communication Features Cable configuration for DataView utilizes keypad connector pins #3, #4, and #7 (pins for RS232 connection). Detailed pin configurations are as follows: Keypad connector pins D-SUB (9-pin connector) pins Description #3 (TXD) #2 (RXD) For data transmission signal #4 (RXD) #3 (TXD) For data reception signal #7 (GND) #5 (GND) Common ground Troubleshooting 334 8 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to resolve a problem when the inverter’s protective functions, fault trips, or other faults occur. If the inverter does not work normally after following the troubleshooting steps, contact the LS ELECTRIC customer service center. 8.1 Fault trips When the inverter detects a fault, it stops operating (trips) or sends a message. Also, when a trip occurs, the keypad displays brief information. Detailed information can be viewed at DIS_05. If more than two trips occur at approximately the same time, the keypad displays information for the higher priority fault first. The [Up], [Down], [Left], and [Right] cursor keys on the keypad can be used to view fault trip information. Fault conditions can be categorized as follows: • Level: When the fault is corrected, the trip or warning signal disappears and the fault is not saved in the fault history. • Latch: When the fault is corrected and a reset input signal is provided, the trip warning signal disappears. • Fatal: When the fault is corrected, the fault trip or warning signal disappears only after the user turns off the inverter, waits until the charge indicator light goes off, and turns the inverter on again. If the fault condition is still present after powering on the inverter again, contact the supplier or the LS ELECTRIC customer service center. Fault trips LCD display Priority Note 1) Type Description Arm Short 1 Latch Displayed when IGBT Arm or output fault occurs. Troubleshooting 335 Troubleshooting LCD display Priority Note 1) Type Description Ground Fault 2 Latch Displayed when a ground fault occurs in the inverter’s output, and current flow to ground exceeds the specified level. Over Current 3 Latch Displayed when inverter output current exceeds the specified fault current. Over Voltage 4 Latch Displayed when the internal DC voltage exceeds the specified value (820 VDC). FAN Error 5 Latch Displayed when a cooling fan error is detected. BatRun Fault 6 Latch Displayed when battery operation signals are lost during a battery power operation. Encoder Err 7 Latch Displayed when an encoder signal error occurs. (H/W detection) Displayed when an inconsistent encoder error time is detected when compared to the PRT_11 setting. (S/W detection) Low Voltage 8 Level Displayed when the internal DC voltage is less than the specified value (360 VDC). InvOver Heat 9 Latch Displayed when the temperature of the inverter heat sink exceeds the specified value. E-Thermal 10 Latch Displayed when internal electronic protection detects a high temperature condition at the motor. Over Load 11 Latch Displayed when the inverter’s output current exceeds the specified motor rated current and overload trip time. HW-Diag 12 Latch Displayed when a CPU error is detected. External-B 13 Latch Displayed when an external fault signal is generated. Output PO 14 Latch Displayed when the inverter does not produce an output current. Troubleshooting 336 LCD display Priority Note 1) Type Description This feature is not available in Speed(PM) mode. Inv OLT 15 Latch Displayed when the inverter has detected an overload and resultant overheating condition based on inverse time-limit thermal characteristics. Allowable overload rates for the inverter are 150% for 1 min. Input PO 16 Latch Displayed when a single phase of a 3-phase power supply is interrupted while the inverter is under load. InvThem OP 17 Latch Displayed when an open circuit is detected in the thermistor inside the inverter. Over Speed 18 Latch Displayed when the motor speed exceeds the specified maximum speed. Flr/FHM Data 19 Latch Displayed when a floor height data error is detected or a floor height measurement failure occurs. Available only when the exclusive elevator mode is used. SDS Error 20 ELIO add-on module input sequence error during an elevator operation. Refer to the Use Manual provided with ELIO add-on module for details. A3 Safety 21 Latch Displayed when an A3 Safety error is detected at a multifunction input. Low Voltage2 22 Latch Displayed when the power supply to the inverter is cut off during an inverter operation and the power supply is resumed before the inverter is completely turned off.A reset is required to clear this error. SAFETY A/B 23 Latch Level Displayed when there is a safety terminal wiring fault on the control board. The response can be Troubleshooting 337 Troubleshooting LCD display Priority Note 1) Type Description set at either Latch or Level. SpdDev Err 24 Latch Displayed when the difference between the motor speed and command speed is more than the specified value. ADC Error 25 Fatal Displayed when current calibration is incorrect when power is initially supplied to the inverter. Mag Det Err 26 Latch Displayed when the power source to the motor is is cut off for longer than 10 seconds during a magnetic pole detection of a PM motor, or when the magnetic pole detection is incomplete. EnDat ERROR 27 Latch Displayed when EnDat signals for the Clock or Data lines are not connected or a communication error is detected. EEP Error 28 Latch Displayed when a data saving error occurs. BX 29 Latch Displayed when the inverter output is blocked by a signal from the multifunction terminal. COM Error 30 Fatal Displayed when communication between the inverter and the keypad is unavailable. Note 1) The display priority when multiple trip occurs. Smaller number has higher priority. Troubleshooting 338 8.2 Confirming the fault status and fault history 8.2.1 Confirming the fault status and storing the fault information Code Display Description DIS_05 Fan Error The current fan error status is displayed. Press the [PROG] key and then press the [▲] or [▼] to confirm the operation information before the fault trip occurs and the fault information is displayed. Press the [ENT] key to close the information screen. Press the [RESET] key to store the information to DIS_05. Only one current fault information is displayed. When multiple faults occur simultaneously, the fault that has higher priority (smaller number) is displayed. The information that is stored in the fault history is irrelevant to the priority. 8.2.2 Confirming the fault history “DIS_05” stores up to two fault histories, and the “Last Fault 1” is the most recent fault trip. Code Display Description DIS_05 Last Fault 1 Fault history 1 DIS_05 Last Fault 2 Fault history 2 Troubleshooting 339 Troubleshooting 8.3 Resetting fault trips Follow one of the instructions below to reset the inverter: • From the keypad, press the [RESET] key. • From the inverter’s control terminal, close the circuit between the RST and CM terminals. • Turn OFF the inverter, and then turn it ON again. 8.4 Troubleshooting when a fault trip occurs When a problem occurs, confirm the followings first. • Are the motor and the inverter connected properly? - Refer to page 18. • Is the encoder type jumper on the add-on module set correctly? - Refer to page 33. - If the encoder is line drive type, set JP1 to “LD”. If the encoder is complementary or open collector type, set JP1 to “OC” and ensure that the encoder power source has been correctly connected (check 5 V/12 V/15 V terminal connections on the add-on module terminal block). • Is direction of the motor rotation correct? - Refer to page 63. - When looking at the motor from the motor’s fan, the motor rotates clockwise in the forward operation. • Has the inverter been tested sufficiently in a no load status? - Refer to page 64 and 67. When a fault trip or warning occurs due to a protection function, refer to the following table for possible causes and remedies. Type Cause Remedy Over Current Acc/Dec time is too short, compared to load inertia (GD2 ). Increase Acc/Dec time. Troubleshooting 340 Type Cause Remedy The inverter load is greater than the rated capacity. Replace the inverter with a model that has increased capacity. The mechanical brake of the motor is operating too fast. Check the mechanical brake. Ground Fault A ground fault has occurred in the inverter output wiring. Check the output wiring. The motor insulation is damaged. Replace the motor. Over Voltage Deceleration time is too short for the load inertia (GD2 ). Increase the deceleration time. A generative load occurs at the inverter output. Use the braking unit. The input voltage is too high. Determine if the input voltage is above the specified value. Low Voltage The input voltage is too low. Determine if the input voltage is below the specified value. A load greater than the power capacity is connected to the system (a welder, direct motor connection, etc.). Increase the power capacity. The magnetic contactor connected to the power source has a faulty connection. Replace the magnetic contactor. Low Voltage2 The input voltage has decreased during the operation. Determine if the input voltage is below the specified value. An input phase-loss has occurred. Check the input wiring. The power supply magnetic contactor is faulty. Replace the magnetic contractor. Over Load The load is greater than the motor’s rated capacity. Ensure that the motor and inverter have appropriate capacity ratings. The set value for the overload trip level is too low. Increase the set value for the overload trip level. Troubleshooting 341 Troubleshooting Type Cause Remedy Inv OLT The load is greater than the rated motor capacity. Replace the motor and inverter with models that have increased capacity. The set value for the overload trip level is too low. Increase the set value for the overload trip level. InvOver Heat There is a problem with the cooling system. Determine if a foreign object is obstructing the air inlet, outlet, or vent. The inverter cooling fan has been operated for an extended period. Replace the cooling fan. The ambient temperature is too high. Keep the ambient temperature below 40℃. InvThem OP The ambient temperature is too low. Keep the ambient temperature over-10℃. An error has been detected on the internal temperature sensor. Contact the retailer or the LS ELECTRIC customer service center. E-Thermal The motor has overheated. Reduce the load or operation frequency. The inverter load is greater than the rated capacity. Replace the inverter with a model that has increased capacity. The set value for electronic thermal protection is too low. Set an appropriate electronic thermal level. The inverter has been operated at low speed for an extended duration. Replace the motor with a model that supplies extra power to the cooling fan. External-B The external fault B signal is connected. Determine if the external fault B signal is connected. Arm Short The IGBT is damaged. Replaced the power board. Contact the retailer or the LS ELECTRIC customer service center. A short circuit has occurred in the output wiring during the inverter operation. Determine if the output short circuit has occurred. When using synchronous motors, determine if the motor 3-phase Troubleshooting 342 Type Cause Remedy input short circuit has occurred. Encoder Err The encoder power is not connected. Determine if the power that meets the encoder requirements is connected. The encoder wiring is incorrect. Determine if the encoder is wired correctly. BX The BX signal is connected. Determine if the BX signal is connected. Reset the inverter power. Over Speed An error has been detected on speed control. Check the encoder wiring and the UVW output. Tune the encoder at PAR 28. Refer to 0 Setting the encoder types (PAR_23), encoder scale (PAR_27), and encoder tuning options (PAR_28) on page 154 for details. Adjust the speed control response. Refer to 6.6.3 Speed controller (Automatic Speed Regulator: ASR) on page 248 for details. The over speed error detection level and time is low. Increase the over speed error detection level and time. COM Error CPU Error The keypad cable connection is bad. Determine if the keypad cable is connected correctly. An error has been detected on control board communication. Reset the inverter power. The OS for the control board has not been installed correctly. Download the OS for the control board. Output PO A contact failure has been occurred to the magnetic contactor for the output side. Check the magnetic contactor for the output side. Troubleshooting 343 Troubleshooting Type Cause Remedy The output wiring is bad. Determine if the output wiring is correct. Input PO A contact failure has been occurred to the magnetic contactor for the input side. Check the magnetic contactor for the input side. The input wiring is bad. Determine if the input wiring is correct. The time to replace the DC link capacitor has come. Replace the DC link capacitor. Contact the retailer or the LS ELECTRIC customer service center. SpdDev Err An error has been detected on the speed controller. Check the encoder wiring and the UVW output. Tune the encoder at PAR 28. Refer to 6.2.4Auto-tuning on page 155 for details. The response from the speed controller is high. Decrease the speed control response. Refer to 6.6.3 Speed controller (Automatic Speed Regulator: ASR) on page 248 for details. The response from the speed controller is low. Increase the speed control response. Refer to 6.6.3 Speed controller (Automatic Speed Regulator: ASR) on page 248 for details. An error has been detected on opening break and MC. Check the break operation. Check the MC operation. The speed deviation error level and time are low. Increase the speed deviation error level and time. Mag Det Err Power is not output to the motor or the run command has been turned Off during a magnetic pole detection. Check the cable connection between the inverter and the motor. If an MC has been installed between the inverter and the motor, ensure that the main contacts of the MC are closed (On). Troubleshooting 344 8.5 Troubleshooting after a test run Fault Remedy (1) The motor does not rotate and the LED flashes red. If the LED flashes red: • Go to DIS-05, check for trip errors, and if a trip has occurred reset the inverter. • Check for BX terminal input signals received at DIS_03. If an input signal is ON, change it to OFF and try starting the motor. Confirm that the command source is set correctly. • If the inverter does not operate via terminal input, try to operate it using the keypad. • If the inverter does not operate using keypad input, try to operate it via terminal input. • If these steps do not resolve the problem, refer to Item 6 in this table. (2) The motor does not rotate and the [REV] and [FWD] keys are illuminated green. If the [REV] and [FWD] keys are illuminated green: • Confirm the inverter output connections (U, V, W) are in the correct phase rotation (see wiring diagram). • Confirm that a braking device is not preventing motor operation. • Check the brake settings and the brake relay settings. • Confirm the pre-ramp reference (DIS_01) is not set to “0.” Refer to Item 7 in this table for more information about setting the speed reference. • Confirm the motor capacity (PAR_09) is set correctly. • Confirm the motor base speed (PAR_14) is set correctly. • Confirm the motor rated current (PAR_19) is set correctly. • Confirm the motor flux current (PAR_52) is set correctly (30-40% of the value at PAR_19). • Confirm the motor rated slip (PAR_18) is set correctly. Troubleshooting 345 Troubleshooting Fault Remedy • Confirm the motor time constant (PAR_53) is set correctly (Note: inverter efficiency will decrease significantly if this setting is incorrect). • Confirm the number of motor poles (PAR_16) is set correctly. • If CON_33 is set to “Kpd Kpd Kpd,”, are CON_34–CON_36 (torque limits) set correctly? [Note: CON_34–CON_36 define the torque limit of the inverter. Adjust the torque limit If it has been set too low. The L100 inverters can withstand 150% output for 1 minute. The use time and frequency must be limited if the inverter will be operated in excess of its limits.] (3) Motor rotates but does not accelerate. Check the encoder pulse setting at PAR_24. • The default setting is “1024” for HIGEN vector motors. If a different type of motor is connected, contact the encoder manufacturer and request the correct pulse setting. Set FUN_01 to “Keypad”, FUN_02 to “Keypad1”, and FUN_12 (Speed 0) to 100.0 rpm. Then, press [FWD] to check if the motor rotates. If the motor does not rotate, check the encoder cable connection. • If the encoder cables are connected incorrectly, the motor will rotate at low speed (30-60 rpm), the current can get as high as 150% of the rated current, and the motor will rotate in one direction only. If the motor is rotating too slowly (30–60 rpm), stop the motor and swap the positions of the A and B phase cables at the encoder terminals. Troubleshooting 346 Fault Remedy Confirm that the direction of rotation is correct. If the direction of rotation is reversed refer to Item 3 in this table. • For line-drive encoders, connect the A+ and A- cables to the B+ and B- phases, and the B+ and B- cables to the A+ and Aphases. Or, change the encoder direction at Par_25 (Enc Dir Set) and try again. (4) Motor speed is correct but the direction of rotation is wrong. Swap the V and W phase cables at the inverter output terminals and the A and B phases at the encoder terminals. Or, change the encoder direction at PAR_25. (5) Motor direction of rotation does not change. Confirm the RUN and STOP commands have been configured correctly. • Confirm the command source set at FUN_01 is correct. • If the current command source is terminal input, change it to keypad input. Check that the motor’s direction of rotation is correct. • If the current command source is keypad input, change it to terminal input. Check that the motor’s direction of rotation is correct. • Refer to item 6 in this table for more information if the motor operates abnormally after following the instructions provided above. (6) Keypad or terminal input does not respond. If the [REV], [FWD], or [STOP] keys on the keypad are illuminated red or green: • Refer to Item 1 in this table if the keypad or terminal input commands do not respond correctly. If you cannot modify settings, keypad or terminal input protection may be enabled at PAR_04. To disable keypad or terminal input protection, set PAR_04 to “12”. • If you still cannot save changes, an internal component fault may have occurred. Contact the retailer or the LS ELECTRIC customer service center. Troubleshooting 347 Troubleshooting Fault Remedy If the [STOP] key on the keypad is illuminated red and is flashing: • A trip or emergency stop condition has occurred. Check the current fault trip status at DIS_05. If a fault trip condition exists, clear the error condition, reset the fault trip, and try to operate the inverter again. • Check if the BX (emergency stop) signal is illuminated at the top right side of the keypad. If it is, check the status of the inputs at DIS_01–DIS_03 to see if the BX signal input is ON. If the [REV] or [FWD] key on the keypad is illuminated green and is flashing: • A flashing key indicates that the inverter is accelerating or decelerating. If the motor operates constantly in this state, the applied load is too high for the inverter’s capacity. Refer to Item 15 in this table for more information. (7) Motor speed does not change correctly during operation. Confirm the speed command settings at FUN_02 are correct. • The L100 inverters operate according to the speed commands received at analog input terminals, keypad, or via CAN or RS232 communication. Confirm that the correct speed references are displayed at DIS_01 (PreRamp Ref). • DIS_01–DIS_03 displays the current speed references. If the motor speed does not change to the same speed shown on the inverter’s display, check the encoder (refer to Item 13 in this table). If the keypad is the command source and the speed (displayed at DIS_01–DIS_03) is not the correct, check the input to the multifunction terminals defined for multistep speed operation (among multifunction inputs DIO_01–DIO_07). Troubleshooting 348 Fault Remedy If analog input is the command source and the speed (displayed at DIS_01–DIS_03) is not the correct, ensure that one of the two analog inputs (Ai1 or Ai2) has been set to “Speed Ref.” (8) 0 V analog input signals do not stop the motor. If AIO_01 (Ai1 define) is set to “Speed Ref“: • Adjust the percentage settings (%) at AIO_04 (Ai1 Out Y1) and AIO_08 (Ai1-Out Y1). Adjust the values so that a 0 V input signal generates a 0.0% output, and then press [Enter]. Check the setting for Ai2 input and adjust the setting as required. (9) The operation speed follows the reference speed but over time the motor starts to overheat or hunt, and the speed decreases. Check the motor connections. • If the motor supports 220 V and 380 V input, ensure that the connections are configured for the correct input voltage. • The motor will not operate if the number of poles is set incorrectly. Power supply connection faults generally result in motor damage. If you suspect the wrong voltage has been connected, contact the manufacturer or supplier of the motor. Refer to the terminal block section in this manual for the correct motor wiring connections. Confirm that the motor rating is set correctly. • Check the motor rating set at PAR_09. To confirm the rating, refer to the rating plate on the motor. Confirm that the motor parameters are set correctly. • Motor parameters vary for different manufacturers. The inverter’s default motor parameter settings are based on HIGEN vector motor specifications. For motors other than HIGEN vector motors, enter parameter settings based on the specifications of the motor to be used in the installation before operating it. Troubleshooting 349 Troubleshooting Fault Remedy (10) No display on the keypad. Check that the inverter is turned on. Check the connection between the inverter and the keypad. • If there is no display on the keypad when the inverter is turned on, and the cable connection appears to be serviceable, contact customer support center for technical support. (11) The motor speed fluctuates when it should be operating at constant speed. Confirm that shielded twisted pair (STP) cables are used for all control signal circuits. • STP cables must be used for the encoder signal connection because non-STP cables are susceptible to electronic interference. Electronic interference can affect encoder input signals and can cause speed variation during low speed operations. Variations during high speed operation can also occur if the level of electronic interference is high. The resultant speed fluctuations can affect the motor by generating vibration and sound when the inverter stops. Confirm that the inverter, the motor, and the encoder are correctly grounded. • Inspect and test the ground connection between the inverter and the encoder. If the ground connection is not connected correctly, the inverter may operate abnormally. Check the ground connection at the bottom left of the inverter’s control PCB. Loosen the ground connector and then retighten it. (For more information, refer to the encoder connection section in this manual). Ensure that the motor’s ground terminal is connected directly to the ground terminal at the inverter power terminal block. Ground the motor and the inverter casing to the building’s earthing system. • Electronic interference at the encoder input can cause motor speed variations if the inverter is not connected to the building’s earthing system. Troubleshooting 350 Fault Remedy Check the speed gain settings if the motor is under-loaded. • If excessive speed PI gains are set at CON_03 and CON_04, the motor may vibrate when the inverter stops operating. High proportional gain settings and low integral gain settings can also be used to achieve faster responses. However, the system may become unstable if the proportional gain is set too high or low. In general, a setting in the 30–70% range is recommended for integral gain, and 100–500 ms for proportional gain. Increase the encoder’s low pass filter setting at PRT_10 (ENC LPF). Check for slip at the motor shaft and the encoder. • Slip can occur between the motor shaft and the encoder depending on the type of encoder installation. A mechanical connection between the encoder and the motor shaft may be required to prevent slip. (12) The inverter does not save parameters used in the previous operation. If the inverter does not save parameter changes when the inverter shuts down, contact the retailer or the LS ELECTRIC customer service center. (13) Motor input current is too high. Check the connections at the motor. • Confirm the incoming power supply connections and verify the voltage rating is correct for the motor especially if it supports 220 V and 380 V. Confirm the inverter parameter settings for inverter capacity and motor rating. Confirm the motor time constant settings are correct. Refer to Items 1 and 9 in this table and perform all required checks for the inverter and the motor. Troubleshooting 351 Troubleshooting Fault Remedy (14) Overcurrent fault trips occur regularly (high input current fluctuations). Check that the encoder is properly installed on the motor. • The encoder can move while the motor operates if it is not securely mounted on the motor. Vector motors require accurate feedback signals from the encoder to perform the specified operation. If the encoder position slips, inaccurate motor feedback is provided by the encoder and can result in the motor operating incorrectly and high levels of output current. If this situation occurs, contact the motor manufacturer or the encoder installer. • If a synchronous motor is used, overcurrent fault trips can occur if the inverter fails to locate the motor’s rotator position. Refer to the auto-tuning section of this manual for more information. Test the motor’s insulation. • Refer to Item 13 in this table. (15) The [FWD] and [REV] keys flash, and ACC/DEC functions do not operate correctly (the motor is unable to sustain the load or ACC/DEC operation is delayed). Check the cable connections. Confirm the acceleration and deceleration times at FUN_41–FUN_48 and confirm the motor’s load at DIS_00. • - The [FWD] and [REV] keys flash when the motor accelerates or decelerates. If the keys continue to flash during the motor operation, motor torque is too low for the applied load and the motor is unable to operate at constant speed. If this occurs, increase the torque limit to within the motor rating. Applying excessive load to the motor may reduce the inverter’s life or damage the inverter. Contact the retailer or the LS ELECTRIC customer service center. 8.6 Troubleshooting other faults When faults other than those identified as fault trips or warnings occur, the table below lists possible causes and remedies. Troubleshooting 352 Fault Cause Remedy Parameters cannot be set. The inverter is running (driving mode). Stop the inverter, switch to program mode and set the parameter. The password is incorrect. Confirm the password, disable the parameter lock, and then set the parameter. The motor is not rotating. The emergency stop signal is activated. Reset the emergency stop (BX). The operating command is set incorrectly. Check the operating command setting. The control circuit connections are incorrect. Check the control circuit connections. The frequency command is set incorrectly. Check the frequency command setting. The input voltage or current for the frequency is incorrect. Check the input voltage or current for the frequency. The PNP/NPN mode is selected incorrectly. Check the PNP/NPN mode setting. [STOP] is pressed. Check that the inverter is in a normal condition and resume operation. Motor torque is too low. Increase the torque limit to allow the inverter to accelerate or decelerate to the rated value. The motor rotates in the opposite direction to the command. The inverter’s output connections for the motor are incorrect. Check the inverter’s output connections. The forward/reverse rotation control circuit connections between the inverter and the control panel are incorrect. Check the forward/reverse rotation control circuit connections. The motor is overheating. The load is too heavy. Reduce the load. Increase the Acc/Dec time. Troubleshooting 353 Troubleshooting Fault Cause Remedy Check the motor parameters and set the correct values. Replace the motor and the inverter with models that are rated for the load. The ambient temperature of the motor is too high. Lower the ambient temperature of the motor. The phase-to-phase voltage of the motor is insufficient. Use motors that can operate at the maximum and minimum level of the phase-to-phase voltage range. Only use motors designed to operate with inverters. Connect the AC reactor to the inverter output (set the carrier frequency to 3 kHz). The motor fan has stopped or the fan is obstructed with debris. Check the motor fan and remove any foreign objects. The motor stops during acceleration or when connected to load. The load is too high. Reduce the load. Replace the motor and the inverter with models that are rated for the load. The motor does not accelerate. /The acceleration time is too long. The load is too high. Reduce the load and increase the acceleration time. Check the mechanical brake status. The acceleration time is too long. Change the acceleration time. The inverter parameters are set incorrectly for the motor. Change the motor related parameters. The motor The deceleration time is set too long. Change the deceleration time. Troubleshooting 354 Fault Cause Remedy deceleration time is too long even with a Dynamic Braking (DB) resistor connected. Motor torque is too low. If motor parameters are normal, an underrated motor is the likely cause. Replace the motor with a model with increased capacity. The load is too high for the inverter’s rated torque limit. Replace the inverter with a model with increased capacity. During inverter operation, a control unit malfunction occurs or switching noise can be heard. Switching inside the inverter causes the noise. Change the carrier frequency to the minimum value. Install a micro surge filter (MSF) in the inverter output. During inverter operation, the earth leakage circuit breaker activates. An earth leakage circuit breaker interrupts power supply if current flows to ground during inverter operation. Ensure the inverter is connected to ground. Check that the ground resistance is less than 10Ω. Check the rating and connections of the earth leakage circuit breaker. Reduce the carrier frequency. Ensure the cable length between the inverter and the motor is as short as possible. The motor vibrates severely and does not rotate normally. The 3-phase power supply is out of balance. Check the input voltages and balance the phases. Check and test the motor’s insulation. The motor hums or makes loud noises. Resonance occurs between the motor’s mechanical natural frequency and the carrier frequency. Increase or decrease the carrier frequency slightly. Troubleshooting 355 Troubleshooting Fault Cause Remedy Resonance occurs between the motor’s mechanical natural frequency and the inverter output frequency. Increase or decrease the command speed slightly. The motor vibrates or hunts. The frequency input command is supplied via an external, analog signal. If operation is affected by electronic interference on the analog input side, change the input filter time constant (AIO 11, 23, 35). The cable between the inverter and the motor is too long. Ensure that the cable length between the inverter and the motor is less than 100 m. The motor does not come to a complete stop when the inverter output stops. The motor cannot decelerate sufficiently because the regenerated load is too heavy to stop. Increase the deceleration time. Install a braking resistor. The free run option has been selected. Change the stop method to deceleration stop. The output frequency does not increase to the frequency reference. The frequency reference exceeds the upper limit of the frequency command. Set the upper frequency limit higher than the frequency reference. The motor is not operating and there is no voltage at the output terminals. The frequency command source setting is incorrect. Set the frequency command source correctly. The operation command source setting is incorrect. Set the operation command source correctly. Power is not supplied to the R, S, and T terminals. Check the R, S, T to U, V, W connections. Output power is not available and the power lamp is not lit. Turn on the power. The RUN command is not on. Turn on the RUN command. The motor is not operating and The motor is obstructed. Remove the obstruction and reduce the load. Troubleshooting 356 Fault Cause Remedy there is voltage at the U, V, and W terminals. The load is too high. Test the motor by operating it independent of the inverter. The motor operates in reverse. The output terminals (U, V, W) are connected incorrectly at the inverter. Connect the inverter output to the motor input with the correct phase sequence. The input terminals (U, V, W) are connected incorrectly at the motor. The control circuit terminals are configured incorrectly. Ensure FWD is set when operating in the forward direction, and REV when operating in the reverse direction. The motor does not accelerate. The load is too high. Reduce the load. The motor speed fluctuates during operation. The change of load is too high. Replace the motor and the inverter with models that are rated for the load. The voltage fluctuates. Avoid changes of load and voltage during operation. Speed fluctuations occur at a specific frequency range. Adjust the output frequency. The motor speed is not correct. The maximum speed setting is not correct. Set the speed settings according to the motor’s specification. Maintenance 357 Maintenance 9 Maintenance This chapter covers general maintenance tasks and explains how to replace the cooling fan, the regular inspections to be made, and how to store and dispose of the product. An inverter is vulnerable to environmental conditions and faults also occur due to component wear and tear. To prevent breakdowns, please follow the maintenance recommendations in this section. Routine and regular inspections are required to keep the product in a good working condition at all times. Inspect the parts for deterioration and replace the parts as necessary. If the following conditions exist at the installation site, more frequency regular inspections may be required: • High ambient temperature • Frequent on/off conditions • Unstable power source • Excessive shocks and vibrations at the installation site • Corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil residue, dust, salts, and metal powders at the installation site • Before you inspect the product, read all safety instructions contained in this manual. • Before you clean the product, ensure that the power is off. • Use a clean, dry cloth to clean the inverter. Using a wet cloth, water, solvents, or detergents may result in electric shock or damage to the product. • ESD (Electrostatic discharge) from the human body may damage sensitive electronic components on the PCB. Therefore, be extremely careful not to touch the PCB or the components on the PCB with bare hands while you Maintenance 358 work on the I/O PCB. • To prevent damage to the PCB from ESD, touch a metal object with your hands to discharge any electricity before working on the PCB, or wear an anti-static wrist strap and ground it on a metal object. • Do not install or remove add-on boards while the inverter is operating. • Immediately place circuit boards on a conductive material after removing them from the inverter for maintenance or repair. Otherwise, static charge may damage the circuit board components. • A failure of element that used in the inverter is unpredictable, and the failure of element may cause a power fuse failure or a fault trip. If you suspect a failure of element, contact the retailer or the LS ELECTRIC customer service center. Note • Keep the inverter turned off when it is not being used. • Keep the inverter clean during operation. • Do not use cleaning agents containing substances such as benzene, toluene, and alcohol. Doing so may damage the exterior coat of the product. • Do not use detergents or cleaning solutions when cleaning around the LED indicators. The inverter may malfunction if the liquid leaks into the circuit board. • The lifespan of the electronic components on the control board is unpredictable. If you think the product failed due to an internal component failure, contact the LS ELECTRIC service technicians for technical support. Maintenance 359 Maintenance 9.1 Regular inspections 9.1.1 Daily inspection Inspection area Item Details Method Standard Required equipment All Ambient environment Is the ambient temperature and humidity within the design range? Is there any dust or are there foreign objects present? Refer to 1.3 Installation considerations on page 5. No icing (ambient temperature: -10 - +40). No condensation (ambient humidity below 90%) Thermometer, hygrometer Inverter Are there any abnormal vibrations or noises? Visual inspection No abnormality None Voltage Are the input and output voltages normal? Measure voltages between the R/ S/ T terminals. - Digital multimeter Input/Output circuit Capacitor Is there any leakage from the capacitor? Visual inspection No abnormality - Is the capacitor swollen? Cooling system Cooling fan Are there any abnormal vibrations or noises? Turn off the system and check operation by rotating the fan manually. Fan rotates smoothly - Maintenance 360 Inspection area Item Details Method Standard Required equipment Inverter, Motor Is there excessive heat generated? Check if the inverter or motor is overloaded. No abnormality Thermometer Screwdriver Tighten all screws. Check if the inverter’s heat sink or motor is dirty. Check the ambient temperature. Display Measuring device Are the values shown on the display correct? Check the display value on the panel. Check and manage specified values. Voltmeter, ammeter, etc. Motor All Are there any abnormal vibrations or noises? Visual inspection No abnormality - Check for overheating or damage. Is there an abnormal smell? Check all electrical connections. Check the level of vibration at the motor. Tighten all screws. Maintenance 361 Maintenance 9.1.2 Annual inspection Inspection area Item Details Method Standard Equipment Input/ Output circuit All Perform insulation resistance test between the input/output terminals and the ground terminal. Disconnect the inverter and short the R/S/T/U/V/W terminals. Measure from each terminal to the ground terminal using a Megger. Resistance must be more than 5 MΩ DC 500 V Megger Are any terminal or components loose inside the inverter? Tighten all screws. No abnormality Is there any evidence of overheating components? Visual inspection Cable connections Are there any corroded cables? Visual inspection No abnormality - Is there any damage to cable insulation? Terminal block Is there any damage? Visual inspection No abnormality - Smoothing condenser Measure electrostatic capacity. Test with capacity meter. Rated capacity over 85% Capacity meter Relay Is there any relay chatter during Auditory inspection No abnormality - Maintenance 362 Inspection area Item Details Method Standard Equipment operation? Is there any damage to the contacts? Visual inspection Braking resistor Is there any damage at the resistor? Visual inspection No abnormality Digital multimeter / analog tester Is there an open circuit? Disconnect one side of the resistor and measure with a tester. Must be within ±10% of the rated value of the resistor. Diode, IGBT Is there any dust or foreign objects present? Visual inspection Remove any foreign objects or dust. Use dry air to clear the dust. - Circuit board Is there any abnormal smell, discoloration, corrosion, dust, or oil residue present? Visual inspection Clean the circuit board with an antistatic cloth. If the circuit board is still dirty, replace the circuit board. - Do not use solvents on the circuit board. Is the connector connected securely? Remove dust with dry air. Reconnect the Maintenance 363 Maintenance Inspection area Item Details Method Standard Equipment connectors. Replace the inverter when parts that cannot be repaired or replaced are damaged. Control circuit protection Operation check Check for output voltage imbalance during inverter operation. Measure the voltage between the inverter output terminals U/ V/ W. Balance the voltage between phases to within 8 V. Digital multimeter or Does the DC voltmeter sequence protection test identify any keypad display errors? Test the protection for the inverter output in both short and open circuit conditions. The circuit must operate according to the sequence. Cooling system Cooling fan, Cooling fins Are any parts of the fan loose? Check all connected parts and tighten all screws. No abnormality - Is there any dust present on the cooling fan or the cooling fins? Visual inspection No dust Display Display device Is the display value normal? Check the command value on the Specified and managed values must Voltmeter, Ammeter, etc. Maintenance 364 Inspection area Item Details Method Standard Equipment display device. match. 9.1.3 Biannual inspection Inspection area Item Details Method Standard Equipment Main circuit All Megger test (between the input, output, and earth terminals) Disconnect the inverter, connect the R, S, T, U, V, and W, and then measure between these terminals and the earth with a megger tester. Must be above 5 MΩ DC 500 V Megger Motor Insulation resistance Megger test (between the input, output, and earth terminals) Disconnect the cables from the U/V/ W terminals and test the wiring. Must be above 5 MΩ DC 500 V Megger Do not perform insulation resistance tests on control circuits as it may result in damage to the inverter and other control devices. Maintenance 365 Maintenance 9.2 Diode module and IGBT inspection Remove the power cables (R, S, T) and the motor output cables (U, V, W). Confirm that the electrolytic capacitors are fully discharged. Check the feedthrough status at the inverter terminals (R, S, T, U, V, W, P2, and N) by measuring the resistance between each terminal using a multimeter. If current is flowing between the terminals, a low resistance value (Ω) is measured. If current is not flowing between the terminals, a high resistance value (M Ω) is measured. If the capacitors are not fully discharged, a low resistance value may be measured even if current is not flowing in the circuit. This may result in incorrect diagnostic procedures. Refer to the circuit diagram above and test the components on the printed circuit board. Measure the resistance at the terminals indicated on the circuit diagram. Maintenance 366 9.3 Replacement cycle and maintenance of major components The inverter consists of many electronic components including semiconductor components. Refer to the following table for the recommended replacement cycle to prevent inverter deterioration and faults. Component name Standard replacement cycle Symptom Replacement method Cooling fan 2-3 years Poor rotation Replace with a new component. DC link capacitor 2 years Capacity reduction Replace with a new component. Controller smoothing capacitor 5 years Capacity reduction Replace with a new component. Control board relay - Faulty operation Replace with a new component. Braking resistor - Capacity reduction Replace with a new component. 9.4 Storage and disposal 9.4.1 Storage If you are not using the product for an extended period, store it in the following way: • Store the product in the same environmental conditions as specified for operation (Refer to 1.3 Installation considerations on page 5). • When storing the product for a period longer than 3 months, store it between - 10 ˚C and 30 ˚C, to prevent deterioration of the electrolytic capacitor. • Do not expose the inverter to snow, rain, fog, or dust. • Package the inverter in a way that prevents contact with moisture. Keep the Maintenance 367 Maintenance moisture level below 70% in the package by including a desiccant, such as silica gel. • Do not store the inverter in dusty or humid environments. If the inverter is installed in an unsuitable environment (for example, a construction site) and the inverter will be unused for an extended period, remove the inverter and store it in a suitable place. 9.4.2 Disposal When disposing of the product, categorize it as general industrial waste. Recyclable materials are included in the product. The packing materials and all metal parts can be recycled. For the disposal of other materials, contact the local authorities for guidance. If the inverter has not been operated for a long time, capacitors lose their charging characteristics and are depleted. To prevent depletion, turn on the product once a year and allow the device to operate for 30-60 min. Run the device under no-load conditions. Technical specifications 368 10 Technical specifications 10.1 Input and output specifications LSLV[][][][]L100-4NNFN 0055 0075 0110 150 0185 0220 Motor capacity HP 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 kW 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 Rated output Rated power (kVA) 9.1 12.2 18.3 22.9 29.7 34.3 Rated current (A) 12 16 24 30 39 45 Output speed Induction motor: 0–3600 (rpm) Synchronous motor: 0–680 (rpm) Output voltage (V) 0-380 V (480 V) Rated input Working voltage (V) 3-Phase 380–480 VAC (-10%–+10%) Input frequency 50–60 Hz (±5%) Rated current (A) 12.9 17.5 26.5 33.4 43.6 50.7 Weight (lbs. [kg]) 7.3 [3.3] 7.5 [3.4] 10.2 [4.6] 10.6 [4.8] 16.6 [7.5] 17.7 [8.0] • The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor. • 400 V inverters are designed for a 440 V supply voltage. • The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the input voltage. • If the input voltage is greater than 480 V, apply input voltage derated by 10% from the rated input voltage. Also, install an AC reactor in the power input side if the voltage imbalance between the phases is greater than 2%. [Voltage imbalance [%] = Max voltage [V] - Min voltage [V] / Three-phase average voltage [V] x 67 (IEC 61800-3 (5.2.3)] Technical specifications Technical Specifications 369 10.2 Product specification details Item Description Circuit system Voltage type inverter with IGBT Control Control method Induction motor (IM) - Speed (sensored) - V/F control - Slip compensation Synchronous motor (PM) Speed (sensored) Speed control Induction motor (IM) Analog settings: ± 0.1 % (25 ±10℃) of max speed (1800 rpm) Digital settings: ± 0.1 % (0-40℃) of max speed (1800 rpm) Synchronous motor (PM) Analog settings: ± 0.1 % (25 ±10℃) of max speed (680 rpm) Digital settings: ± 0.015 % (0-40℃) of max speed (680 rpm) Speed setting resolution Analog settings: ± 0.1 % of max speed Digital settings: 0.1 rpm Speed control response speed 50 Hz Overload capacity Rated current: 150%, 1 min. Acceleration /Deceleration Time settings 0.00-600.0 sec Combination 4 acceleration/deceleration time choices Pattern Linear, S-Curve Braking Braking method Resistance discharge braking Braking torque 150 % Technical specifications 370 Item Description Braking resistor External braking resistor (installation required) Input Speed configuration - Digital settings via the keypad - Analog input settings - Multistep configurations via terminal input - Speed control via optional add-on modules Analog input 2 channels (V1, I1) 0 → 10 V, 10 → 0 V, -10 → 10 V, 10 → -10 V 0 → 20 mA, 20 → 0 mA 2 choices for multifunction analog input: speed or torque bias Terminal contact input FX, RX, BX, RST, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7 Various functions may be assigned to multifunction input terminals (P1-P7). Output Analog output 2 channels (AO1, AO2) -10 → 10 V, 10 → -10 V, 0 → 10 V, 10 → 0 V output Various multifunction analog output options Terminal contact output Multifunction terminal contact output: 4 channels (A1- C1, A2-C2, A3-C3, A4-C4) Fault terminal contact output: 1 channel (30A-30C, 30B30C) Protective functions (Trip) Over Current, Ground Fault, Over Voltage, Low Voltage, Over Load, Inv OLT, InvOver Heat, InvThem OP, EThermal, External-B, Arm Short, Encoder Err, BX, Over Speed, COM Error, HW-Diag, EEP Error, FAN Error, BatRUN Fault, Input PO, Output PO, SpdDev Err, SAFETY A/B, A3 Safety, ADC Error, Flr/FHM Data, EnDat Error Protective functions (Alarm) Fan alarm, Inverter overheat alarm, Overload alarm Working environm Surrounding environment Indoors, prevent contact with direct sunlight and corrosive gases (Pollution Degree 2 Environment). Technical specifications Technical Specifications 371 Item Description ent Ambient temperature 14℉-104℉ (-10℃-40℃, no icing) Ambient humidity Relative humidity less than 95% RH (no condensation) Cooling type Forced fan cooling structure Protection structure IP00 Operation altitude/oscillation No higher than 3,280 ft (1,000 m). Less than 9.8 m/sec2 (1.0 G). Technical specifications 372 10.3 External dimensions Units: inches (mm) Item W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 A 3- phase 400 V LSLV0055L100-4 LSLV0075L100-4 6.30 (160) 5.39 (137) 9.13 (232) 8.54 (217) 7.16 (181) 0.20 (5) LSLV0110L100-4 LSLV0150L100-4 7.09 (180) 6.18 (157) 11.42 (290) 10.79 (274) 8.07 (205) 0.20 (5) LSLV0185L100-4 LSLV0220L100-4 8.66 (220) 7.64 (194) 13.78 (350) 13.03 (331) 8.78 (223) 0.24 (6) Technical specifications Technical Specifications 373 10.4 Peripheral devices Compatible circuit breakers, leakage circuit breakers, and magnetic contactors (manufactured by LS Electric) Product (kW) Circuit breaker Leakage circuit breaker Magnetic contactor Model Rated current Model Rated current Model Rated current 3-Phase 400 V 5.5 TD125U 30A EBS 33b 30A MC-32a 32A 7.5 30A 30A MC-32a 32A 11 50A EBS 53b 50A MC-40a 40A 15 60A EBS 103b 60A MC-50a 50A 18.5 80A 80A MC-65a 65A 22 100A 100A The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering no more than 35 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum rated voltage, if it is protected with the recommended circuit breaker. 10.5 Fuse and reactor specifications Products (kW) Model type AC input fuse AC reactor DC reactor Current Voltage Inductance Current Inductance Current 3- Phase 400 V 5.5 LSLV055L100-4 32 A 600 V 1.12 mH 19 A 3.20 mH 17 A 7.5 LSLV075L100-4 35 A 0.78 mH 27 A 2.50 mH 25 A 11 LSLV110L100-4 50 A 0.59 mH 35 A 1.90 mH 32 A 15 LSLV150L100-4 63 A 0.46 mH 44 A 1.40 mH 41 A 18.5 LSLV185L100-4 70 A 0.40 mH 52 A 1.00 mH 49 A 22 LSLV220L100-4 100 A 0.30 mH 68 A 0.70 mH 64 A The peripheral devices cannot be used if the symmetrical current exceeds 35 kA at the drive maximum rated voltage. Technical specifications 374 Use Class H or RK5 UL listed input fuses and UL listed circuit breakers only. See the table above for the voltage and current ratings for the fuses and breakers. 10.6 Terminal screw specifications Input/output terminal screw specifications Product (kW) Terminal screw size Torque (Kgfc m/Nm) 3-Phase 400 V 5.5 M4 7.1–12.2/0.7–1.2 7.5 11 M5 30.6–38.2/3–3.8 15 18.5 M6 61.2–91.8/6–9 22 Control circuit terminal screw specifications Terminal Terminal screw size Torque(Kgfcm/Nm) FX/RX/BX/RST/P1–P7/CM M2.6 4.0/0.4 V1, I1/AO1/AO2/CM/ A1/A2/A3/A4/C1/C2/C3/C4/GND M2 2.2–2.5/0.22–0.25 Technical specifications Technical Specifications 375 Apply the rated torque to the terminal screws. Loose or overtightened screws can cause short circuits and malfunctions. Use copper stranded cables only that are rated to 600 V, 167℉ (75℃) for mains power cables, and rated to 300 V, 167℉ (75℃) for control circuit cables. 10.7 Braking resistor specifications The standard for braking torque is 150% and the working rate (%ED) is 5%. If the working rate is 10%, the rated capacity for braking resistance must be calculated at twice the standard. Product (kW) Resistance (Ω) Note 1) Rated capacity (W) Note 2) 3-Phase 400 V 5.5 85 800 7.5 60 1200 11 40 2400 15 30 2400 18.5 20 3600 22 20 3600 Note 1) ED is based on 100 seconds. Note 2) Rated capacity is based on the self-cooled type. Technical specifications 376 10.8 Braking resistor connections A temperature sensor is installed to the LS ELECTRIC braking resistor to prevent fire. Refer to the followings when using the braking resistor. Terminal type Terminals on the braking resistor Terminals on the inverter Operation Power B1/B2 P2(+), B - Control T1, T2 P7, CM Define one of multifunction input terminals (P1–P7) on the control terminal as “external trip signal contact B”. The contact is ON in a room temperature and becomes OFF when overheated. 377 EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, the undersigned, Representative: LS ELECTRIC Co., Ltd. Address: LS Tower, 127, LS-ro, Dongan-gu, Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-do, 431-848, Korea Manufacturer: LS ELECTRIC Co., Ltd. Address: 56, Samsung 4-gil, Mokchon-Eup, Chonan, Chungnam, 330-845, Korea Certify and declare under our sole responsibility that the following apparatus: Type of Equipment: Inverter (Power Conversion Equipment) Model Name: LSLV-L100 series Trademark: LS ELECTRIC Co., Ltd. 378 Conforms with the essential requirements of the directives: 2014/35/EU Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the harmonisation of the laws of Member States relating to Electrical Equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits 2014/30EC Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility Based on the following specifications applied: EN 61800-3:2018 EN 61800-5-1:2007(2nd Edition) and therefore complies with the essential requirements and provisions of the 2014/35/EU and 2014/30EC Directives. Place: Chonan, Chungnam, Korea 379 EMI / RFI POWER LINE FILTERS LS ELECTRIC inverters, L100 series RFI FILTERS THE LS RANGE OF POWER LINE FILTERS FLD(Standard) SERIES, HAVE BEEN SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED WITH HIGH FREQUENCY LS INVERTERS. THE USE OF LS FILTERS, WITH THE INSTALLATION ADVICE OVERLEAF HELP TO ENSURE TROUBLE FREE USE ALONG SIDE SENSITIVE DEVICES AND COMPLIANCE TO CONDUCTED EMISSION AND IMMUNITY STANDARS TO EN 50081. CAUTION IN CASE OF A LEAKAGE CURRENT, PROTECTIVE DEVICE IS USED ON POWER SUPPLY. IT MAY BE FAULT AT POWER ON OR OFF. IN AVOID THIS CASE, THE SENSE CURRENT OF PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHOULD BE LARGER THAN VALUE OF LAKAGE CURRENT AT WORST CASE IN THE BELOW TABLE. RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS To conform to the EMC directive, it is necessary that these instructionsshould be followed as closely as possible. Follow the usual safetyprocedures when working with electrical equipment. All electricalconnections to the filter, inverter and motor must be made by a qualified electrical technician. Check the filter rating label to ensure that the current, voltage rating andpart number are correct. For best results, the filter should be fitted as closely as possible to the incoming mains supply of the wiring enclousure, usually directly after the enclousures circuit breaker or supply switch. 380 The back panel of the wiring cabinet of board should be prepared for themounting dimensions of the filter. Care should be taken to remove any paintetc... from the mounting holes and face area of the panel to ensure the bestpossible earthing of the filter. Mount the filter securely. Connect the mains supply to the filter terminals marked LINE, connect anyearth cables to the earth stud provided. Connect the filter terminals markedLOAD to the mains input of the inverter using short lengths of appropriategauge cable. Connect the motor and fit the ferrite core ( output chokes ) as close to the inverter as possible. Armoured or screened cable should be used with the 3 phase conductors only threaded twice through the center of the ferrite core. The earth conductor should be securely earthed at both inverter and motor ends.The screen should be connected to the enclousure body via and earthed cable gland. Connect any control cables as instructed in the inverter instructions manual. IT IS IMPORTANT THAT ALL LEAD LENGTH ARE KEPT AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND THAT INCOMING MAINS AND OUTGOING MOTORCABLES ARE KEPT WELL SEPARATED. FLD SERIES (standard) FILTER INVERTER MOTOR SHIELDED CABLE 381 LSLV0055~0220L100-4 EN 55011 CLASS B IEC/EN 61800-3 C2 DIMENSIONS FLD Series (Standard) INVERTER POWER CODE CURRENT VOLTAGE LEAKAGE CURRENT DIMENSIONS L W H MOUNTING Y X WEIGHT MOUNT FIG OUTPUT CHOKE THREE PHASE NOM. MAX. 0055-4 5.5kW FLD 3100 100A 220-480VAC 0.5mA 27mA 330 x 80 x 220 55 x 314 5.5Kg --- A FS – 3 0075-4 7.5kW FLD 3100 100A 220-480VAC 0.5mA 27mA 330 x 80 x 220 55 x 314 5.5Kg --- A FS – 3 0110-4 11kW FLD 3100 100A 220-480VAC 0.5mA 27mA 330 x 80 x 220 55 x 314 5.5Kg --- A FS – 3 0150-4 15kW FLD 3100 100A 220-480VAC 0.5mA 27mA 330 x 80 x 220 55 x 314 5.5Kg --- A FS – 3 0185-4 18.5kW FLD 3100 100A 220-480VAC 0.5mA 27mA 330 x 80 x 220 55 x 314 5.5Kg --- A FS – 3 0220-4 15kW FLD 3100 100A 220-480VAC 0.5mA 27mA 330 x 80 x 220 55 x 314 5.5Kg --- A FS – 3 382 383 Product warranty Warranty information Fill in the warranty information on this page and keep it for future reference or when warranty service is required. Product name LS ELECTRIC Lift Inverter Date of installation Model name LSLV-L100 Warranty period Customer information Name (or company) Address Contact Info. Retailer information Name Address Contact info. Warranty period The product warranty covers product malfunctions, under normal operating conditions, for 12 months from the date of installation. If the date of installation is unknown, the product warranty is valid for 18 months from the date of manufacture. Product warranty terms may vary depending on purchase or installation contracts. Non-warranty service A service fee will be charged in the following situations: 384 • intentional abuse or negligence • power supply problems or faults caused by other appliances connected to the product • natural disasters or utility faults (fire, flood, earthquake, gas accidents, etc.) • modifications or repairs performed by unauthorized persons • missing authentic LS ELECTRIC rating plates • expired warranty period Visit our website http: //www.lselectric.co.kr for detailed service information. CE mark The CE mark indicates that the products carrying this mark comply with European safety and environmental regulations. European standards include the Machinery Directive for machine manufacturers. We have confirmed that our products comply with EN 61800-5-1 385 Index [ [DOWN] key...........................................................54 [ENT] key..................................................................54 [FWD] key................................................................54 [MODE] key............................................................54 [PROG] key..............................................................54 [REV] key..................................................................54 [SHIFT/ESC] key....................................................54 [STOP/RESET] key ...............................................54 [UP] key.....................................................................54 3 30A terminal..........................................................30 30B terminal...........................................................30 30C terminal ..........................................................30 4 4-pole standard motor.................................368 9 9 pin to USB cable..........................................332 A A1 terminal.............................................................29 A2 terminal.............................................................29 A3 safety...............................................................288 A3 Safety ..............................................................336 A3 safety terminal...........................................177 A3 terminal.............................................................29 A4 terminal.............................................................29 AC power input terminal.....Refer to R/S/T terminal Acc/Dec pattern..................................................77 Acc/Dec speed reference ...........................220 Acc/Dec time......................................................224 Acc/Dec time configuration.........................76 accelerating start................................................77 ACR..........................................................................272 ADC Error.............................................................337 add-on module..........................33, 37, 39, 41 12 V open collector............................35, 36 5 V line drive...................................................35 ELIO add-on module.................................41 EnDat encoder add-on module..........37 incremental pulse encoder add-on module.........................................................33 SIN/COS encoder add-on module...39 386 AIO (Analog input/output group)...58, 95, 194 ALLS (automatic light load search).......237 ALLS status...........................................................187 analog input...........................................................27 Analog input/output group..Refer to AIO (Analog input/output group) analog output.......................................................28 30A terminal....................................................30 30C terminal....................................................30 A1 terminal.......................................................29 A2 terminal.......................................................29 A3 terminal.......................................................29 A4 terminal.......................................................29 AO1 terminal...................................................28 AO2 terminal...................................................28 C1 terminal.......................................................29 C2 terminal.......................................................29 C3 terminal.......................................................29 C4 terminal.......................................................29 GND terminal..................................................29 anti rollback.........................................................270 anti-hunting regulation................................233 AO1 terminal.........................................................28 AO2 terminal.........................................................28 Arm Short.............................................................334 Arm Short-DB....................................................334 ASR (automatic speed regulator)...........248 ASR gain switching.........................................176 asynchronous communications system ...................................................................301, 325 auto tuning............................................................78 automatic current regulator......................272 Automatic light load searchRefer to ALLS (automatic light load search) automatic load cell calculation...............241 Automatic Speed Regulator.Refer to ASR (automatic speed regulator) auto-tuning.........................................................155 error messages...........................................169 motor constant...........................................168 rotating............................................................157 static.......................................................161, 165 auxiliary power terminals...............................32 labels....................................................................32 B B1/B2 terminals ...................................................20 basic configuration diagram..........................11 basic operation....................................................52 BatRun Fault.......................................................335 battery operation............................................234 battery power operation.............................178 braking operation in Speed (Synch) mode.........................192 in Speed mode...........................................191 in V/F and slip-compensation modes .......................................................................188 in V/F or slip-compensation + DC start and DC braking modes.......189 387 braking resistor....................................................20 braking torque............................................375 specifications.....................................375, 376 braking resistor specifications.......375, 376 braking resistors..................................................11 broadcast..............................................................306 BX337 BX terminal.....................................................24, 26 C C1 terminal.............................................................29 C2 terminal.............................................................29 C3 terminal.............................................................29 C4 terminal.............................................................29 cable ..............................................................................8 control cable specifications.......................9 ground cable specifications ......................9 power cable specifications.........................9 selection................................................................8 shielded twisted pair..................................49 cable connections...............................................15 auxiliary power terminals.........................32 circuit breaker..............................................373 control circuit connections .....................22 copper cable....................................................16 disassembling the cover..........................16 encoder wiring...............................................33 ground................................................................17 power terminal board................................18 wiring length...................................................31 cable tie............................................................31, 36 CAN.........................................................................325 CAN common terminal..................................30 CAN communication.....................................325 CAN high terminal.............................................30 CAN low terminal...............................................30 CAN read protocol.........................................330 charge indicator.......................................16, 334 charge lamp...........................................................16 cleaning.................................................................357 CM terminal...................................................24, 27 code number input...........................................60 COM (Communication group)........58, 131 COM Error............................................................337 command source configuration................76 command source selection.......................213 run/stop command source.................213 speed reference source.........................214 common parameter compatibility........309 common terminal ..Refer to 30C terminal, Refer to GND terminal communication RS232................................................................303 communication.................................................301 communication line connection......302 communication standards...................301 memory map...............................................303 PLC.....................................................................301 communication CAN...................................................................325 388 communication.................................................325 communication communication standards ...................325 communication PLC......................................................................325 communication communication line connection.......327 communication communication line connection.......327 Communication.........................Refer to COM (Communication group) communication system configuration302, 327 CON (Control group)..................58, 112, 247 considerations for installation........................5 air pressure..........................................................5 altitude/vibration .............................................5 ambient humidity............................................5 environmental factors...................................5 storing temperature.......................................5 control circuit connections............................22 Control group.............CON (Control group) control mode ........................................................58 control terminal block operation..............67 adjusting the analog input bias ..........68 adjusting the analog input gain..........69 cable connections ........................................68 setting parameter values .........................67 controlling magnetic contactors ............185 cursor keys..............................................................54 [DOWN] key....................................................54 [UP] key..............................................................54 D DC block time....................................................187 DC braking frequency ..................................187 DC braking time...............................................187 DC braking value.............................................187 DC start-up time..............................................187 DC start-up value............................................187 DC-braking stop...............................................215 deceleration stop................................................77 Digital input/output group....Refer to DIO (Digital input/output group) DIO (Digital input/output group)....58, 89, 171 DIS (Display group)........................58, 80, 133 display .......................................................................55 code data and unit.....................................57 code number..........................................56, 57 code type..........................................................57 inverter output current.............................56 motor control mode..................................55 motor speed...................................................55 operating frequency...................................56 operating status............................................56 operation commands................................56 parameter group..................................56, 57 speed commands........................................56 target frequency ...........................................56 389 torque..................................................................55 Display group...............Refer to DIS (Display group) disposal.......................................................357, 367 DriveView cable................................................332 E E/L (Elevator group)........................................119 E/L (Elevator operation group)...................58 earth leakage breaker...................................354 EEP Error................................................................337 electronic thermal overheating protection.......................................................275 elevator I/O add-on module.......................41 Elevator operation group..........Refer to E/L (Elevator operation group) ELIO add-on module........................................41 emergency stop Dec time..........................226 emergency stop terminal...............................26 Encoder Err..........................................................335 encoder error detection......................77, 280 encoder settings encoder direction......................................152 encoder error detection........................153 encoder LPF time......................................153 encoder pulse number..........................152 encoder tuning options.........................154 encoder type settings.............................154 EnDat encoder directions.....................154 encoder wiring.....................................................33 ENDAT ERROR...................................................337 ETH.......................Refer to electronic thermal overheating protection E-Thermal.............................................................335 external dimensions.......................................372 external fault trip signal terminal B......174 External-B.............................................................335 F FAN Error..............................................................335 Fan fault.................................................................289 FAN status............................................................186 fatal ..........................................................................334 fault fatal....................................................................334 latch...................................................................334 level....................................................................334 fault clearance terminal..................................26 fault history.........................................................338 confirming.....................................................338 storing..............................................................338 fault signal terminal (Form A contact) ......................................Refer to 30A terminal fault signal terminal (Form B contact) .......................................Refer to 30B terminal fault status display..........................................140 fault trip reset....................................................339 FE (Frame Error)................................................308 Flr/FHM Data .....................................................336 flux current level control.............................273 390 forced-cool ..........................................................276 forward operation......................................65, 70 forward operation/stop command terminal...............................................................26 free-run stop..........................................................77 frequency jump.................................................219 frequency setting (voltage) terminal.Refer to V1 terminal frequency setting(current/voltage) terminal.........................Refer to I1 terminal FUN (Function group)................58, 104, 212 Function group.....Refer to FUN (Function group) function groups...................................................58 AIO (Analog input/output group).....58, 95, 194 COM (Communication group)..58, 131 CON (Control group)...........58, 112, 247 DIO (Digital input/output group)......58, 89, 171 DIS (Display group)..................58, 80, 133 E/L (Elevator group).................................119 E/L (Elevator operation group).............58 FUN (Function group)..........58, 104, 212 PAR (Parameter group)..........58, 83, 143 PRT (Protection group).......58, 127, 274, 275, 292 USR (User group)...................58, 132, 296 fuse specifications ...........................................373 FX terminal......................................................24, 26 G GND terminal................................................28, 29 ground......................................................................17 class 1 ground................................................18 ground cable specifications......................9 Ground Fault......................................................335 H half duplex system..........................................302 high speed operation......................................66 Hold Time............................................................228 HW-Diag...............................................................335 I I1 terminal...............................................................28 IA (illegal data address)...............................308 ID (illegal data value)....................................308 IF (illegal function)...........................................308 initial pole position detection..................164 input and output specifications .............368 Input PO................................................................336 input terminal.......................................................26 BX terminal...............................................24, 26 CM terminal.............................................24, 27 FX terminal...............................................24, 26 GND terminal .................................................28 I1 terminal.........................................................28 P1–P7 terminal.......................................24, 27 391 RST terminal ............................................24, 26 RX terminal...............................................24, 26 SA terminal.......................................................27 SB terminal.......................................................27 SC terminal.......................................................27 V1 terminal.......................................................28 VR terminal.......................................................27 input/output open-phase detection....284 inspection annual inspection......................................361 bi-annual inspection................................364 daily inspection...........................................359 diod module inspection........................365 IGBT inspection...........................................365 installation...............................................................10 basic configuration diagram....................11 cable connections ........................................15 location..................................................................6 mounting the inverter...............................12 wiring...................................................................15 installation conditions.........................................5 Inv OLT...................................................................336 inverter output current....................................55 inverter overheat detection.......................287 inverter overheat warning..........................184 InvOver Heat.......................................................335 iS7 expansion common parameters....314 J Jog operation.....................................................173 Jog speed.............................................................217 jump code ......60, 143, 171, 194, 212, 247, 275, 292, 297 jumper switch.......................................................26 PNP/NPN selection.....................................26 K keypad...............................................................53, 54 [DOWN] key....................................................54 [ENT] key...........................................................54 [FWD] key .........................................................54 [MODE] key......................................................54 [PROG] key.......................................................54 [REV] key............................................................54 [SHIFT/ESC] key.............................................54 [STOP/RESET] key.........................................54 [UP] key..............................................................54 cursor keys .......................................................54 display.................................................................55 operation keys ...............................................54 keypad display .....................................................55 keypad features navigating directly to different codes ..........................................................................60 keypad operation...............................................64 forward operation................................65, 70 high speed operation................................66 low speed operation..................................65 reverse operation.................................65, 70 setting parameter values.........................64 392 L L100 (iV5L) common parameters ..........322 L100 common parameters ........................322 latch..........................................................................334 LCD display.............................................................55 leakage breaker................................................373 level..........................................................................334 lost command conditions ..........................203 lost command decision time....................204 low speed operation........................................65 Low Voltage........................................................335 Low Voltage 2....................................................288 low voltage warning......................................184 Low Voltage2......................................................336 LPF (Low pass filter) time constant.......178 LS INV RS232 detailed read protocol.306 LS INV RS232 detailed write protocol 307 LS INV RS232 error code............................308 FE (Frame Error)..........................................308 IA (illegal data address).........................308 ID (illegal data value)...............................308 IF (illegal function).....................................308 WM (write mode error).........................308 LS INV RS232 protocol.................................303 M macro definition...............................................297 magnetic contactor................................22, 373 maintenance.......................................................357 master.....................................................................302 megger test.............................................361, 364 monitoring fault status display....................................140 group display..................................................57 software version display........................142 Speed and Speed (Sync) mode display ...............................................................55, 133 user defined information display....135 V/F and Slip Comp mode display..134 V/F and Slip Comp mode display.....56 motor constant.................................................168 motor cooling options.................................152 motor features verifying rotational direction.................51 motor output voltage control.................266 motor pre-excite time..................................228 motor settings application mode options ...................148 capacity settings ........................................148 control mode options............................147 cooling option settings .........................152 input voltage settings.............................151 maximum motor speed settings....149, 150 minimum motor speed settings......149 motor base frequency settings.........150 motor base speed settings.................150 motor pole number settings..............150 rated current settings.............................151 393 rated motor voltage settings.............150 rated slip settings......................................150 switching frequency settings..............151 motor thermal protection...........................275 mounting bolt.......................................................12 multi-drop link system.................................325 multifunction analog input........................195 lost command conditions....................203 operation when command is lost...204 multifunction analog input lost command decision time.......................204 multifunction analog input terminal...195, 199 definition..............................................196, 199 multifunction analog output....................206 multifunction analog output terminal definition.........................................................206 multifunction auxiliary output terminal reversing..........................................................179 settings.............................................................179 multifunction digital input terminal .....172 definition.........................................................172 reversing the multifunction terminal ........................................................................178 multifunction digital output disabling..........................................................180 multifunction digital output terminal..179 multi-function input terminal......................27 P1–P7...........................................................24, 27 multifunction output terminal definition ........................................................187 multifunction output terminal (Form A contact)..Refer to C4 terminal, Refer to C3 terminal, Refer to C2 terminal, Refer to C1 terminal multifunction output terminal 1 (Form A contact)..Refer to A4 terminal, Refer to A3 terminal, Refer to A1 terminal multifunction output terminal 2 (Form A contact).......................Refer to A2 terminal multistep speed.............................76, 173, 217 N N (-) terminal........................................................20 network protocol.............................................303 NPN mode (Sink)...............................................46 O operating the inverter forward operation................................65, 70 high speed operation................................66 low speed operation..................................65 reverse operation.................................65, 70 with the control terminal block...........67 with the keypad............................................64 Output PO...........................................................335 output terminal......Refer to R/S/T terminal output/communication terminal...............28 AO1 terminal...................................................28 394 AO2 terminal...................................................28 Over Current.......................................................335 Over Current1....................................................338 Over Load.............................................................335 Over Speed..........................................................336 Over Voltage.......................................................335 overheat inverter overheat detection.................287 overload overload warning level...........................285 overload.................................................................285 overload overload warning time...........................285 overload overload limit...............................................287 overshoot prevention....................................252 overspeed fault detection..........................284 P P (+) terminal........................................................20 PAR (Parameter group).................58, 83, 143 parameter........................................................60, 61 duplicating parameter settings.........145 encoder-related parameters ...............152 parameter initialization...........................144 parameter label setting.............................61 parameter lock............................................146 parameter value setting............................60 setting the password...............................146 Parameter groupRefer to PAR (Parameter group) parameter initialization.................................144 part names................................................................4 parts illustrated.......................................................4 peripheral devices...........................................373 phase-to-phase voltage..............................353 PNP mode (Source)..........................................45 PNP/NPN mode selection switch (SW1) NPN mode (Sink).........................................46 PNP mode (Source)....................................45 pole position detection current..............165 pole position detection voltage.............165 post-installation checklist...............................48 potentiometer.......................................................27 power terminal board wiring......................18 power terminals B1/B2 terminals.............................................20 N (-) terminal..................................................20 P (+) terminal..................................................20 R/S/T terminals..............................................20 U/V/W terminals...........................................20 pre-excitation.....................................................176 pre-excitation time...................................188 preparing the installation.................................2 product identification..........................................2 product specification details.....................369 Protection groupRefer to PRT (Protection group) protocol LS INV RS232 protocol..........................303 395 PRT (Protection group)..58, 127, 274, 275, 292 Q quick reference........................................................v R R/S/T terminals..........................................20, 355 R/S/T terminals.....................................................22 rating braking resistor rated capacity375, 376 rating plate................................................................2 reactor................................................................11, 12 reactors specifications...................................373 reference speed acquisition......................182 reference speed agreement......................182 relay mode...........................................................193 replacement cycle............................................366 restart delay time after stop command ..............................................................................278 reverse operation........................................65, 70 reverse operation/stop command terminal.......................................................24, 26 RS-232....................................................................302 RS232......................................................................301 communication...........................................302 converter.........................................................302 RS232 communication...........................................302 RS232 to 9 pin cable.....................................332 RST terminal ..................................................24, 26 RX terminal.....................................................24, 26 S SA terminal.............................................................27 SAFETY A/B.........................................................336 safety information.................................................ii SB terminal.............................................................27 SC terminal.............................................................27 screw specification control circuit terminal screw.............374 S-curve Acc gradient.....................................223 S-curve Acc/Dec pattern.............................221 S-curve Dec gradient....................................224 self-cool.................................................................276 sequence common terminal.Refer to CM terminal short floor operation.....................................230 SINCOS Open....................................................337 slave.........................................................................302 slip............................................................................267 slip compensation...........................................267 software version display..............................142 SpdDev Err...........................................................337 specifications......................................................368 braking resistor specifications 375, 376 external dimensions.................................372 fuse specifications.....................................373 input and output specifications.......368 396 peripheral devices.....................................373 product specification details...............369 reactors specifications.............................373 terminal screw specifications..............374 speed controller................................................248 speed controller gain constant...............248 speed detection................................................181 speed deviation error settings.................283 speed reference................................................195 speed reference source configuration...76 start after DC-braking...................................216 stop mode................................................187, 214 storage...................................................................366 surge killer...............................................................22 T terminal for frequency reference setting ........................................Refer to VR terminal terminal screw specifications....................374 terminating resistor...........................................47 terminating resistor selector switch (SW2) .................................................................................47 test run......................................................................50 Them OP...............................................................336 timer............................................................................78 timer input...........................................................175 timer output........................................................183 torque........................................................................15 torque balance value...............................256 torque bias .........................................195, 254 torque bias options .................................177 torque current standard........................254 torque detection........................................185 torque limit definition.............................253 torque limit detection.............................185 torque boost......................................................257 auto torque boost....................................259 forward torque boost.............................257 manual torque boost..............................257 reverse torque boost..............................257 trip............................................................................334 troubleshooting..........................................339 troubleshooting................................................334 fault trips ........................................................339 installation......................................................344 other faults....................................................351 U U/V/W terminals..............................20, 22, 355 user code definition.......................................299 user defined information display...........135 user group display..........................................142 user manuals..............................................................i add-on module user manuals..................i User Sequence group.Refer to USR (User sequence group) using the keypad................................................59 groups/codes..................................................59 moving directly to a code......................60 parameter setting.................................60, 61 397 USR (User group)..........................58, 132, 296 V V/F control...........................................................263 linear V/F pattern operation...............263 user V/F pattern operation..................264 V1 terminal.............................................................28 voltage drop..........................................................21 voltage/current output terminal...Refer to AO2 terminal, Refer to AO1 terminal VR terminal.............................................................27 W wiring....................................................................8, 15 auxiliary power terminals.........................32 circuit breaker..............................................373 control circuit connections.....................22 copper cable...................................................16 disassembling the cover..........................16 encoder wiring...............................................33 ground................................................................17 power terminal board...............................18 re-assembling the cover..........................47 wiring length...................................................31 WM (write mode error)...............................308 X XCEL-H...................................................................174 XCEL-L ....................................................................174 Z zero-speed detection....................................181 Disclaimer of Liability LS ELECTRIC has reviewed the information in this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. However, LS ELECTRIC cannot guarantee full consistency, nor be responsible for any damages or compensation, since variance cannot be precluded entirely. Please check again the version of this publication before you use the product. ⓒ LS ELECTRIC Co., Ltd 2020 All Right Reserved. LSLV-L100 / 2020.10 ■ Headquarter LS-ro 127(Hogye-dong) Dongan-gu, Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-Do, 14119, Korea ■ Seoul Office LS Yongsan Tower, 92, Hangang-daero, Yongsan-gu, Seoul, 04386, Korea Tel: 82-2-2034-4033, 4888, 4703 Fax: 82-2-2034-4588 E-mail: automation@lselectric.co.kr ■ Overseas Subsidiaries • LS ELECTRIC Japan Co., Ltd. (Tokyo, Japan) Tel: 81-3-6268-8241 E-Mail: jschuna@lselectric.biz • LS ELECTRIC (Dalian) Co., Ltd. (Dalian, China) Tel: 86-411-8730-6495 E-Mail: jiheo@lselectric.com.cn •LS ELECTRIC (Wuxi) Co., Ltd. (Wuxi, China) Tel: 86-510-6851-6666 E-Mail: sblee@lselectric.co.kr •LS ELECTRIC Vietnam Co., Ltd. Tel: 84-93-631-4099 E-Mail: jhchoi4@lselectric.biz (Hanoi) Tel: 84-28-3823-7890 E-Mail: sjbaik@lselectric.biz (Hochiminh) • LS ELECTRIC Middle East FZE (Dubai, U.A.E.) Tel: 971-4-886-5360 E-Mail: salesme@lselectric.biz • LS ELECTRIC Europe B.V. (Hoofddorf, Netherlands) Tel: 31-20-654-1424 E-Mail: europartner@lselectric.biz • LS ELECTRIC America Inc. (Chicago, USA) Tel: 1-800-891-2941 E-Mail: sales.us@lselectricamerica.com E-Mail: ywyun@lselectricamerica.com ■ Overseas Branches • LS ELECTRIC Tokyo Office (Japan) Tel: 81-3-6268-8241 E-Mail: jschuna@lselectric.biz • LS ELECTRIC Beijing Office (China) Tel: 86-10-5095-1631 E-Mail: khpaek@lselectric.com.cn • LS ELECTRIC Shanghai Office (China) Tel: 86-21-5237-9977 E-Mail: tsjun@lselectric.com.cn • LS ELECTRIC Guangzhou Office (China) Tel: 86-20-3818-2883 E-Mail: chenxs@lselectric.com.cn • LS ELECTRIC Chengdu Office (China) Tel: 86-28-8670-3201 E-Mail: yangcf@lselectric.com.cn • LS ELECTRIC Qingdao Office (China) Tel: 86-532-8501-2065 E-Mail: wangzy@lselectric.com.cn • LS ELECTRIC Nanjing Office (China) Tel:86-25-8467-0005 E-Mail: ylong@lselectric.com.cn • LS ELECTRIC Bangkok Office (Thailand) Tel: 66-90-950-9683 E-Mail: sjleet@lselectric.biz • LS ELECTRIC Jakarta Office (Indonesia) Tel: 62-21-2933-7614 E-Mail: dioh@lselectric.biz • LS ELECTRIC Moscow Office (Russia) Tel: 7-499-682-6130 E-Mail: jdpark1@lselectric.biz • LS ELECTRIC America Western Office (Irvine, USA) Tel: 1-949-333-3140 LS ELECTRIC Co., Ltd.